2011 technical binder
DESCRIPTION
2011 Technical BinderTRANSCRIPT
Philips Dynalite
Lighting Systems and Controls
t +61 2 8338 9899 f +61 2 8338 9333 [email protected] www.philips.com/dynalite
Dear Colleague,
Welcome to our updated Technical Binder; your complete guide to the Philips Dynalite
award-winning range of innovative lighting control products.
As an industry leader in the creation of energy efficient and innovative lighting control solutions, this technical binder is just
one way Philips Dynalite brings you comprehensive advice on enhancing the design and functionality of your next project.
Our world-leading products succeed because they bring together scalability, flexibility and innovation, in a smart way to get
better results for our customers. Inside, you’ll discover how Philips Dynalite control solutions can work for you.
SecTion one is designed to assist you in accessing additional, valuable marketing collateral.
SecTion TWo contains comprehensive information on our complete range of hardware and software products that
enable standard and advanced levels of lighting control, energy management and seamless integration with third-party
systems.
SecTion Three contains updated application guides based on real-world applications; scenarios you’ll probably
encounter on a daily basis. The guides contain simple advice and techniques for getting the best result for your project.
We’ll be regularly adding to and updating this section as technologies change. Of course, timely advice is always available
from your local Philips Dynalite contact or the website.
SecTion Four contains technical guides with practical information on how the system goes together, control principles,
load compatibility, programming methods, systems integration and more.
As we invest heavily in research and development, we are constantly introducing new products and using the latest
technology as a platform for growth and we’ll endeavour to regularly update this technical binder. Naturally, you’ll find the
most up-to-date product information on our website.
I’m confident the user-friendly information in this technical binder will inspire you to select Philips Dynalite as your controls
solution in any future project – from a simple one dimmer, one panel system through to a huge multi-channel network.
Finally, don’t forget to take advantage of our advisory service, which offers you our expertise on the most cost-effective
ways to design a control system that meets the needs of your project.
I hope you enjoy using this technical binder.
Peter GlasheenGlobal Marketing Manager
Philips Dynalite
ContentsSection 1 Marketing Collateral
Philips Dynalite Corporate Profile
An Introduction to the Philips Dynalite Control System
Marketing Collateral Overview
Section 2 Technical Data Sheets
User InterfacesDR2PA Revolution Series User Control Panels - AU/US Size
DR2PE Revolution Series User Control Panels - EU/UK Size
DPN Classic Series User Control Panels - AU/US Size
DPNE Classic Series User Control Panels - EU/UK Size
DPN-SF Classic Series User Control Panels - AU/US Size
DPNE-SF Classic Series User Control Panels - EU/UK Size
DLP Standard Series User Control Panels - AU/US Size
DLPE Standard Series User Control Panels - EU/UK Size
DL2P Standard Series User Control Panels - AU/US size
DPWE Standard Series User Control Panels - EU/UK Size
DTP100 Colour Touchscreen
DTP170 Colour Touchscreen
DTC602 & DTCE602 Timer Clock
DDTC001 Timer Clock
DUS804C Multifunction Sensor
DUS804C-UP Multifunction Sensor
DUS704 Universal Sensors
DTS900 & DTS900M Temperature Sensors
Relay and Multi-use ControllersDMRC210 2 x 10 Amp Relay Controller
DDRC810-GL 8 x 10 Amp Relay Controller
DDRC810DT-GL 8 x 10 Amp Mulit-use Relay Controller
DDRC420FR 4 x 20 Amp Relay Controller
DDRC820FR 8 x 20 Amp Relay Controller
DDRC1220FR-GL 12 x 20 Amp Relay Controller
DRC1205 12 x 5 Amp Relay Controller
DRC810DT 8 x 10 Amp Relay Controller
DRC1210 & DRC1220GL 12 x 10 Amp & 12 x 20 Amp Relay Controllers
Leading Edge Dimmer ControllersDDLE802 8 x 2 Amp Leading Edge Dimmer Controller
DLE1203 12 x 3 Amp Leading Edge Dimmer Controller
DLE405 4 x 5 Amp Leading Edge Dimmer Controller
DLE1205 12 x 5 Amp Leading Edge Dimmer Controller
DLE410 4 x 10 Amp Leading Edge Dimmer Controller
DLE1210GL 12 x 10 Amp Leading Edge Dimmer Controller
DLE1210 12 x 10 Amp Leading Edge Dimmer Controller
DLE120-S 1 x 20 Amp Leading Edge Dimmer Controller
DLE220-S 2 x 20 Amp Leading Edge Dimmer Controller
DLE1220GL-S 12 x 20 Amp Leading Edge Dimmer Controller
Contents continuedTrailing Edge Dimmer ControllersDTE310 3 x 10 Amp Trailing Edge Dimmer Controller
DTE1210 12 x 10 Amp Trailing Edge Dimmer Controller
Signal Dimmer ControllersDDBC516FR Dimmer Controller
DBC905 9 x 5 Amp Dimmer Controller
DDBC120FR-DALI Dimmer Controller
DDBC300-DALI Dimmer Controller
DDBC320-DALI Dimmer Controller
DMBC110 1 x 10 Amp Signal Dimmer & Relay Controller
DBC410 4 x 10 Amp Dimmer Controller
DBC1205 12 x 5 Amp Dimmer Controller
DDBC1200 12 x Signal Dimmer Controller
DBC1210 & DBC1220GL 12 x 10 Amp & 12 x 20 Amp 1-10V/DSI Dimmer Controllers
LED PWM ControllersDDLEDC60035 6 x 350mA PWM Controller
DDLEDC401 4 x 1 Amp PWM Controller
DDLEDC605-GL 6 x 5 Amp PWM Controller
Multipurpose ControllersDDMC802 8 x 2 Amp Multipurpose Modular Controller
DDMC802GL 8 x 2 Amp Multipurpose Modular Controller
DDLE6RC202 6 x 2 Amp Leading Edge; 2 x 2 Amp relay Multipurpose Controller
DMC810GL 4 x 10 Amp Leading Edge; 4 x 1- Amp Signal Dimmer Multipurpose Controller
Integration DevicesDNG100BT Ethernet Gateway
DMNG100BT Ethernet Gateway
DDNG100BT Ethernet Gateway
DAC100BT Area Controller
DNG232 RS232 Network Gateway
DMNG232 RS232 Network Gateway
DDNG232 RS232 Network Gateway
DDNG485 Network Gateway
DDNI485 Network Passive Gateway
DNG485 RS485/DMX Gateway
DTK622 Network Gateway
DDNI-LON LON Gateway
DDNG-KNX KNX Network Gateway
DDNG-BACnet BACnet Network Gateway
DDMIDC8 Low Level Input Integrator
DPMI940 Dry Contact Gateway
DIR-TX8 Infra-red Transmitter
DDFCUC024 Fan Coil Unit Controller
Contents continuedEnvision SoftwareDLight III Server Gateway Integration Software
Network Devices & Commissioning ToolsDDNP1501 Network Power Supply
DDPB22RJ12 Network Junction Box
DyNet 305m Data Cable Pack
DyNetSFLAT6 200m Cable Roll and Cable Kits
DPP601 Portable Programmer
Section 3 Application Guides
Aged care
Apartment
Boardroom
Hotel ballroom
Lecture theatre
Luxury home
Office
Themed venue
Section 4 Technical Guides
Control principles
Emergency lighting
LED control
Load compatibility
Programming methods
Systems integration
1. Marketing C
ollateral
Philips Dynalite Marketing Collateral Section 1.1
Philips Dynalite control system
An introduction to thePhilips Dynalite Training Academy
Ecolinx An integrated lighting and energy management system
Apple iPad/ iPhone Applications for smart automation
DynamicTouch
Control solutions for hotels
Smart hotel. Smart return.
Use
r In
terf
aces
Networked Controls Product Catalogue
Removing complexity in lighting energy management
EcoSetAdvanced lighting controls made easy – save energy, increase productivity and optimise user comfort
Envision softwareSophisticated, productive, reliable and energy efficient lighting control solutions
Philips Dynalite
Philips Dynalite Corporate Profile A 12 page brochure providing an overview of Philips Dynalite, our market segments, locations, products and services.Part number: CORP-0008
Envision software An 8 page brochure on Envision – commissioning, operational and energy management software that makes your lighting programming a simple process.Part number: SW-0012
EcoSet A 6 page brochure on EcoSet – a networked lighting control system designed to leverage the benefits of occupancy based energy-savings technology.Part number: ECOS-0010
Networked Controls Product CatalogueAn 80 page comprehensive product catalogue on the Philips Dynalite product range and controls solutions.Part number: CAT-0015
Smart Hotel A 16 page brochure detailing Philips Dynalite’s solution for hotels – promoting guest comfort, brand differentiation and operational efficiency.Part number: HOSP-0013
DynamicTouchA 4 page brochure on DynamicTouch – Apple iPad and iPhone applications for smart automation.Part number: DT-0011
Ecolinx An 8 page brochure detailing Ecolinx, a fully integrated lighting energy management system for commercial environments.Part number: ECOL-0006
Philips Dynalite Training Academy A 24 page brochure that gives an overview of the Philips Dynalite training courses and their content.Part number: TRNG-0016
Indoor Network Controls Product CatalogueA 20 page brochure detailing the functionality of different applications and systems.Part number: TECH-0004
Marketing Collateral
Philips Dynalite Marketing CollateralSection 1.2
Please contact your local Philips Dynalite Representative to get a copy of our brochures.
N.B. Brochures and information within may vary in regions due to local customisation and product differentiation.
If brochures are updated or replaced, we will endeavour to send you the most up-to-date version available at time of ordering.
Philips DynaliteDimension ProgramGuide for Dealers
DD-0006-1110-BMAUS-2.5K
Bring to life your smart home experience!With a Philips Dynalite Dimension Dealer
To orDEr broCHurES
Smart Home A 6 page brochure for home owners on automation technologies and benefits of using a Philips Dynalite Dimension Dealer.Part number: HOME-0018
It all comes together with your Philips Dynalite Dimension Dealer
Smart Automation for all your applications
Energy management for commercial buildings
Energy Management for Commercial buildings A 24 page informational brochure on energy management for commercial environments. Includes: green rating tools, guidelines, strategies and Philips Dynalite management systems.Part number: EM-0017
Smart Automation for all your applicationsAn 8 page brochure targeting designers, architects, builders, electrical contractors and systems integrators. Highlights benefits of using a Dimension Dealer for all your smart automation projects.Part number: SMRT-0026
RevolutionRe-think, re-invent, re-define.
revolutionAn 8 page brochure detailing the Revolution Panels – providing the ultimate user interface solution delivering complete aesthetic and functional flexibility. Part number: GEN-0003
Philips Dynalite Dimension Program Guide for DealersA 12 page information brochure on becoming an accredited Philips Dynalite Dimension Dealer, member benefits, certification and training.Part number: DD-0006
LightnewsVolume 11
LightnewsLighting the way for ‘smart’ apartmentspage 16
New app for Apple devicespage 12
Westfield London:Lighting up an iconpage 14
The critical role of LED controlpage 18
Lightnews A Philips Dynalite global publication that is released three times a year. It includes the latest updates on products, news and projects.
Marketing Collateral
2. Technical Datasheets
User Interfaces
Providing end-users with an intuitive means of interaction with the lighting system, Philips Dynalite user interfaces come in a wide range of styles and finishes to match any project budget or décor requirements.
This range includes wall panels, touchscreens, universal sensors, timer clocks and temperature sensors.
DR2PARevolution Series
User Control Panels
The second generation DR2P Revolution series user control panels incorporate a clip-on cover fastening system which provides the ultimate in aesthetic design flexibility. DR2P series panels are available in a range of configurations including single column, which provides arrangements of one to eight buttons and double or triple column designs for up to twenty four buttons. Smooth action buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving, further assisting the identification of button function. Button backlighting is also provided to illuminate engraved text, improving night time panel location and operation. Optional Infra-red (IR) receive capabilities are available, eliminating the need for separate sensors where IR remote control operation is required.
Supply12V DC 50mA from the DyNet network
Control Inputs1 x RS 485 DyNet serial port
Front Cover FinishesStandard: Brushed Stainless Steel, White Glass, Black Glass. An extensive designer range of cover finishes is also available, see page 4.
Button ColoursCharcoal grey, white or silver.
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
LED IndicatorsStatus indicator - BlueButton backlighting - White(Other colours available on request)
Operating Environment0-50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
MaterialsBezel, Key Carrier and Grid Plate - PolycarbonateStandard Covers - see page 4.
WeightPacked weight 0.2kg
technical data
alternate cover finishes
The Philips Dynalite DR2P Revolution series user control panels include an extensive designer range of cover and button cap colour accessories. Available cover finishes include brushed stainless steel, white glass and black glass as standard and can encompass any finish imaginable; wood grain, processed stone, laminate, fabric as custom orders. To complement these finishes, button caps are available in silver, white and charcoal grey, providing a wide range of décor matching possibilities. A dedicated IR receive switch cap is also available.
DR2P-GXX-X-C-BG-R-BW-X-C-Entry Black Borosilicate Glass, Charcoal Buttons
DR2P-MXX-X-C-SS-R-BW-X-C-Bath1 Brushed Stainless Steel, Charcoal Buttons
DR2P-MXX-X-C-WE-R-BV-X-C-Bath3 White Powder Coated, Charcoal Buttons
DR2P-LXX-S-AB-R-BO-C-Lounge2 Antique Bronze, Silver Buttons
DR2P-LXX-S-SG-R-BO-C-Lounge1 White Optically Clear Glass, Silver Buttons
DR2PARevolution Series
User Control Panels
dimensions
functionality All Philips Dynalite panels use a network protocol called Dynet to communicate with other network devices. This dedicated lighting control protocol allows panels to communicate directly with each other, lighting load controllers and other integration devices. This network architecture is not dependant on a central processor, so there is no single point of network failure and makes for more efficient commissioning of the system features. Every Philips Dynalite user interface is capable of performing both simple and advanced functions without the need for additional network devices. Each button on the panel has a range of standard control options that can be individually configured to perform features such as toggle lighting on/off, ramp of lighting up/down, changing an area scene and perform virtual room joins. By using these built-in functions end users can take full control of their site. The Philips Dynalite panel range also supports inbuilt tasking which allows the panels to perform multiple complex functions from the press of a single button. A task triggered from a single button press may be used to affect an entire system changing the lighting scenes in many different areas, initiating a “PANIC” mode or perform some more complex function such as requesting information from other devices like a network timer clock, then sending out the required scene for the particular season. Tasks can be programmed into the panels during commissioning of the system that allows the end-user to interact with the lighting control system more intuitively and allows one button press to perform multiple functions for true automation.
70
28.3
74.6
117
13.6 5.4
20.6 43
84
Single Gang 1 Column
DR2PARevolution Series
User Control Panels
User requirements can shift over time and necessitate changes to, or additions of, buttons on an existing panel. Button column assemblies and covers snap-on, enabling changes to be easily accommodated, without the need for any special tools or extra wiring.
snap-on finish accessories
Button column assemblies and covers snap-on, enabling changes to be easily accommodated.
Single Gang Landscape 3 Column
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DR2PARevolution Series
User Control Panels
panel ordering information
DR2PA Data Sheet Rev G April 2011
Detailed below are the DR2P configuration option product codes. Use these codes to specify your requirements.
DR2PA-MXX-X-C-WE-P-BW-X-C-Bath3
Series Description
DR2PA AsiaPac
DR2PE European/UK
IR Keycaps
X Not fitted
I Fitted**
Option Description
BW Blue Indicator LED & White Backlight – only for charcoal buttons
BO Blue Indicator LED & Orange Backlight – all button colours
R 2 x RJ12 DyNet Sockets
P Pluggable Screw Terminal
Option Description
X No Dipswitches fitted
C Custom Engraving
S Standard Engraving#
X No Engraving
Cover Finish Description
SS Brushed Stainless Steel
BG Black Borosilicate Glass
SG White Optically Clear Starfire Glass
PB Polished Brass (Gold Plated Polished Stainless)
AB Antique Bronze
WE White (Powder Coated Stainless)
MS Mirrored Stainless
XX No Cover
Button Colour
Description
W White
C Charcoal
S Silver
Panel Description – shown if Custom Engraving option taken – maximum 8 characters
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M Q* R*
ON/OFFOFF
ON
OFF
ON
2 2
2
2
2
2
2 2 2
3
3
3 3 3 3
4
4 4 4 14 1
5 5 25 2
6 3OFF OFF
2
3OFFOFF OFF
OFFOFF
OFF
OFFOFF
OFF
OFF
11
1
1
11
1 1 1
1
* OLEDs come standard configuration as non-programmed. e.g. include applications for HVAC and AV control. Maximum one OLED per panel and always the right hand side column.
# Note: If ‘Standard’ Engraving chosen then buttons will be engraved as shown above for single column panels. In case of 2 & 3 column panels then numbering will start at top most left hand button and continue to bottom most right hand numbered button.
** If IR receive switch cap fitted then button colour choice must be charcoal.
DR2PERevolution Series
User Control Panels
The second generation DR2PE series user control panels incorporate a revolutionary clip-on cover fastening system which provides the ultimate in aesthetic design flexibility. DR2PE series panels are available in a range of configurations including single column, which provides arrangements of one to eight buttons and double or triple column designs for up to twenty four buttons. Smooth action buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving, further assisting the identification of button function. Button backlighting is also provided to illuminate engraved text, improving night time panel location and operation. Optional Infra-red (IR) receive capabilities are available, eliminating the need for separate sensors where IR remote control operation is required.
Supply12V DC 50mA from the DyNet network
Control Inputs1 x RS 485 DyNet serial port
Front Cover FinishesStandard: Brushed Stainless Steel, White Glass, Black Glass. An extensive designer range of cover finishes is also available, see page 4.
Button ColoursCharcoal grey, white or silver.
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
LED IndicatorsStatus indicator - BlueButton backlighting - White or Orange for Charcoal Grey buttons - Orange only for White or Silver buttons
Operating Environment0-50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
MaterialsBezel, Key Carrier and Grid Plate - PolycarbonateStandard Covers - see page 4
WeightPacked weight 0.2kg
technical data
alternate cover finishes
The Philips Dynalite DR2PE Revolution series user control panels include an extensive designer range of cover and button cap colour accessories. Available cover finishes include brushed stainless steel, white glass and black glass as standard and can encompass any finish imaginable; wood grain, processed stone, laminate, fabric as custom orders. To complement these finishes, button caps are available in silver, white and charcoal grey, providing a wide range of décor matching possibilities. A dedicated IR receive switch cap is also available.
DR2PE-MXX-X-C-SS-P-BW-X-C-Bath1 Stainless Steel, Charcoal Buttons
DR2PE-GXX-X-C-BG-P-BW-X-C-Entry Black Borosilicate Glass, Charcoal Buttons
DR2PE-LXX-X-S-SG-P-BO-X-C-Lounge1 White Optically Clear Glass, Silver Buttons
DR2PE-LXX-X-C-PB-P-BW-X-C-Level4Polishes Brass, White Buttons
DR2PE-JXX-X-C-MS-P-BW-X-C-Study2Mirrored Stainless, White Buttons
DR2PE-LXX-X-S-AB-P-BO-X-C-Lounge2Antique Bronze, Silver Buttons
DR2PE-MXX-X-C-WE-P-BW-X-C-Bath3White Powder Coated, Charcoal Buttons
DR2PERevolution Series
User Control Panels
dimensions
functionality All Philips Dynalite panels use a network protocol called Dynet to communicate with other network devices. This dedicated lighting control protocol allows panels to communicate directly with each other, lighting load controllers and other integration devices. This network architecture is not dependant on a central processor, so there is no single point of network failure and makes for more efficient commissioning of the system features. Every Philips Dynalite user interface is capable of performing both simple and advanced functions without the need for additional network devices. Each button on the panel has a range of standard control options that can be individually configured to perform features such as toggle lighting on/off, ramp of lighting up/down, changing an area scene and perform virtual room joins. By using these built-in functions end users can take full control of their site. The Philips Dynalite panel range also supports inbuilt tasking which allows the panels to perform multiple complex functions from the press of a single button. A task triggered from a single button press may be used to affect an entire system changing the lighting scenes in many different areas, initiating a “PANIC” mode or perform some more complex function such as requesting information from other devices like a network timer clock, then sending out the required scene for the particular season. Tasks can be programmed into the panels during commissioning of the system that allows the end-user to interact with the lighting control system more intuitively and allows one button press to perform multiple functions for true automation.
Single Gang 1 Column
28.3
50
50
R30
60.3 88.4
88.
4
5.4 12.5
20.7
DR2PERevolution Series
User Control Panels
User requirements can shift over time and necessitate changes to or additions of, buttons on an existing panel. Button column assemblies and covers snap-on, enabling changes to be easily accommodated, without the need for any special tools or extra wiring.
snap-on finish accessories
Button column assemblies and covers snap-on, enabling changes to be easily accommodated.
Double Gang 3 Column
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DR2PERevolution Series
User Control Panels
panel ordering information Detailed below are the DR2P configuration option product codes. Use these codes to specify your requirements.
DR2PE Data Sheet Rev J April 2011
DR2PE-MXX-X-C-WE-P-BW-X-C-Bath3
Series Description
DR2PA AsiaPac
DR2PE European/UK
IR Keycaps
X Not fitted
I Fitted**
Option Description
BW Blue Indicator LED & White Backlight – only for charcoal buttons
BO Blue Indicator LED & Orange Backlight – all button colours
R 2 x RJ12 DyNet Sockets
P Pluggable Screw Terminal
Option Description
X No Dipswitches fitted
C Custom Engraving
S Standard Engraving#
X No Engraving
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M Q* R*
Cover Finish Description
SS Brushed Stainless Steel
BG Black Borosilicate Glass
SG White Optically Clear Starfire Glass
PB Polished Brass (Gold Plated Polished Stainless)
AB Antique Bronze
WE White (Powder Coated Stainless)
MS Mirrored Stainless
XX No Cover
Button Colour
Description
W White
C Charcoal
S Silver
Panel Description – shown if Custom Engraving option taken – maximum 8 characters
ON/OFFOFF
ON
OFF
ON
2 2
2
2
2
2
2 2 2
3
3
3 3 3 3
4
4 4 4 14 1
5 5 25 2
6 3OFF OFF
2
3OFFOFF OFF
OFFOFF
OFF
OFFOFF
OFF
OFF
11
1
1
11
1 1 1
1
* OLEDs come standard configuration as non-programmed. e.g. include applications for HVAC and AV control. Maximum one OLED per panel and always the right hand side column.
# Note: If ‘Standard’ Engraving chosen then buttons will be engraved as shown above for single column panels. In case of 2 & 3 column panels then numbering will start at top most left hand button and continue to bottom most right hand numbered button.
** If IR receive switch cap fitted then button colour choice must be charcoal.
Mirrored Stainless Steel
Gold Plated Stainless Steel
Coated Solid Brass
DPNClassic Series
User Control Panels
Philips Dynalite DPN series user control panels are a popular choice for commercial and residential applications, providing integrated automation solutions. These robust panels are supplied as standard in a brushed stainless steel finish, with square button caps in silver, black bezel and black engraving. Smooth action buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving, further assisting the identification of button function. Custom design, finish and capability options further enhance the DPN series, offering superior choice and functionality.
Supply12V DC 20mA from the DyNet network
Front Cover FinishesBrushed Stainless Steel (standard),Gold Plated Stainless Steel,Mirrored Stainless Steel,Coated Solid Brass plated,Powdercoated colours and other metal finishes available upon request.
Button ColoursSilver (standard), Charcoal Grey
LED IndicatorsBlue (standard), Green or Red. Other colours available on request.
Operating Climate0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non-condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
MaterialsPlate - Stainless Steel or Solid BrassButton Cap - Metallized ABS plastic
WeightPacked weight 0.15kg
technical data
custom panels The Philips Dynalite DPN user control panels are available ex-stock in 13 standard layouts (see overleaf). Occasionally, the specific requirements of a project call for a panel not found within the standard range. Philips Dynalite DPN custom panels can be easily designed using any of the following components. Consult your Philips Dynalite dealer for advice.
Keyswitch: Provides dry contact inputs to the control panel micro-processor board. Commonly used to lock out the functionality of a panel so that only authorised users can access the panel or a particular function. They are generally used for partition control, panic switches or panel enable/disable.
Mechanical Fader: Faders are used to control the level of an individual channel or as a ‘master’ fader to control an entire room or area. The position of the fader gives a visual indication of the light level. Preset scenes are programmed by adjusting light levels using the faders, then pressing and holding the corresponding scene button for several seconds.
Button Fader: Provides individual channel level control, combined with the flexibility to allow ‘join’ of fader panels.
Network Socket: An RJ12 socket that facilitates connection of a computer to the DyNet network.
Engraving: Panel engraving is used to clarify the functionality of a panel using words or diagrams. Engraving is available in black or white lettering, either on button caps or the panel fascia. Each button cap can accommodate up to seven characters.
DPNClassic Series
User Control Panels
functionality All Philips Dynalite panels use a network protocol called Dynet to communicate with other network devices. This dedicated lighting control protocol allows panels to communicate directly with each other, lighting load controllers and other integration devices. This network architecture is not dependant on a central processor, so there is no single point of network failure and makes for more efficient commissioning of the system features. Every Philips Dynalite user interface is capable of performing both simple and advanced functions without the need for additional network devices. Each button on the panel has a range of standard control options that can be individually configured to perform features such as toggle lighting on/off, ramp of lighting up/down, changing an area scene and perform virtual room joins. By using these built-in functions end users can take full control of their site. The Philips Dynalite panel range also supports inbuilt tasking which allows the panels to perform multiple complex functions from the press of a single button. A task triggered from a single button press may be used to affect an entire system changing the lighting scenes in many different areas, initiating a “PANIC” mode or perform some more complex function such as requesting information from other devices like a network timer clock, then sending out the required scene for the particular season. Tasks can be programmed into the panels during commissioning of the system that allows the end-user to interact with the lighting control system more intuitively and allows one button press to perform multiple functions for true automation.
dimensions
115
72
33.6
69.
1
16.1 30.3
1.6
84
48.4
DPNClassic Series
User Control Panels
User requirements can shift over time and necessitate changes to or additions of, buttons on an existing panel. Buttons, bezels and covers snap-on, enabling changes to be easily accommodated, without the need for any tools or extra wiring.
standard panel configurations
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPN308DyNet Network SocketButton: NonePlate: BlankH 115mm x W 72mm1 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPN914On/Off ToggleButton: On/OffPlate: BlankH 115mm x W 72mm1 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPN921On, OffButtons: On, OffPlate: BlankH 115mm x W 72mm1 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPN941PresetButtons: 1-3, OffPlate: BlankH 115mm x W 72mm1 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPN963Preset, Ramp Up, Ramp DownButtons: 1-3, Off, Up, Down. Plate: BlankH 115mm x W 72mm1 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPN981PresetButtons: 1-7, OffPlate: BlankH 115mm x W 72mm1 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPN982ProgrammingButtons: 1-4, Off, Up, Down, Program. Plate: BlankH 115mm x W 72mm1 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPN982DProgramming, KeyswitchButtons: 1-4, Up, Down, Off, Program. Plate: Panel Enable/DisableH 115mm x W 118mm2 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPN981DNPreset, Keyswitch, Network SocketButtons: 1-7, OffPlate: Panel Enable/DisableH 115mm x W 118mm2 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPN9103Preset, Ramp Up, Ramp DownButtons: 1-7, Off, Up, DownPlate: BlankH 115mm x W 118mm2 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPN9121PresetButtons: 1-11, OffPlate: BlankH 115mm x W 118mm2 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPN9122ProgrammingButtons: 1-8, Off, Up, Down, Program. Plate: BlankH 115mm x W 118mm2 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPN9161PresetButtons: 1-15, OffPlate: BlankH 115mm x W 118mm2 gang
ON/OFF
ON
OFF
1
2
3
OFF
1
2
3
4
1 5
2 6
3 7
4 OFF
1
2
3
4
OFF
PROGRAM
1
2
3
4
ENABLE
DISABLE
OFF
PROGRAM
PANEL
1
2
3
4
ENABLE
DISABLE
PANEL
5
6
7
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
OFF8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OFF
OFF
PROGRAM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
8
13
14
15
OFF12
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DPNClassic Series
User Control Panels
panel ordering information In addition to the standard layout codes provided on page 3, the following non-stock items may be ordered using the corresponding catalogue numbers..
stock engraved individual button caps
DPN Data Sheet Rev E April 2011
DPN926 2 Button 2 Room Join Panel DPN951F4 5 Button Preset 4 Fader PanelDPN908J 0 Button Panel with 2 Room Join Keyswitch DPN951F6 5 Button Preset 6 Fader PanelDPN908J3 0 Button Panel with 3 Room Join Keyswitch DPN951F8 5 Button Preset 8 Fader PanelDPN941F1 4 Button Preset Panel with Single Fader DPN951F12 5 Button Preset 12 Fader PanelDPN941D 4 Button Preset Panel with Panel Enable Keyswitch DPN981D 8 Button Preset with Panel Enable KeyswitchDPN941N 4 Button Preset Panel with DyNet Socket DPN981J 8 Button Preset Panel with 2 Room Join KeyswitchDPN941J 4 Button Preset Panel with 2 Room Join Keyswitch DPN981J3 8 Button Preset Panel with 3 Room Join KeyswitchDPN941J3 4 Button Preset Panel with 3 Room Join Keyswitch DPN981N 8 Button Preset Panel with DyNet SocketDPN946 4 Button 3 Room Join Panel DPN982J 8 Button Program Panel with 2 Room Join KeyswitchDPN946D 4 Button 3 Room Join Panel with Disable Keyswitch DPN982J3 8 Button Program Panel with 3 Room Join Keyswitch
Engraving Detail Silver with LED Charcoal Grey with LED Silver without LED Charcoal Grey without LED
None (Blank) 900-011 900-009 900-005 900-0031 270-046 270-026 - -2 270-053 270-030 - -3 270-054 270-031 - -4 270-055 270-032 - -5 270-056 270-033 - -6 270-057 270-034 - -7 270-058 270-035 - -8 270-059 270-036 - -9 270-060 270-037 - -10 270-047 270-027 - -11 270-048 - - -12 270-049 - - -13 270-050 - - -14 270-051 - - -15 270-052 - - -
270-075 270-044 270-023 270-017270-067 270-038 270-019 270-013
ON 270-072 270-042 - -OFF 270-071 270-041 270-021 270-015
ON/OFF 270-073 - - -MANUAL 270-068 270-039 - -
DAY 270-066 - - -NIGHT 270-070 - - -
SECURITY 270-074 - - -CLEAN 270-065 - - -
PROGRAM - - 270-022 270-016
custom engraved individual button caps Engraving details must accompany order - consult your Philips Dynalite Dealer for advice.
Style Silver Charcoal Greywith LED window 270-089 270-088without LED window 270-087 270-086
DPN***-MS Mirrored Stainless Steel FinishDPN***-GS Gold Plated Stainless Steel FinishDPN***-BS Coated Solid Brass FinishDPN***-PC Custom Powdercoat Finish - consult your Philips Dynalite Dealer for advice
alternate finishes
DPNEClassic Series
User Control Panels
Philips Dynalite DPNE series user control panels are a popular choice for commercial and residential applications, providing integrated automation solutions. These robust panels are supplied as standard in a brushed stainless steel finish, with square button caps in silver, black surround and black engraving. Smooth action buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving, further assisting the identification of button function. Custom design, finish and capability options further enhance the DPNE series, offering superior choice and functionality.
Supply12V DC 20mA from the DyNet network
Front Cover FinishesBrushed Stainless Steel (standard),Gold Plated Stainless Steel,Mirrored Stainless Steel,Coated Solid Brass plated,Powdercoated colours and other metal finishes available upon request.
Button ColoursSilver (standard), Charcoal Grey
LED IndicatorsBlue (standard), Green or Red. Other colours available on request.
Operating Climate0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non-condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
MaterialsPlate - Stainless Steel or Solid BrassButton Cap - Metallized ABS plastic
WeightPacked weight 0.15kg
technical data
custom panels The Philips Dynalite DPNE user control panels are available ex-stock in 13 standard layouts (see overleaf). Occasionally, the specific requirements of a project call for a panel not found within the standard range. Philips Dynalite DPNE custom panels can be easily designed using any of the following components. Consult your Philips Dynalite dealer for advice.
Keyswitch: Provides dry contact inputs to the control panel micro-processor board. Commonly used to lock out the functionality of a panel so that only authorised users can access the panel or a particular function. They are generally used for partition control, panic switches or panel enable/disable.
Mechanical Fader: Faders are used to control the level of an individual channel or as a ‘master’ fader to control an entire room or area. The position of the fader gives a visual indication of the light level. Preset scenes are programmed by adjusting light levels using the faders, then pressing and holding the corresponding scene button for several seconds.
Button Fader: Provides individual channel level control, combined with the flexibility to allow ‘join’ of fader panels.
Network Socket: An RJ12 socket that facilitates connection of a computer to the DyNet network.
Engraving: Panel engraving is used to clarify the functionality of a panel using words or diagrams. Engraving is available in black or white lettering, either on button caps or the panel fascia. Each button cap can accommodate up to seven characters.
Mirrored Stainless Steel Gold Plated Stainless Steel
Antique Brass
DPNEClassic Series
User Control Panels
functionality All Philips Dynalite panels use a network protocol called Dynet to communicate with other network devices. This dedicated lighting control protocol allows panels to communicate directly with each other, lighting load controllers and other integration devices. This network architecture is not dependant on a central processor, so there is no single point of network failure and makes for more efficient commissioning of the system features. Every Philips Dynalite user interface is capable of performing both simple and advanced functions without the need for additional network devices. Each button on the panel has a range of standard control options that can be individually configured to perform features such as toggle lighting on/off, ramp of lighting up/down, changing an area scene and perform virtual room joins. By using these built-in functions end users can take full control of their site. The Philips Dynalite panel range also supports inbuilt tasking which allows the panels to perform multiple complex functions from the press of a single button. A task triggered from a single button press may be used to affect an entire system changing the lighting scenes in many different areas, initiating a “PANIC” mode or perform some more complex function such as requesting information from other devices like a network timer clock, then sending out the required scene for the particular season. Tasks can be programmed into the panels during commissioning of the system that allows the end-user to interact with the lighting control system more intuitively and allows one button press to perform multiple functions for true automation.
dimensions
88
88
33.60
1.60 16.05
30.25
69.
10
60.33 48.42
DPNEClassic Series
User Control Panels
User requirements can shift over time and necessitate changes to or additions of, buttons on an existing panel. Buttons, bezels and covers snap-on, enabling changes to be easily accommodated, without the need for any tools or extra wiring.
standard panel configurations
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPNE308NDyNet Network SocketButton: NonePlate: BlankH 86mm x W 86mm1 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPNE914On/Off ToggleButton: On/OffPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 86mm1 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPNE921On, OffButtons: On, OffPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 86mm1 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPNE941PresetButtons: 1-3, OffPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 86mm1 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPNE963Preset, Ramp Up, Ramp DownButtons: 1-3, Off, Up, DownPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 86mm1 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPNE981PresetButtons: 1-7, OffPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 86mm1 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPNE982ProgrammingButtons: 1-4, Off, Up, Down, ProgramPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 86mm1 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPNE982DProgramming, KeyswitchButtons: 1-4, Up, Down, Off, Program Plate: Panel Enable/DisableH 86mm x W 146mm2 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPNE981DNPreset, Keyswitch, Network SocketButtons: 1-7, OffPlate: Panel Enable/DisableH 86mm x W 146mm2 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPNE9103Preset, Ramp Up, Ramp DownButtons: 1-7, Off, Up, DownPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 146mm2 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPNE9121PresetButtons: 1-11, OffPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 146mm2 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPNE9122ProgrammingButtons: 1-8, Off, Up, Down, ProgramPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 146mm2 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPNE9161PresetButtons: 1-15, OffPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 146mm2 gang
ON/OFF
ON
OFF
1
2
3
OFF
1
2
3
OFF
1 5
2 6
3 7
4 OFF
1
2
3
4
OFF
PROGRAM
1
2
3
4
OFF
PROGRAM
ENABLE
DISABLE
PANEL
1 5
2 6
3 7
4 OFF
ENABLE
DISABLE
PANEL
1 5
2 6
3 7
4 8
1 5 9
2 6 10
3 7 11
4 8 OFF
1 5
2 6
3 7
4 8
OFF
PROGRAM
1 5 9
2 6 10
3 7 11
4 8 OFF9
13
14
15
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DPNEClassic Series
User Control Panels
panel ordering information In addition to the standard layout codes provided on page 3, the following non-stock items may be ordered using the corresponding catalogue numbers.
stock engraved individual button caps
DPNE Data Sheet Rev F April 2011
Engraving Detail Silver with LED Charcoal Grey with LED Silver without LED Charcoal Grey without LED
None (Blank) 900-011 900-009 900-005 900-0031 270-046 270-026 - -2 270-053 270-030 - -3 270-054 270-031 - -4 270-055 270-032 - -5 270-056 270-033 - -6 270-057 270-034 - -7 270-058 270-035 - -8 270-059 270-036 - -9 270-060 270-037 - -
10 270-047 270-027 - -11 270-048 - - -12 270-049 - - -13 270-050 - - -14 270-051 - - -15 270-052 - - -
270-075 270-044 270-023 270-017270-067 270-038 270-019 270-013
ON 270-072 270-042 - -OFF 270-071 270-041 270-021 270-015
ON/OFF 270-073 - - -MANUAL 270-068 270-039 - -
DAY 270-066 - - -NIGHT 270-070 - - -
SECURITY 270-074 - - -CLEAN 270-065 - - -
PROGRAM - - 270-022 270-016
custom engraved individual button caps Engraving details must accompany order - consult your Philips Dynalite Dealer for advice.
Style Silver Charcoal Greywith LED window 270-089 270-088without LED window 270-087 270-086
alternate finishes
DPNE926 2 Button 2 Room Join Panel DPNE951F4 5 Button Preset 4 Fader PanelDPNE908J 0 Button Panel with 2 Room Join Keyswitch DPNE951F6 5 Button Preset 6 Fader PanelDPNE908J3 0 Button Panel with 3 Room Join Keyswitch DPNE951F8 5 Button Preset 8 Fader PanelDPNE941F1 4 Button Preset Panel with Single Fader DPNE951F12 5 Button Preset 12 Fader PanelDPNE941D 4 Button Preset Panel with Panel Enable Keyswitch DPNE981D 8 Button Preset with Panel Enable KeyswitchDPNE941N 4 Button Preset Panel with DyNet Socket DPNE981J 8 Button Preset Panel with 2 Room Join KeyswitchDPNE941J 4 Button Preset Panel with 2 Room Join Keyswitch DPNE981J3 8 Button Preset Panel with 3 Room Join KeyswitchDPNE941J3 4 Button Preset Panel with 3 Room Join Keyswitch DPNE981N 8 Button Preset Panel with DyNet SocketDPNE946 4 Button 3 Room Join Panel DPNE982J 8 Button Program Panel with 2 Room Join KeyswitchDPNE946D 4 Button 3 Room Join Panel with Disable Keyswitch DPNE982J3 8 Button Program Panel with 3 Room Join Keyswitch
DPNE***-MS Mirrored Stainless Steel FinishDPNE***-GS Gold Plated Stainless Steel FinishDPNE***-BS Coated Solid Brass FinishDPNE***-PC Custom Powdercoat Finish - consult your Philips Dynalite Dealer for advice
DPN-SFClassic Series
User Control Panels
Philips Dynalite DPN-SF series user control panels are a popular choice for commercial and residential applications, providing integrated automation solutions. These robust panels are supplied as standard in a brushed stainless steel finish, with square button caps in silver, black bezel and black engraving. Smooth action buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving, further assisting the identification of button function. Custom design, finish and capability options further enhance the DPN series, offering superior choice and functionality.
Supply12V DC 20mA from the DyNet network
Front Cover FinishesBrushed Stainless Steel (standard),Gold Plated Stainless Steel,Mirrored Stainless Steel,Coated Solid Brass plated,Powdercoated colours and other metal finishes available upon request.
Button ColoursSilver (standard), Charcoal Grey
LED IndicatorsBlue (standard), Green or Red. Other colours available on request.
Operating Climate0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non-condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
MaterialsPlate - Stainless Steel or Solid BrassButton Cap - Metallized ABS plastic
WeightPacked weight 0.15kg
technical data
custom panels The Philips Dynalite DPN-SF user control panels are available ex-stock in 13 standard layouts (see overleaf). Occasionally, the specific requirements of a project call for a panel not found within the standard range. Philips Dynalite DPN-SF custom panels can be easily designed using any of the following components. Consult your Philips Dynalite dealer for advice.
Keyswitch: Provides dry contact inputs to the control panel micro-processor board. Commonly used to lock out the functionality of a panel so that only authorised users can access the panel or a particular function. They are generally used for partition control, panic switches or panel enable/disable.
Mechanical Fader: Faders are used to control the level of an individual channel or as a ‘master’ fader to control an entire room or area. The position of the fader gives a visual indication of the light level. Preset scenes are programmed by adjusting light levels using the faders, then pressing and holding the corresponding scene button for several seconds.
Button Fader: Provides individual channel level control, combined with the flexibility to allow ‘join’ of fader panels.
Network Socket: An RJ12 socket that facilitates connection of a computer to the DyNet network.
Engraving: Panel engraving is used to clarify the functionality of a panel using words or diagrams. Engraving is available in black or white lettering, either on button caps or the panel fascia. Each button cap can accommodate up to seven characters.
Mirrored Stainless Steel
Gold Plated Stainless Steel
Coated Solid Brass
DPN-SFClassic Series
User Control Panels
functionality All Philips Dynalite panels use a network protocol called Dynet to communicate with other network devices. This dedicated lighting control protocol allows panels to communicate directly with each other, lighting load controllers and other integration devices. This network architecture is not dependant on a central processor, so there is no single point of network failure and makes for more efficient commissioning of the system features. Every Philips Dynalite user interface is capable of performing both simple and advanced functions without the need for additional network devices. Each button on the panel has a range of standard control options that can be individually configured to perform features such as toggle lighting on/off, ramp of lighting up/down, changing an area scene and perform virtual room joins. By using these built-in functions end users can take full control of their site. The Philips Dynalite panel range also supports inbuilt tasking which allows the panels to perform multiple complex functions from the press of a single button. A task triggered from a single button press may be used to affect an entire system changing the lighting scenes in many different areas, initiating a “PANIC” mode or perform some more complex function such as requesting information from other devices like a network timer clock, then sending out the required scene for the particular season. Tasks can be programmed into the panels during commissioning of the system that allows the end-user to interact with the lighting control system more intuitively and allows one button press to perform multiple functions for true automation.
dimensions
72
115
3
33.60
78.
90
65.
41
14.30 28.50
16.80
83.
65
48.01
DPN-SFClassic Series
User Control Panels
User requirements can shift over time and necessitate changes to or additions of, buttons on an existing panel. Buttons, bezels and covers snap-on, enabling changes to be easily accommodated, without the need for any tools or extra wiring.
standard panel configurations
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPN308N-SFDyNet Network SocketButton: NonePlate: BlankH 115mm x W 72mm1 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPN914-SFOn/Off ToggleButton: On/OffPlate: BlankH 115mm x W 72mm1 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPN921-SFOn, OffButtons: On, OffPlate: BlankH 115mm x W 72mm1 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPN941-SFPresetButtons: 1-3, OffPlate: BlankH 115mm x W 72mm1 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPN963-SFPreset, Ramp Up, Ramp DownButtons: 1-3, Off, Up, DownPlate: BlankH 115mm x W 72mm1 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPN981-SFPresetButtons: 1-7, OffPlate: BlankH 115mm x W 72mm1 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPN982-SFProgrammingButtons: 1-4, Off, Up, Down, ProgramPlate: BlankH 115mm x W 72mm1 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPN982D-SFProgramming, KeyswitchButtons: 1-4, Up, Down, Off, ProgramPlate: Panel Enable/DisableH 115mm x W 118mm2 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPN981DN-SFPreset, Keyswitch, Network SocketButtons: 1-7, OffPlate: Panel Enable/DisableH 115mm x W 118mm2 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPN9103-SFPreset, Ramp Up, Ramp DownButtons: 1-7, Off, Up, DownPlate: BlankH 115mm x W 118mm2 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPN9121-SFPresetButtons: 1-11, OffPlate: BlankH 115mm x W 118mm2 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPN9122-SFProgrammingButtons: 1-8, Off, Up, Down, ProgramPlate: BlankH 115mm x W 118mm2 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPN9161-SFPresetButtons: 1-15, OffPlate: BlankH 115mm x W 118mm2 gang
ON/OFF
ON
OFF
1
2
3
OFF
1
2
3
4
1 5
2 6
3 7
4 OFF
1
2
3
4
OFF
PROGRAM
1
2
3
4
ENABLE
DISABLE
OFF
PROGRAM
PANEL
1
2
3
4
ENABLE
DISABLE
PANEL
5
6
7
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
OFF8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OFF
OFF
PROGRAM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
8
13
14
15
OFF12
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DPN-SFClassic Series
User Control Panels
panel ordering information In addition to the standard layout codes provided on page 3, the following non-stock items may be ordered using the corresponding catalogue numbers..
stock engraved individual button caps
DPN-SF Data Sheet Rev D April 2011
DPN926-SF 2 Button 2 Room Join Panel DPN951F4-SF 5 Button Preset 4 Fader PanelDPN908J-SF 0 Button Panel with 2 Room Join Keyswitch DPN951F6-SF 5 Button Preset 6 Fader PanelDPN908J3-SF 0 Button Panel with 3 Room Join Keyswitch DPN951F8-SF 5 Button Preset 8 Fader PanelDPN941F1-SF 4 Button Preset Panel with Single Fader DPN951F12-SF 5 Button Preset 12 Fader PanelDPN941D-SF 4 Button Preset Panel with Panel Enable Keyswitch DPN981D-SF 8 Button Preset with Panel Enable KeyswitchDPN941N-SF 4 Button Preset Panel with DyNet Socket DPN981J-SF 8 Button Preset Panel with 2 Room Join KeyswitchDPN941J-SF 4 Button Preset Panel with 2 Room Join Keyswitch DPN981J3-SF 8 Button Preset Panel with 3 Room Join KeyswitchDPN941J3-SF 4 Button Preset Panel with 3 Room Join Keyswitch DPN981N-SF 8 Button Preset Panel with DyNet SocketDPN946-SF 4 Button 3 Room Join Panel DPN982J-SF 8 Button Program Panel with 2 Room Join KeyswitchDPN946D-SF 4 Button 3 Room Join Panel with Disable Keyswitch DPN982J3-SF 8 Button Program Panel with 3 Room Join Keyswitch
Engraving Detail Silver with LED Charcoal Grey with LED Silver without LED Charcoal Grey without LED
None (Blank) 900-011 900-009 900-005 900-0031 270-046 270-026 - -2 270-053 270-030 - -3 270-054 270-031 - -4 270-055 270-032 - -5 270-056 270-033 - -6 270-057 270-034 - -7 270-058 270-035 - -8 270-059 270-036 - -9 270-060 270-037 - -10 270-047 270-027 - -11 270-048 - - -12 270-049 - - -13 270-050 - - -14 270-051 - - -15 270-052 - - -
270-075 270-044 270-023 270-017270-067 270-038 270-019 270-013
ON 270-072 270-042 - -OFF 270-071 270-041 270-021 270-015
ON/OFF 270-073 - - -MANUAL 270-068 270-039 - -
DAY 270-066 - - -NIGHT 270-070 - - -
SECURITY 270-074 - - -CLEAN 270-065 - - -
PROGRAM - - 270-022 270-016
custom engraved individual button caps Engraving details must accompany order - consult your Philips Dynalite Dealer for advice.
Style Silver Charcoal Greywith LED window 270-089 270-088without LED window 270-087 270-086
DPN***-MS Mirrored Stainless Steel FinishDPN***-GS Gold Plated Stainless Steel FinishDPN***-BS Coated Solid Brass FinishDPN***-PC Custom Powdercoat Finish - consult your Philips Dynalite Dealer for advice
alternate finishes
DPNE-SFClassic Series
User Control Panels
Philips Dynalite DPNE-SF series user control panels are a popular choice for commercial and residential applications, providing integrated automation solutions. These robust panels are supplied as standard in a brushed stainless steel finish, with square button caps in silver, black surround and black engraving. Smooth action buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving, further assisting the identification of button function. Custom design, finish and capability options further enhance the DPNE-SF series, offering superior choice and functionality.
Supply12V DC 20mA from the DyNet network
Front Cover FinishesBrushed Stainless Steel (standard),Gold Plated Stainless Steel,Mirrored Stainless Steel,Coated Solid Brass plated,Powdercoated colours and other metal finishes available upon request.
Button ColoursSilver (standard), Charcoal Grey
LED IndicatorsBlue (standard), Green or Red. Other colours available on request.
Operating Climate0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non-condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
MaterialsPlate - Stainless Steel or Solid BrassButton Cap - Metallized ABS plastic
WeightPacked weight 0.15kg
technical data
custom panels The Philips Dynalite DPNE-SF user control panels are available ex-stock in 13 standard layouts (see overleaf). Occasionally, the specific requirements of a project call for a panel not found within the standard range. Philips Dynalite DPNE-SF custom panels can be easily designed using any of the following components. Consult your Philips Dynalite dealer for advice.
Keyswitch: Provides dry contact inputs to the control panel micro-processor board. Commonly used to lock out the functionality of a panel so that only authorised users can access the panel or a particular function. They are generally used for partition control, panic switches or panel enable/disable.
Mechanical Fader: Faders are used to control the level of an individual channel or as a ‘master’ fader to control an entire room or area. The position of the fader gives a visual indication of the light level. Preset scenes are programmed by adjusting light levels using the faders, then pressing and holding the corresponding scene button for several seconds.
Button Fader: Provides individual channel level control, combined with the flexibility to allow ‘join’ of fader panels.
Network Socket: An RJ12 socket that facilitates connection of a computer to the DyNet network.
Engraving: Panel engraving is used to clarify the functionality of a panel using words or diagrams. Engraving is available in black or white lettering, either on button caps or the panel fascia. Each button cap can accommodate up to seven characters.
Mirrored Stainless Steel Gold Plated Stainless Steel
Antique Brass
DPNE-SFClassic Series
User Control Panels
functionality All Philips Dynalite panels use a network protocol called Dynet to communicate with other network devices. This dedicated lighting control protocol allows panels to communicate directly with each other, lighting load controllers and other integration devices. This network architecture is not dependant on a central processor, so there is no single point of network failure and makes for more efficient commissioning of the system features. Every Philips Dynalite user interface is capable of performing both simple and advanced functions without the need for additional network devices. Each button on the panel has a range of standard control options that can be individually configured to perform features such as toggle lighting on/off, ramp of lighting up/down, changing an area scene and perform virtual room joins. By using these built-in functions end users can take full control of their site. The Philips Dynalite panel range also supports inbuilt tasking which allows the panels to perform multiple complex functions from the press of a single button. A task triggered from a single button press may be used to affect an entire system changing the lighting scenes in many different areas, initiating a “PANIC” mode or perform some more complex function such as requesting information from other devices like a network timer clock, then sending out the required scene for the particular season. Tasks can be programmed into the panels during commissioning of the system that allows the end-user to interact with the lighting control system more intuitively and allows one button press to perform multiple functions for true automation.
dimensions
88
88
3.40
33.60 28.50
14.30
65.
41
59.60
16.
80
48.01
DPNE-SFClassic Series
User Control Panels
User requirements can shift over time and necessitate changes to, or additions of, buttons on an existing panel. Buttons, bezels and covers snap-on, enabling changes to be easily accommodated, without the need for any tools or extra wiring.
standard panel configurations
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPNE308-SFDyNet Network SocketButton: NonePlate: BlankH 86mm x W 86mm1 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPNE914-SFOn/Off ToggleButton: On/OffPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 86mm1 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPNE921-SFOn, OffButtons: On, OffPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 86mm1 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPNE941-SFPresetButtons: 1-3, OffPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 86mm1 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPNE963-SFPreset, Ramp Up, Ramp DownButtons: 1-3, Off, Up, DownPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 86mm1 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPNE981-SFPresetButtons: 1-7, OffPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 86mm1 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPNE982-SFProgrammingButtons: 1-4, Off, Up, Down, ProgramPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 86mm1 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPNE982D-SFProgramming, KeyswitchButtons: 1-4, Up, Down, Off, ProgramPlate: Panel Enable/DisableH 86mm x W 146mm2 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPNE981DN-SFPreset, Keyswitch, Network SocketButtons: 1-7, OffPlate: Panel Enable/DisableH 86mm x W 146mm2 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPNE9103-SFPreset, Ramp Up, Ramp DownButtons: 1-7, Off, Up, DownPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 146mm2 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPNE9121-SFPresetButtons: 1-11, OffPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 146mm2 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPNE9122-SFProgrammingButtons: 1-8, Off, Up, Down,ProgramPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 146mm2 gang
PanelFunction
Engraving
DimensionsWallbox
DPNE9161-SFPresetButtons: 1-15, OffPlate: BlankH 86mm x W 146mm2 gang
ON/OFF
ON
OFF
1
2
3
OFF
1
2
3
OFF
1 5
2 6
3 7
4 OFF
1
2
3
4
OFF
PROGRAM
1
2
3
4
OFF
PROGRAM
ENABLE
DISABLE
PANEL
1 5
2 6
3 7
4 OFF
ENABLE
DISABLE
PANEL
1 5
2 6
3 7
4 8
1 5 9
2 6 10
3 7 11
4 8 OFF
1 5
2 6
3 7
4 8
OFF
PROGRAM
1 5 9
2 6 10
3 7 11
4 8 OFF9
13
14
15
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DPNE-SFClassic Series
User Control Panels
panel ordering information In addition to the standard layout codes provided on page 3, the following non-stock items may be ordered using the corresponding catalogue numbers.
stock engraved individual button caps
DPNE-SF Data Sheet Rev D April 2011
Engraving Detail Silver with LED Charcoal Grey with LED Silver without LED Charcoal Grey without LED
None (Blank) 900-011 900-009 900-005 900-0031 270-046 270-026 - -2 270-053 270-030 - -3 270-054 270-031 - -4 270-055 270-032 - -5 270-056 270-033 - -6 270-057 270-034 - -7 270-058 270-035 - -8 270-059 270-036 - -9 270-060 270-037 - -
10 270-047 270-027 - -11 270-048 - - -12 270-049 - - -13 270-050 - - -14 270-051 - - -15 270-052 - - -
270-075 270-044 270-023 270-017270-067 270-038 270-019 270-013
ON 270-072 270-042 - -OFF 270-071 270-041 270-021 270-015
ON/OFF 270-073 - - -MANUAL 270-068 270-039 - -
DAY 270-066 - - -NIGHT 270-070 - - -
SECURITY 270-074 - - -CLEAN 270-065 - - -
PROGRAM - - 270-022 270-016
custom engraved individual button caps Engraving details must accompany order - consult your Philips Dynalite Dealer for advice.
Style Silver Charcoal Greywith LED window 270-089 270-088without LED window 270-087 270-086
alternate finishes
DPNE926-SF 2 Button 2 Room Join Panel DPNE951F4-SF 5 Button Preset 4 Fader PanelDPNE908J-SF 0 Button Panel with 2 Room Join Keyswitch DPNE951F6-SF 5 Button Preset 6 Fader PanelDPNE908J3-SF 0 Button Panel with 3 Room Join Keyswitch DPNE951F8-SF 5 Button Preset 8 Fader PanelDPNE941F1-SF 4 Button Preset Panel with Single Fader DPNE951F12-SF 5 Button Preset 12 Fader PanelDPNE941D-SF 4 Button Preset Panel with Panel Enable Keyswitch DPNE981D-SF 8 Button Preset with Panel Enable KeyswitchDPNE941N-SF 4 Button Preset Panel with DyNet Socket DPNE981J-SF 8 Button Preset Panel with 2 Room Join KeyswitchDPNE941J-SF 4 Button Preset Panel with 2 Room Join Keyswitch DPNE981J3-SF 8 Button Preset Panel with 3 Room Join KeyswitchDPNE941J3-SF 4 Button Preset Panel with 3 Room Join Keyswitch DPNE981N-SF 8 Button Preset Panel with DyNet SocketDPNEF946-SF 4 Button 3 Room Join Panel DPNE982J-SF 8 Button Program Panel with 2 Room Join KeyswitchDPNE946D-SF 4 Button 3 Room Join Panel with Disable Keyswitch DPNE982J3-SF 8 Button Program Panel with 3 Room Join Keyswitch
DPNE-SF***-MS Mirrored Stainless Steel FinishDPNE-SF***-GS Gold Plated Stainless Steel FinishDPNE-SF***-BS Coated Solid Brass FinishDPNE-SF***-PC Custom Powdercoat Finish - consult your Philips Dynalite Dealer for advice
DLPStandard Series
User Control Panels
Philips Dynalite DLP series user control panels are an aesthetically pleasing, cost-effective method of providing integrated automation in commercial buildings and homes. They are available in two configurations; a single column, which provides for button configurations of one to five buttons and a dual column design for up to ten buttons. Smooth action buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving, further assisting the identification of switch function. The Philips Dynalite DLP series user control panels incorporate a miniature DyNet control network socket, which is accessed by removing the snap-on panel cover, enabling system adjustments and programming to be carried out from any user control panel on the network. Infra-red (IR) receive capabilities have been integrated, eliminating the need for separate sensors where IR remotes are required.
Supply12V DC 20-35mA from the DyNet network
Control Inputs1 x RS 485 DyNet serial port
Front Cover FinishesElectric White
Button ColoursElectric white (standard) or charcoal grey.Other colours available upon request
LED IndicatorsBlue
Operating Climate0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
MaterialsGrid Plate & Rear Cover - ABSPlastic Cover - ABSSwitch Membrane - Silicone
WeightPacked weight 0.15kg
technical data
available finishes The Philips Dynalite DLP user control panels are supplied in electric white. To complement this finish, button caps and bezels are available in white and charcoal grey and a dedicated IR receive switch cap is also available.
standard panel configurations (others available upon request)
1 button 10 buttons7 buttons6 buttons5 buttons2 buttons
DLPStandard Series
User Control Panels
functionality
All Philips Dynalite panels use a network protocol called Dynet to communicate with other network devices. This dedicated lighting control protocol allows panels to communicate directly with each other, lighting load controllers and other integration devices. This network architecture is not dependant on a central processor, so there is no single point of network failure and makes for more efficient commissioning of the system features. Every Philips Dynalite user interface is capable of performing both simple and advanced functions without the need for additional network devices. Each button on the panel has a range of standard control options that can be individually configured to perform features such as toggle lighting on/off, ramp of lighting up/down, changing an area scene and perform virtual room joins. By using these built-in functions end users can take full control of their site. The Philips Dynalite panel range also supports inbuilt tasking which allows the panels to perform multiple complex functions from the press of a single button. A task triggered from a single button press may be used to affect an entire system changing the lighting scenes in many different areas, initiating a “PANIC” mode or perform some more complex function such as requesting information from other devices like a network timer clock, then sending out the required scene for the particular season. Tasks can be programmed into the panels during commissioning of the system that allows the end-user to interact with the lighting control system more intuitively and allows one button press to perform multiple functions for true automation.
dimensions
54
71.9
83.
8
45
99.
5
19.8
34.4 5.9 12.3
14.6
115
.9
DLPStandard Series
User Control Panels
User requirements can shift over time and necessitate changes to, or additions of, buttons on an existing panel. Buttons, bezels and covers snap-on, enabling changes to be easily accommodated, without the need for any tools or extra wiring.
IR receive The Philips Dynalite DLP user control panels incorporate Infra-red (IR) receive capabilities as standard. When IR receive is required, an LSP-SW-IR switch cap must be fitted in button position 5 for single column panels and position 10 for dual column panels.
button caps The button shape offers a generous area for text or symbols, ensuring that the function of each button is clearly discernable from normal viewing distances. Over nineteen standard engraved button caps are available ex-stock. Contact your local Philips Dynalite dealer for details on custom engraving.
mechanics
Charcoal (CH)White (WE) IR Receive (IR)
network access The DyNet control network is easily accessed by removing the snap-on cover and inserting the LSP-PRO network connector into the miniature panel socket, as illustrated below. This enables system adjustments and programming to be carried out from any user control panel on the network.
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DLPStandard Series
User Control Panels
panel ordering information Detailed below are catalogue numbers for the standard panel configurations, which are supplied complete with blue LED status indicators, white covers, blank white buttons and white bezels.
Grid Plate Configurable Panel Spare Cover
1 Button DLP910 LSP-COV-01-WE
2 Button DLP920 LSP-COV-02-WE
5 Button DLP950 LSP-COV-05-WE
6 Button DLP960 LSP-COV-06-WE
7 Button DLP970 LSP-COV-07-WE
10 Button DLP9100 LSP-COV-10-WE
switchcap ordering information Blank Caps & Bezels Part Number
Cap - White LSP-SW-WE
Bezel - White LSP-BZ-WE
Cap - Charcoal LSP-SW-CH
Bezel - Charcoal LSP-BZ-CH
Cap to suit IR Receive LSP-SW-IR
Engraved Caps
Button Cap Engraving Detail
White Cap Charcoal Grey Cap
1 LSP-SW-WE-1 LSP-SW-CH-1
2 LSP-SW-WE-2 LSP-SW-CH-2
3 LSP-SW-WE-3 LSP-SW-CH-3
4 LSP-SW-WE-4 LSP-SW-CH-4
5 LSP-SW-WE-5 LSP-SW-CH-5
6 LSP-SW-WE-6 LSP-SW-CH-6
7 LSP-SW-WE-7 LSP-SW-CH-7
8 LSP-SW-WE-8 LSP-SW-CH-8
9 LSP-SW-WE-9 LSP-SW-CH-9
10 LSP-SW-WE-10 LSP-SW-CH-10
LSP-SW-WE-UP LSP-SW-CH-Up
LSP-SW-WE-DOWN LSP-SW-CH-DOWN
PROGRAM LSP-SW-WE-PROGRAM LSP-SW-CH-PROGRAM
ON LSP-SW-WE-ON LSP-SW-CH-ON
OFF LSP-SW-WE-OFF LSP-SW-CH-OFF
ON/OFF LSP-SW-WE-ON/OFF LSP-SW-CH-ON/OFF
HIGH LSP-SW-WE-HIGH LSP-SW-CH-HIGH
MED LSP-SW-WE-MED LSP-SW-CH-MED
LOW LSP-SW-WE-LOW LSP-SW-CH-LOW
DLP Data Sheet Rev N April 2011
DLPEStandard Series
User Control Panels
The Philips Dynalite DLPE series user control panels are an aesthetically pleasing, cost-effective method of providingintegrated automation in homes and commercial buildings. They are available in two configurations; a single column,which provides for button configurations of one to five buttons and a dual column design for up to ten buttons. Smoothaction buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving,further assisting the identification of button function. The Philips Dynalite DLPE series user control panels incorporate aminiature DyNet control network socket, which is accessed by removing the snap-on panel cover, enabling systemadjustments and programming to be carried out from any user control panel on the network. Infra-red (IR) receivecapabilities have been integrated, eliminating the need for separate sensors where IR remotes are required.
Supply12V DC 20-35mA from the DyNet network
Control Inputs1 x RS 485 DyNet serial port
Front Cover FinishesBrushed Stainless Steel (standard) or Gunmetal. Other material and colour finishes available upon request.
Button ColoursCharcoal grey (standard) or electric white.Other colours available upon request.
LED IndicatorsBlue (standard), Red or Green. Other colours available on request.
Operating Environment0-50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
MaterialsGrid Plate & Rear Cover - ABSSwitch Membrane - SiliconeMetallic Covers - Anodised Aluminium,Stainless Steel
WeightPacked weight 0.15kg
technical data
available finishes The Philips Dynalite DLPE series user control panels include an extensive designer range of cover, button cap and bezel colour accessories. In addition to the standard Brushed Stainless Steel, covers are available in Gunmetal or other material and colour finishes (on request). To complement these finishes, button caps and bezels are available in white and charcoal grey, providing a wide range of décor matching capabilities. A dedicated IR receive switch cap is also available.
standard panel configurations (others available upon request)
1 button 10 buttons7 buttons6 buttons5 buttons2 buttons
DLPEStandard Series
User Control Panels
dimensions
functionality
All Philips Dynalite panels use a network protocol called Dynet to communicate with other network devices. This dedicated lighting control protocol allows panels to communicate directly with each other, lighting load controllers and other integration devices. This network architecture is not dependant on a central processor, so there is no single point of network failure and makes for more efficient commissioning of the system features. Every Philips Dynalite user interface is capable of performing both simple and advanced functions without the need for additional network devices. Each button on the panel has a range of standard control options that can be individually configured to perform features such as toggle lighting on/off, ramp of lighting up/down, changing an area scene and perform virtual room joins. By using these built-in functions end users can take full control of their site. The Philips Dynalite panel range also supports inbuilt tasking which allows the panels to perform multiple complex functions from the press of a single button. A task triggered from a single button press may be used to affect an entire system changing the lighting scenes in many different areas, initiating a “PANIC” mode or perform some more complex function such as requesting information from other devices like a network timer clock, then sending out the required scene for the particular season. Tasks can be programmed into the panels during commissioning of the system that allows the end-user to interact with the lighting control system more intuitively and allows one button press to perform multiple functions for true automation.
34.4
14.5
54
73.
1
73.3 60.3
87.4
87.
4
11.7
19.9 6.1
45
DLPEStandard Series
User Control Panels
User requirements can shift over time and necessitate changes to, or additions of, buttons on an existing panel. Buttons, bezels and covers snap-on, enabling changes to be easily accommodated, without the need for any tools or extra wiring.
IR receive The Philips Dynalite DLPE user control panels incorporate Infra-red (IR) receive capabilities as standard. When IR receive is required, an LSP-SW-IR switch cap must be fitted in button position 5 for single column panels and position 10 for dual column panels.
button caps The button shape offers a generous area for text or symbols, ensuring that the function of each button is clearly discernable from normal viewing distances. Over 19 standard engraved button caps are available ex-stock. Contact your local Philips Dynalite dealer for details on custom engraving.
mechanics
Charcoal (CH) White (WE) IR Receive (IR)
network access The DyNet control network is easily accessed by removing the snap-on cover and inserting the LSP-PRO network connector into the miniature panel socket, as illustrated below. This enables system adjustments and programming to be carried out from any user control panel on the network.
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DLPEStandard Series
User Control Panels
panel ordering information Detailed below are catalogue numbers for the standard panel configurations, which are supplied complete with blue LED status indicators, brushed stainless steel covers, charcoal grey buttons and charcoal grey bezels.
Grid Plate Configurable Panel
1 Button DLPE910
2 Button DLPE920
5 Button DLPE950
6 Button DLPE960
7 Button DLPE970
10 Button DLPE9100
snap-on finish accessories ordering information DLPE Metallic Covers
Grid Stainless Steel
1 Button DLPE-01SS
2 Button DLPE-02SS
5 Button DLPE-05SS
6 Button DLPE-06SS
7 Button DLPE-07SS
10 Button DLPE-010SS
Grid Gun metal
1 Button DLPE-01GL
2 Button DLPE-02GL
5 Button DLPE-05GL
6 Button DLPE-06GL
7 Button DLPE-07GL
10 Button DLPE-010GL
Blank Caps & Bezels Part Number
Cap - White LSP-SW-WE
Bezel - White LSP-BZ-WE
Cap - Charcoal LSP-SW-CH
Bezel - Charcoal LSP-BZ-CH
Cap to suit IR Receive LSP-SW-IR
Engraved caps
Button Cap Engraving Detail
White Cap Charcoal Grey Cap
1 LSP-SW-WE-1 LSP-SW-CH-1
2 LSP-SW-WE-2 LSP-SW-CH-2
3 LSP-SW-WE-3 LSP-SW-CH-3
4 LSP-SW-WE-4 LSP-SW-CH-4
5 LSP-SW-WE-5 LSP-SW-CH-5
6 LSP-SW-WE-6 LSP-SW-CH-6
7 LSP-SW-WE-7 LSP-SW-CH-7
8 LSP-SW-WE-8 LSP-SW-CH-8
9 LSP-SW-WE-9 LSP-SW-CH-9
10 LSP-SW-WE-10 LSP-SW-CH-10
LSP-SW-WE-UP LSP-SW-CH-Up
LSP-SW-WE-DOWN LSP-SW-CH-DOWN
PROGRAM LSP-SW-WE-PROGRAM LSP-SW-CH-PROGRAM
ON LSP-SW-WE-ON LSP-SW-CH-ON
OFF LSP-SW-WE-OFF LSP-SW-CH-OFF
ON/OFF LSP-SW-WE-ON/OFF LSP-SW-CH-ON/OFF
HIGH LSP-SW-WE-HIGH LSP-SW-CH-HIGH
MED LSP-SW-WE-MED LSP-SW-CH-MED
LOW LSP-SW-WE-LOW LSP-SW-CH-LOW
DLPE Data Sheet Rev J April 2011
DL2PStandard Series
User Control Panels
Philips Dynalite DL2P series user control panels are an aesthetically pleasing, cost-effective method of providing integrated automation in commercial buildings and homes. They are available in two configurations; a single column, which provides for button configurations of one to five buttons and a dual column design for up to ten buttons. Smooth action buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving, further assisting the identification of switch function. The Philips Dynalite DL2P series user control panels incorporate a miniature DyNet control network socket, which is accessed by removing the snap-on panel cover, enabling system adjustments and programming to be carried out from any user control panel on the network. Infra-red (IR) receive capabilities have been integrated, eliminating the need for separate sensors where IR remotes are required.
Supply12V DC 20-35mA from the DyNet network
Control Inputs1 x RS 485 DyNet serial port
Front Cover FinishesElectric White
Button ColoursElectric white (standard) or charcoal grey.Other colours available upon request
LED IndicatorsBlue
Operating Climate0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
MaterialsGrid Plate & Rear Cover - ABSPlastic Cover - ABSSwitch Membrane - Silicone
WeightPacked weight 0.15kg
technical data
available finishes The Philips Dynalite DL2P user control panels are supplied in electric white. To complement this finish, button caps and bezels are available in white and charcoal grey and a dedicated IR receive switch cap is also available.
standard panel configurations (others available upon request)
1 button 10 buttons7 buttons6 buttons5 buttons2 buttons
DL2PStandard Series
User Control Panels
functionality
All Philips Dynalite panels use a network protocol called Dynet to communicate with other network devices. This dedicated lighting control protocol allows panels to communicate directly with each other, lighting load controllers and other integration devices. This network architecture is not dependant on a central processor, so there is no single point of network failure and makes for more efficient commissioning of the system features. Every Philips Dynalite user interface is capable of performing both simple and advanced functions without the need for additional network devices. Each button on the panel has a range of standard control options that can be individually configured to perform features such as toggle lighting on/off, ramp of lighting up/down, changing an area scene and perform virtual room joins. By using these built-in functions end users can take full control of their site. The Philips Dynalite panel range also supports inbuilt tasking which allows the panels to perform multiple complex functions from the press of a single button. A task triggered from a single button press may be used to affect an entire system changing the lighting scenes in many different areas, initiating a “PANIC” mode or perform some more complex function such as requesting information from other devices like a network timer clock, then sending out the required scene for the particular season. Tasks can be programmed into the panels during commissioning of the system that allows the end-user to interact with the lighting control system more intuitively and allows one button press to perform multiple functions for true automation.
dimensions
73.7
116
.2
93.
7
34.5 27.8
6.7 4.8 13.9
83.
8
48.6
99.
5
DL2PStandard Series
User Control Panels
User requirements can shift over time and necessitate changes to, or additions of, buttons on an existing panel. Buttons, bezels and covers snap-on, enabling changes to be easily accommodated, without the need for any tools or extra wiring.
IR receive The Philips Dynalite DL2P user control panels incorporate Infra-red (IR) receive capabilities as standard. When IR receive is required, an LSP-SW-IR switch cap must be fitted in button position 5 for single column panels and position 10 for dual column panels.
button caps The button shape offers a generous area for text or symbols, ensuring that the function of each button is clearly discernable from normal viewing distances. Over nineteen standard engraved button caps are available ex-stock. Contact your local Philips Dynalite dealer for details on custom engraving.
mechanics
Charcoal (CH)White (WE) IR Receive (IR)
network access The DyNet control network is easily accessed by removing the snap-on cover and inserting the LSP-PRO network connector into the miniature panel socket, as illustrated below. This enables system adjustments and programming to be carried out from any user control panel on the network.
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DL2PStandard Series
User Control Panels
panel ordering information Detailed below are catalogue numbers for the standard panel configurations, which are supplied complete with blue LED status indicators, white covers, blank white buttons and white bezels.
Grid Plate Configurable Panel Spare Cover
1 Button DL2P910 LSP-COV-01-WE
2 Button DL2P920 LSP-COV-02-WE
5 Button DL2P950 LSP-COV-05-WE
6 Button DL2P960 LSP-COV-06-WE
7 Button DL2P970 LSP-COV-07-WE
10 Button DL2P9100 LSP-COV-10-WE
switchcap ordering information Blank Caps & Bezels Part Number
Cap - White LSP-SW-WE
Bezel - White LSP-BZ-WE
Cap - Charcoal LSP-SW-CH
Bezel - Charcoal LSP-BZ-CH
Cap to suit IR Receive LSP-SW-IR
Engraved Caps
Button Cap Engraving Detail
White Cap Charcoal Grey Cap
1 LSP-SW-WE-1 LSP-SW-CH-1
2 LSP-SW-WE-2 LSP-SW-CH-2
3 LSP-SW-WE-3 LSP-SW-CH-3
4 LSP-SW-WE-4 LSP-SW-CH-4
5 LSP-SW-WE-5 LSP-SW-CH-5
6 LSP-SW-WE-6 LSP-SW-CH-6
7 LSP-SW-WE-7 LSP-SW-CH-7
8 LSP-SW-WE-8 LSP-SW-CH-8
9 LSP-SW-WE-9 LSP-SW-CH-9
10 LSP-SW-WE-10 LSP-SW-CH-10
LSP-SW-WE-UP LSP-SW-CH-Up
LSP-SW-WE-DOWN LSP-SW-CH-DOWN
PROGRAM LSP-SW-WE-PROGRAM LSP-SW-CH-PROGRAM
ON LSP-SW-WE-ON LSP-SW-CH-ON
OFF LSP-SW-WE-OFF LSP-SW-CH-OFF
ON/OFF LSP-SW-WE-ON/OFF LSP-SW-CH-ON/OFF
HIGH LSP-SW-WE-HIGH LSP-SW-CH-HIGH
MED LSP-SW-WE-MED LSP-SW-CH-MED
LOW LSP-SW-WE-LOW LSP-SW-CH-LOW
DL2P Data Sheet Rev A April 2011
DPWEStandard Series
User Control Panels
The Philips Dynalite DPWE series user control panels are an aesthetically pleasing, cost-effective method of providing integrated automation in homes and commercial buildings. They are available in two configurations; a single column, which provides for button configurations of one to five buttons and a dual column design for up to ten buttons. Smooth action buttons with LED indicators provide both tactile and visual feedback and are easily removed for engraving, further assisting the identification of button function. The Philips Dynalite DPWE series user control panels incorporate a miniature DyNet control network socket, which is accessed by removing the snap-on panel cover, enabling system adjustments and programming to be carried out from any user control panel on the network. Infra-red (IR) receive capabilities have been integrated, eliminating the need for separate sensors where IR remotes are required.
Supply12V DC 20-35mA from the DyNet network
Control Inputs1 x RS 485 DyNet serial port
Front Cover FinishesStandard: Brushed Stainless Steel, Polished Brass, Brushed Brass, Antique Bronze, White, Matt Black and Mirrored Stainless Steel. Optional: Satin Silver, Antique Brass, Antique Copper, Antique Silver, Polished Desert Brass, Desert Gold, Light Bronze, Creamy White. Other material and colour finishes available upon request.
Button ColoursCharcoal grey (standard) or electric white.Other colours available upon request.
LED IndicatorsBlue (standard), Red or Green. Other colours available on request. Operating Environment0-50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
MaterialsGrid Plate & Rear Cover - ABSSwitch Membrane - SiliconeMetallic Covers - Anodised Aluminium,Stainless Steel
WeightPacked weight 0.15kg
technical data
available finishes The Philips Dynalite DPWE series user control panels include an extensive designer range of cover, button cap and bezel colour accessories. Cover finishes include Brushed Stainless Steel, Polished Brass, Brushed Brass, Antique Bronze, White, Matt Black, and Mirrored Stainless. To complement these finishes, button caps and bezels are available in white and charcoal grey, providing a wide range of décor matching capabilities. A dedicated IR receive switch cap is also available.
standard panel configurations (others available upon request)
1 button 10 buttons7 buttons6 buttons5 buttons2 buttons
DPWEStandard Series
User Control Panels
dimensions
functionality All Philips Dynalite panels use a network protocol called Dynet to communicate with other network devices. This dedicated lighting control protocol allows panels to communicate directly with each other, lighting load controllers and other integration devices. This network architecture is not dependant on a central processor, so there is no single point of network failure and makes for more efficient commissioning of the system features. Every Philips Dynalite user interface is capable of performing both simple and advanced functions without the need for additional network devices. Each button on the panel has a range of standard control options that can be individually configured to perform features such as toggle lighting on/off, ramp of lighting up/down, changing an area scene and perform virtual room joins. By using these built-in functions end users can take full control of their site. The Philips Dynalite panel range also supports inbuilt tasking which allows the panels to perform multiple complex functions from the press of a single button. A task triggered from a single button press may be used to affect an entire system changing the lighting scenes in many different areas, initiating a “PANIC” mode or perform some more complex function such as requesting information from other devices like a network timer clock, then sending out the required scene for the particular season. Tasks can be programmed into the panels during commissioning of the system that allows the end-user to interact with the lighting control system more intuitively and allows one button press to perform multiple functions for true automation.
86
86
26.30
5.70
12.40 8.10
34.40
60.30
68.
88
63
53.90
63
DPWEStandard Series
User Control Panels
User requirements can shift over time and necessitate changes to, or additions of, buttons on an existing panel. Buttons, bezels and covers snap-on, enabling changes to be easily accommodated, without the need for any tools or extra wiring.
IR receive 9 Series Configurable user control panels incorporate Infra-red (IR) receive capabilities as standard. When IR receive is required an LSP-SW-IR switch cap must be fitted in button position 5 for single column panels and position 10 for dual column panels.
button caps The button shape offers a generous area for text or symbols, ensuring that the function of each button is clearly discernable from normal viewing distances. Over 19 standard engraved button caps are available ex-stock. Contact your local Philips Dynalite dealer for details on custom engraving.
mechanics
Charcoal (CH) White (WE) IR Receive (IR)
network access The DyNet control network is easily accessed by removing the snap-on cover and inserting the LSP-PRO network connector into the miniature panel socket, as illustrated below. This enables system adjustments and programming to be carried out from any user control panel on the network.
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DPWEStandard Series
User Control Panels
panel ordering information Detailed below are catalogue numbers for the standard panel configurations, which are supplied complete with blue LED status indicators, white covers, blank white buttons and white bezels.
snap-on finish accessories ordering information For finish combinations, covers, bezels and buttons are supplied separately using the catalogue numbers detailed below.
Caps & Bezels Part Number
Cap - White LSP-SW-WE
Bezel - White LSP-BZ-WE
Cap - Charcoal LSP-SW-CH
Bezel - Charcoal LSP-BZ-CH
Cap to suit IR Receive LSP-SW-IR
Cap Engraving Detail White Cap Charcoal Grey Cap
1 LSP-SW-WE-1 LSP-SW-CH-1
2 LSP-SW-WE-2 LSP-SW-CH-2
3 LSP-SW-WE-3 LSP-SW-CH-3
4 LSP-SW-WE-4 LSP-SW-CH-4
5 LSP-SW-WE-5 LSP-SW-CH-5
6 LSP-SW-WE-6 LSP-SW-CH-6
7 LSP-SW-WE-7 LSP-SW-CH-7
8 LSP-SW-WE-8 LSP-SW-CH-8
9 LSP-SW-WE-9 LSP-SW-CH-9
10 LSP-SW-WE-10 LSP-SW-CH-10
LSP-SW-WE-UP LSP-SW-CH-Up
LSP-SW-WE-DOWN LSP-SW-CH-DOWN
PROGRAM LSP-SW-WE-PROGRAM LSP-SW-CH-PROGRAM
ON LSP-SW-WE-ON LSP-SW-CH-ON
OFF LSP-SW-WE-OFF LSP-SW-CH-OFF
ON/OFF LSP-SW-WE-ON/OFF LSP-SW-CH-ON/OFF
HIGH LSP-SW-WE-HIGH LSP-SW-CH-HIGH
MED LSP-SW-WE-MED LSP-SW-CH-MED
LOW LSP-SW-WE-LOW LSP-SW-CH-LOW
DPWE Data Sheet Rev H April 2011
Grid Plate Configurable Panel Panel Options
1 Button
DPWE950
Charcoal Grey Buttons - CHElectric White Buttons - WE
* When options are required, add desired option code suffix(es) to catalogue number eg. DPWE910-GL
2 Button
5 Button
6 Button
DPWE91007 Button
10 Button
Grid BrushedStainless
Polished Brass
Brushed Brass
Antique Bronze
White Matt Black Mirrored Stainless
1 Button DPWE-01SS DPWE-01PB DPWE-01BB DPWE-01AB DPWE-01WE DPWE-01MB DPWE-01MS
2 Button DPWE-02SS DPWE-02PB DPWE-02BB DPWE-02AB DPWE-02WE DPWE-02MB DPWE-02MS
5 Button DPWE-05SS DPWE-05PB DPWE-05BB DPWE-05AB DPWE-05WE DPWE-05MB DPWE-05MS
6 Button DPWE-06SS DPWE-06PB DPWE-06BB DPWE-06AB DPWE-06WE DPWE-06MB DPWE-06MS
7 Button DPWE-07SS DPWE-07PB DPWE-07BB DPWE-07AB DPWE-07WE DPWE-07MB DPWE-07MS10
Button DPWE-10SS DPWE-10PB DPWE-10BB DPWE-10AB DPWE-10WE DPWE-10MB DPWE-10MS
DTP100Colour Touchscreen
The DTP100 is a feature rich colour LCD touchscreen that uses vivid graphics and sophisticated on-screen controlswhich allows the Systems Installer to create visually stunning and easy-to-use pages. Control of various equipmentsuch as lighting, AV, security and HVAC can be easily integrated and controlled from the one location. Objects such aslogos, buttons, faders, floor plans and diagnostic icons can be placed on pages and used to perform simple and complexconditional logic macros. Pages are created using Philips Dynalite’s touchscreen editor. JavaScript is fully supported.
Incorporating an innovative clip-on fascia capability, the DTP100 fascia accommodates practically any flat architecturalsurface medium. That gives you the freedom to choose; stainless steel, stone, glass, laminate, wood, vinyl, ceramic;the options are limitless. Fascia material may be matched with Philips Dynalite’s DR2P Revolution series user control panels for perfect colour coordination.
Full internet connectivity is supported. The DTP100 is powered from the DyNet network so does not require a mains voltage supply.
Supply12V DC @ 400mA from the DyNet network
ScreenViewable Area: 10.9cm (4.3”) diagonal(H 5.38cm x W 9.5cm)Resolution: 480x272 (16:9 screen ratio)Colour Depth: 16bit (65536)Contrast: 300:1 Luminance: 350 cd/m2
Screen Type: TFT LCDViewing Angle: H 75º Vtop 75º Vbottom 55ºBacklight: LED, Dimmable, min 40,000 hr subject to screen saver settingsTouch Overlay: 4 Wire Resistive
User Page ObjectsButtonFaderText boxIconImage import
Operating System & SoftwareWindows CE 6.0Internet Explorer 6Windows Media Player 9 / MP3 support
AudioOn board speakerLine Out via 3.5mm stereo jack
IO Ports1 x RS485 DyNet serial port1 x Mini USB Type B service socket(programming port)1 x Mini USB Type B service socket(keyboard/mouse)1 x RJ45 10/100BaseT ethernet port1 x Reset Switch
Internal ControlsPC time clock with battery backupProgrammable Logic Controller
HardwareCPU: Intel XScale PXA310 624MHzNon Volatile Memory: 512MBVolatile Memory: 128MB
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Climate0º to 45ºC ambient temperature10% to 90% RH non condensing
ConstructionConcealed fixings fascia
DimensionsExposed:H 88 mm x W 146mm x D 6mm
WeightPacked weight: 0.9kg
Ordering Information* Stainless Steel (standard): DTP100 Black Glass fascia (option): DTP100-BG White Glass fascia (option): DTP100-WG *Custom facia finishes also available - ask your Philips Dynalite representative.
Wall box Mounting options700-279 Wallbox recess metal700-389 Wallbox recess drywall700-280 Wallbox surface mount
technical data
DTP100-BGblack glass facia shown*
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DTP100Colour Touchscreen
DTP100 Data Sheet Rev F April 2011
dimensions
DTP170Colour Touchscreen
The DTP170 is a feature rich colour LCD touchscreen that uses vivid graphics and sophisticated on-screen controls which allows the Systems Installer to create visually stunning and easy-to-use pages. Control of various equipment such as lighting, AV, security and HVAC can be easily integrated and controlled from the one location. Objects such as logos, buttons, faders, floor plans and diagnostic icons can be placed on pages and used to perform simple and complex conditional logic macros. Pages are created using Philips Dynalite’s touchscreen editor. JavaScript is fully supported.
Incorporating an innovative clip-on fascia capability, the DTP170 fascia accommodates practically any flat architectural surface medium. That gives you the freedom to choose; stainless steel, stone, glass, laminate, wood, vinyl, ceramic; the options are limitless. Fascia material may be matched with Dynalite’s DR2P Revolution series user control panels for perfect colour coordination.
Full Internet connectivity is supported. The DTP170 is powered from the DyNet network so does not require a mains voltage connection.
Supply12V DC @ 0.6A from the DyNet network
ScreenViewable Area: 178mm (7”) diagonal (W 152mm x H 91mm)Resolution: 800x480 (WVGA / 16:9 ratio)Colour Depth: 65,536 (16bit)Contrast: 300:1 Luminance: 280 cd/m2
Screen Type: TFT LCDView Angle: H 65º Vtop 60º Vbottom 50ºBacklight: LED, Dimmable, 40,000hr lifeTouch Overlay: 4 Wire Resistive
User Page ObjectsButtonFaderText boxIconImage import
Operating System & SoftwareWindows CE 6.0Internet Explorer 6Windows Media Player 9 / MP3 support
AudioOn board speakerLine Out via 3.5mm stereo jack IO Ports1 x RS485 DyNet port - screw terminals1 x RS485 DyNet port - RJ121 x 10/100BaseT Ethernet port RJ451 x USB Type Mini-B socket1 x USB Type A socket1 x Reset switch
technical data Internal ControlsPC time clock with battery backupProgrammable Logic Controller
HardwareIntel XScale PXA310 624MHz, 128MB SDRAM, 512MB FLASH
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 40ºC ambient temperature10% to 90% RH non condensing
ConstructionConcealed fixings facia, metal body & wallbox (wallbox supplied separately)
DimensionsExposed: H 149mm x W 233mm x D 7mm
Hidden, including wallbox: H 136mm x W 220mm x D 70mm
WeightPacked weight: 1.9kg
Ordering Information*Stainless Steel fascia, no wallbox: DTP170Stainless Steel fascia, with wallbox: DTP170-WBWallbox only: DTP170-WALLBOX*Custom fascia finishes also available
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DTP170Colour Touchscreen
DTP170 Data Sheet Rev E April 2011
dimensions (wall box fitted) dimensions (no wall box)
29.10
36.25
233
149
155.28
94.27
100
136
131
220208.40
121.9
0
19.2079
Hole suitable for 6 gauge or M3.5 pan head screw
7077.15
15050
233
149
155.28
94.27
220
136
16595
Ø25.20
Ø22.30
Hole suitable for 6 gauge or M3.5 pan head screw
DTC602 & DTCE602
Timer clock
The DTC602 is an astronomical 365 day timer clock with Sunrise/Sunset tracking, automatic Daylight Saving adjustment and powerful macro and conditional logic functions. The timer clock interfaces with other devices over the DyNet RS485 network to automate tasks and events. It may be used as an energy management controller or simply to select scenes at preset times of the day or week. The DTC602 is powerful enough to provide full automation of a large commercial project and can be programmed with events that automatically run at the specified time. A typical application entails automating lighting levels in a restaurant for breakfast, lunch, dinner, evening entertainment and cleaning. A manual button press can over-ride the pre-programmed events until the next timed event occurs.
In energy management applications, the timer clock sets the operating mode of other devices, such as Philips Dynalite DUS704 sensors, to give priority to either IR, PIR or PE facilities, depending on the time of day or day of week. The DTC602 can be programmed and operated remotely via a PC or via the front panel LCD display and keypad, which incorporates a PIN password to prevent unauthorised adjustment. The DTC602 can be used to make programming changes to a Philips Dynalite system without the use of a computer. The LCD display will help guide the user step by step through the programming task. Information such as channel, area and preset scene names are automatically uploaded from the network to assist in programming. It can be used in conjunction with standard control panels to access preset scenes that are not commonly used or that require protection from accidental selection. The device is available in Aus/US (DTC) & UK/Euro (DTCE) mounting configurations.
Supply 12V DC at 50mA from the DyNet network
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet serial port
User Controls1 x 122 x 32 pixel rear lit LCD display1 x 12 button LCD transport keys1 x 12 button numeric keypad
Clock365 day clockBattery back upSunrise/Sunset trackingAutomatic daylight saving adjustment250 timed events64 tasks
MemoryAll data stored in 100 year life EEPROM
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
Construction1.6mm stainless steel faceplate/body
DimensionsDTC602:H 115mm x W 164mm x D 24mm
DTCE602:H 86mm x W 146mm x D 24mm
WeightPacked weight 0.2kg
technical data
DTC602
DTCE602
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DTC602 & DTCE602
Timer clock
DTC602 & DTCE602 Data Sheet Rev E April 2011
mounting dimensions DTC602
164mm
36mm 92mm 36mm
115mm
16mm
84mm
16mm
19mm
72mm
24mm
24mm
15mm 15mm134mm
20mm4m
m
mounting dimensions DTCE602
146mm 24mm
13mm
121mm
13mm
6mm
134mm
6mm
9mm
68mm
9mm
20mm4mm
43mm
86mm
DDTC001Timer clock
The DDTC001 is a tamper-resistant DIN rail mounted embedded timer clock. All functions are programmed via a PC and there are no external controls available, preventing disruption to device operation. The DDTC001 features an astronomical 365 day timer clock with Sunrise/Sunset tracking, automatic Daylight Saving adjustment and powerful macro and conditional logic functions. The timer clock interfaces with other devices over the DyNet RS485 network to automate tasks and events and may be used as an energy management controller or simply to select scenes at preset times of the day or week. The DDTC001 is powerful enough to provide full automation of a large commercial project and can be programmed with events that automatically run at the specified time. A typical application entails automating lighting levels in a restaurant for breakfast, lunch, dinner, evening entertainment and cleaning.
The timer clock forms part of a powerful energy management system when used in conjunction with other Philips Dynalite devices. For instance, when used to set the operating mode of the Philips Dynalite DUS704 universal sensors, the timer clock can give priority to Infra-red, PIR or PE capability, depending on the time of day or day of week, ensuring that energy is not used unnecessarily. The DDTC001 is programmed remotely via a PC and will operate autonomously even if the PC is disconnected.
Supply12V DC at 20mA from the DyNetnetwork
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet serial port
User ControlsNo user controls - all functions areprogrammed with a PC
Clock365 day clockBattery back upSunrise/Sunset trackingAutomatic daylight saving adjustment250 timed events8 tasks
MemoryAll data stored in 100 year life EEPROM
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionABS DIN Rail enclosure (2 unit)
DimensionsH 86mm x W 35mm x D 58mm
WeightPacked weight 0.1kg
technical data
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDTC001Timer clock
mounting dimensions
DDTC001 Data Sheet Rev H April 2011
top view
side view
35mm
86
mm
58
mm
end view
to suit 35mm DIN rail
46mm
61mm
49
mm
29
mm
DUS804CMultifunction Sensor
The DUS804C is a low profile recessed flush mount 360º ceiling mount sensor that combines motion detection (PIR), Infra-red remote control reception (IR) and ambient light level detection (PE) in the one device. In applications such as office buildings, lecture theatres and homes, the DUS804C universal sensor can be utilised to detect motion and switch on the lights. When rooms are unoccupied, lights can be automatically dimmed or switched off to provide energy savings. The unit also incorporates a segmented click-up bezel surrounding the motion sensor element. This enables a portion of the sensing field to be readily masked to prevent nuisance detection from adjacent doorways or corridors. The same sensor provides IR control reception to enable full remote control over lights, audio-visual equipment and blinds. A range of hand-held Infra-red transmitters to complement DUS804 series universal sensors are available. In situations where it is critical to maintain precise lighting control for individual workspaces, such as an office workstation or even air traffic control centres, the DUS804C facilitates light compensation. The DUS804C can also be placed in an automatic“Daylight Harvesting” mode for energy savings.
Motion Detector DUS804C:Standard SensitivityMaximum detection range: 5.0mDetection Area: 7.4m x 5.6m rectangular (at a height of 2.5m) Detection speed: 1.0m/sDetection object: 700mm x 250mmDetection zones: 64 LED activation indicator Sensor: Quad element pyro-electric
DUS804C-SM: Slight Motion SensitivityMaximum detection range: 2.0mDetection Area: 5.0m circular (at a height of 2.0m) Detection speed: 0.5m/sDetection object: 200mm x 200mmDetection zones: 104 LED activation indicator Sensor: Quad element pyro-electric
PE CellRange <5 lux to >5000 lux (reflected)Automatic “Daylight Harvesting” mode
Infra Red Remote Control Receiver Range up to 6m LED activation indicator Can be used with DTK500 series Infra red remotes or other learning IR remote controls
Control IO Serial Port – RS485 DyNet
TerminalsStandard:5 way removable terminal strip, 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size
-RJ Option:2 x RJ12 network sockets
Controls Walk test/IR received LED indicatorService Switch
DyNet DC Load 20mA
ConfigurationAll functions remotely programmable
Operating Environment0º to 40ºC ambient temperature0% to 90% RH non condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
ConstructionABS plastic enclosure
Dimensions72mm diameter x D 26mm
WeightPacked weight 0.116kg
technical data
options Slight motion sensitivity - SM2 x RJ12 Network sockets - RJ
motion detection masking bezel
-RJ version with network sockets
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DUS804CMultifunction Sensor
lens pattern - DUS804C
Mounting height 2.5M
DUS804C Data Sheet Rev G April 2011
lens pattern - DUS804C-SM
Mounting height 2.5M
Ø72 mm
26 mm
11 mm
Ø 61 mm
Ø 63 mm
mounting dimensions
DUS804C-UPMultifunction Sensor
The DUS804C-UP is a 360º ceiling surface mounted sensor that combines Ultrasonic (UP) Passive Infra Red (PIR) motion detection, ambient light level detection (PE) and infra red remote control reception (IR) in the one device. In applications such as office buildings, lecture theatres, and homes, the DUS804C-UP universal sensor can be utilised to detect motion with in its scan area to trigger a programed action with the lighting. When the DUS804 has detected a room is unoccupied for a set time, lights can be automatically dimmed or switched off to provide energy savings. The same sensor provides IR control reception to enable full remote control over lights, audio-visual equipment and blinds. A range of hand held infra-red transmitters to complement series of universal sensors are available. In situations where it is critical to maintain precise lighting control for large workspaces such as open office floor plan, the DUS804C facilitates light compensation in an automatic“Daylight Harvesting” mode for energy savings.
technical data Motion Detection PIR:Maximum detection range: 5.0mDetection area: 7.4m x 5.6m ellipse (at a height of 2.5m) Detection speed: 1.0m/sDetection object: 700mm x 500mmDetection zones: 64 LED activation indicator Adjustable Pulse Count & Sensitivity Sensor: Quad element pyro-electric R.F.I. Immunity: >15V/m @ 10-1000MHz
Ultrasonic:Normal motion detection area: 8m x 16m (128m2 coverage)Slight motion detection area:4m x 12m (48m2 coverage)Transducer pairs: 2Operating frequency: 32KHz
PE CellRange <5 lux to >5000 lux (reflected)Automatic “Daylight Harvesting” mode
Infra Red Remote Control Receiver Range >6m LED activation indicator Can be used with DTK500 series infra red remotes or other learning IR remote controls
Control IO Serial Port – RS485 DyNetIR window used as network sign on
Terminals5 way removable terminal strip, 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size
Controls Walk test/IR received LED indicator
DyNet DC Load 80mA
ConfigurationAll functions remotely programmable
Operating Environment0º to 45ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
ConstructionABS plastic enclosure
Dimensions90mm diameter x Depth 26mm (exposed)
MountingRecessed spring clip or adjustable surface mounting ring. Sensor shipped with surface mounting ring
WeightPacked weight 0.25kg
DUS804C-UP with surface mounting
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
Ø 90
17
25
27
Ø 63
9
DUS804C-UPMultifunction Sensor
coverage
mounting dimensions
DUS804-UP Datasheet Rev E April 2011
DUS704Universal Sensors
The DUS704 series sensors combine motion detection (PIR), Infra-red remote control reception (IR) and ambient lightlevel detection (PE) in the one device. In applications such as homes, lecture theatres and office towers, DUS704universal sensors can be utilised to detect motion and switch on the lights. When rooms are unoccupied, lights canbe automatically dimmed or switched off to provide energy savings. The same sensor provides IR control reception toenable full remote control over lights, audio-visual equipment and blinds. A range of hand-held Infra-red transmitters tocomplement DUS704 series universal sensors are available. In situations where it is critical to maintain precise lightingcontrol for individual workspaces, such as a flight control tower or office workstation, the DUS704 facilitates lightcompensation. The DUS704 can also be placed in an automatic “Daylight Harvesting” mode for energy savings.
Motion Detector DUS704C: 360º Ceiling Mount PIR Detector Range 9m x 6m ellipse (at a height of 2.4m) Mounting height: 2.1m to 4.0m, 2.4m optimum LED activation indicator Adjustable Pulse Count & Sensitivity Detection zones: 34 dual element zones Sensor: Dual element pyro-electric R.F.I. Immunity: >15V/m @ 10-1000MHz
DUS704W: Wide Angle Wall Mount PIR DetectorRange 12m x 90º (standard lens)Mounting height: 1.1m to 3.1m LED activation indicator Adjustable Pulse Count & SensitivityDetection zones: 20 dual element zones Sensor: Dual element pyro-electric R.F.I. Immunity: >15V/m @ 10-1000MHz
Optional lens: 30m x 30º Long Range
PE CellDynamic range <5 lux to >13000 luxAutomatic “Daylight Harvesting” modeCan be used for light measurement
Infra Red Remote Control Receiver Range >6m LED activation indicator Can be used with DTK500 series Infra-red remotes or other learning IR remote control
Control IO Serial Port – RS485 DyNet
Terminals5 way terminal strip, 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size and RJ12 socket
Controls Walk test/IR received LED indicatorTamper switch
DyNet DC Load 20mA
ConfigurationAll functions remotely programmable
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
ConstructionABS plastic enclosure
DimensionsDUS704C:102mm diameter x D 30mm
DUS704W:H 85mm x W 66mm x D 45mm
WeightPacked weight 0.116kg
technical data
DUS704C
DUS704W
Long Range Lens -LRoptions
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DUS704Universal Sensors
lens pattern - DUS704W wide angle
DUS704 Data Sheet Rev G April 2011
lens pattern - DUS704W long range
lens pattern - DUS704C 360º
Mounting height 2.4M12M
12M
DTS900 & DTS900M
Temperature Sensors
The DTS900 measures ambient temperature and provides data to other devices on a DyNet network, such as relay controllers used to switch heating and cooling plants. High and low setpoints are configured using Envision commissioning software, or can be dynamically set via other Philips Dynalite devices, such as the DTK600 touchscreen. Conversely, the touchscreen can also be used to interrogate the DTS900 and to display the current temperature in real time.
The DTS900 incorporates filtering and hysteresis to provide compensation for rapid temperature fluctuations and features an LED indicator which provides the status of the device. The DTS900 is also available with a user-adjustable temperature setpoint knob (DTS900M).
Supply 12V @20mA from the DyNet network
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet serial port
Measurement Range0º to 50ºC, accuracy +/-1ºC
Internal ControlsProgrammable Logic Controller
User Controls• LED indicator Blue = Cool Red = Heat
• Temperature set point knob (DTS900M only)
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non-condensing
ConstructionABS plastic wall mount case
Dimensions H 71mm x W 71mm x D 26mm
Weight Packed weight 110 grams
technical data
DTS900
DTS900M
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DTS900 & DTS900M
Temperature Sensors
electrical diagram DTS900 mounting dimensions
DTS900 & DTS900M Data Sheet Rev E April 2011
71mm
71m
m
Ø60mm
26mm
3mm
+15V
D +
D -
GND
SHIELD
µP
DyNetRS485
T
+15V
D +
D -
GND
SHIELD
µP
DyNetRS485
T
electrical diagram DTS900M
Relay and Multi-use Controllers
As one of the most popular forms of lighting control, relay and multi-use devices can have the most impact to energy management and lighting control. Available in both DIN rail and wall box configuration, Philips Dynalite supports a vast range of relay controllers with a variety of circuit numbers and sizes to work individually or as part of a system, suiting any project requirement. Each device can store over 170 presets, allowing the recall of complex switching logic from simple network messages. As the required preset scenarios are stored within each relay device, the commissioning process and network messages are simplified.
DMRC210Relay Controller
The DMRC210 is designed to allow intelligent, networked control of individual lighting fixtures. The compact design enables the unit to be mounted directly within the gear enclosure of many fixtures. Each relay controller incorporates two relay outputs which can be used to control mains supply to the fixture and to provide an intensity control when used with tapped ballasts. The relays are very robust and are fully rated for difficult lighting loads.
Supply100-240V 50/60Hz Single Phase at20A
Outputs2 x switched output at 10A (inductive)
Switching DeviceRelay, Tungsten pilot contact,16A inductive, 165A surge
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 150mA (supply for approx. 7 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Output TerminalsLine1, Line2, Neutral1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment50˚C max
EnclosureABS plastic
DimensionsL 185mm x W 44mm x D 38mm
WeightPacked weight 0.19kg
technical data
All types of Switched loadsload compatibility
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DMRC210Relay Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DMRC210 Data Sheet Rev G April 2011
Supply:100-240V 1 Phase
20A
LN
DyNetRS485
+VED + D -
GN
D
Shie
ld
µP
CH2
CH1
N
225 mm
45 m
m
10 mm
Ø 5 5 m
m
240 mm
211 mm
240 mm
38 m
m
45 mm
DDRC810-GL Relay Controller
The DDRC810-GL controllers are designed to operate any type of switched load. The DDRC810-GL incorporates common supply SPST output relays, suitable for ON/OFF control of all types of mains rated equipment. The device is DIN rail mountable, designed for installation within a switchboard or next to circuit breakers feeding the circuits to be controlled. The devices can operate as stand-alone units or as part of an integrated system when connected to a DyNet network.
Supply100-240V, 50/60Hz Single Phase at max. 20A
OutputsDDRC810-GL – 8 x switched SPST common supply outputs: resistive relay contact TV5 rated16A 250V AC
Maximum Total Box Load20A Box Load
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet serial port/DMX1 x AUX programmable dry contact input
User ControlsService Over-ride switchDiagnostic LED
Internal ControlsInbuilt Programmable Logic Controller
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral, Earth2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Output TerminalsC, NO, NC for each channel 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Diagnostic FunctionsCircuit run time tracking on each channelDevice Online/Offline status
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
EnclosurePolycarbonate DIN-rail enclosure (12 unit)
DimensionsH 93mm x W 211mm x D 75mm
WeightPacked weight 0.82kg
technical data
Any switched load, up to 10A per channelload compatibility
Manual Override - MOfront panel override switches, ideal for contactor control applications. Includes:• ON/OFF/AUTO override switch for each channel• LED status indicator for each channel
options
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDRC810-GLRelay Controller
electrical diagram - DDRC810 mounting dimensions
DDRC810-GL Data Sheet Rev J April 2011
Supply:100-240V 1 Phase
20A
DyNetRS485
+VE
AU
X
D + D -
GN
D
Shie
ld
DDRC810Dt-GL Multi-use Relay Controller
the DDRC810Dt-GL controller is designed to operate any type of switched load. the DDRC810Dt-GL incorporates voltage free changeover SPDt type output relays, making the device ideal for controlling bi-directional motors, such as curtain motors. this device is DIN-rail mountable, designed for installation within a switchboard, or next to circuit breakers feeding the circuits to be controlled. this device can operate as stand-alone units or as part of an integrated system when connected to a DyNet network.
Supply100-240V, 50/60Hz Single Phase at max. 0.25 AActive SMPS power consumption estimate is max 8W
OutputsDDRC810Dt-GL – 8 x switched SPDt voltage free changeover maximum ratings for each output:10A 250V AC (resistive), 10A30V DC (resistive)• Snubbers/spark killers not fitted, de rate for reactive loads.• Functional isolation only between switched outputs, do not mix SELV and non-SELV loads on the same DDRC810Dt-GL.
Maximum Total Box Load40A Box Load
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet serial port / DMX1 x AUX programmable dry contact input
User ControlsService Over-ride switchDiagnostic LED
Internal ControlsInbuilt Programmable Logic Controller
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral, Earth2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Output TerminalsC, NO, NC for each channel 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Diagnostic FunctionsCircuit run time tracking on each channel
ComplianceCE, C-tick
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
EnclosurePolycarbonate DIN-rail enclosure (12 unit)
DimensionsH 93mm x W 211mm x D 75mm
WeightPacked weight 0.82kg
technical data
Any switched load, up to 10A per channelload compatibility
Manual Override - MOfront panel override switches, ideal for contactor control applications. Includes:• ON/OFF/AUtO override switch for each channel• LED status indicator for each channel
options
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDRC810Dt-GLMulti-use Relay Controller
electrical diagram - DDRC810 mounting dimensions
DDRC810DT-GL Data Sheet Rev J April 2011
S upply:100-240V 0.25A
1 P has e
AN
E
DyNetR S 485
AU
X
+VED
+
D-
GN
D
Sh
ield
NO
NC
NO
NC
NO
NC
NO
NC
NO
NC
NO
NC
NO
NC
NO
NC
C H1
C H2
C H3
C H4
C H5
C H6
C H7
C H8
µP
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
DDRC420FRRelay Controller
The DDRC420FR is designed to control any type of switched load. The power circuit is of a “feed through” design and is electrically equivalent to a 4 pole contactor, with the additional advantage of each pole being separately controllable via the DyNet network. The DDRC420FR is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard next to the circuit breakers, feeding the circuits to be controlled. Each channel is fitted with a hardware over-ride switch which is accessible from the front panel. This switch also provides visual indication of the state of each channel. The relays are very robust and are fully rated for difficult lighting loads.
Control Supply100-240V 50/60Hz Single Phase at 0.25A
Outputs4 x Switched feed thru outputs at 20A(inductive). Maximum device load 80A
RelaysRated switch current: 50A resistive, 20A lighting loadRated inrush current: 500ARated switching voltage: 440V AC
Supported wiring schemes• Single Phase and Neutral• Three Phase and Neutral (Star)
Control IO1 x DMX512 / RS485 DyNet serial port1 x programmable dry contact AUX input
User ControlsService Over-ride switch for each channelDiagnostic LED
Internal ControlsProgrammable Logic Controller
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral, Earth1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Output TerminalsLine In, Line Out for each channel1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline statusCircuit run time tracking
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionPolycarbonate DIN rail enclosure (6 unit)
DimensionsH 93mm x W 105mm x D 75mm
WeightPacked weight 0.8kg
technical data
load compatibility All Types of switched loads up to 20A inductive
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDRC420FRRelay Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DDRC420FR Data Sheet Rev J April 2011
94.5
6946
38
51
75
59
105
ControlSupply:
100-240V 0.25A1 Phase
LNE
DyNetRS485
AU
X+V
E
D + D -
GN
DSh
ield
µP
CH4 - INCH4 - OUT
CH3 - INCH3 - OUT
CH2 - INCH2 - OUT
CH1 - INCH1 - OUT
DDRC820FRRelay Controller
The DDRC820FR is designed to control any type of switched load. The power circuit is of a “feed through” design and is electrically equivalent to a 8 pole contactor, with the additional advantage of each pole being separately controllable via the DyNet network. The DDRC820FR is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard next to the circuit breakers feeding the circuits to be controlled. Each channel is fitted with a hardware override switch which is accessible from the front panel.
Control Supply100-240V 50/60Hz Single Phase at 0.25A
Outputs8 x Switched feed through outputs at 20A(inductive). Maximum device load 160A
RelaysRated switch current: 50A resistive, 20A lighting loadRated inrush current: 500ARated switching voltage: 440V AC
Supported wiring schemes• Single Phase and Neutral• Three Phase and Neutral (Star)
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port1 x programmable dry contact AUX input
User ControlsService Over-ride switch for each channelDiagnostic LED
Internal ControlsProgrammable Logic Controller
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral, Earth1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Output TerminalsLine In, Line Out for each channel1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Diagnostic FunctionsCircuit run time trackingDevice Online/Offline status
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionPolycarbonate DIN rail enclosure (12 unit)
DimensionsH 93mm x W 211mm x D 75mm
WeightPacked weight 1.0kg
technical data
All Types of switched loads up to 20A inductiveload compatibility
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDRC820FRRelay Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DDRC820FR Data Sheet Rev K April 2011
Supply: 100-240V 0.25A
1 Phase
LNE
DyNetRS485
AUX
+VE
D + D -
GND
Shie
ld
µP
CH8 IN
CH7 IN
CH6 IN
CH5 IN
CH4 IN
CH3 IN
CH2 IN
CH1 IN
CH8 OUT
CH7 OUT
CH6 OUT
CH5 OUT
CH4 OUT
CH3 OUT
CH2 OUT
CH1 OUT
DDRC1220FR-GLRelay Controller
The DDRC1220FR-GL is designed to control any type of switched load. The power circuit is a “feed through” design and is electrically equivalent to a 12 pole contactor, with the additional advantage of each pole being separately controllable via the DyNet network. The DDRC1220FR-GL is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard next to the circuit breakers feeding the circuits to be controlled. Each channel is fitted with a hardware override switch which is accessible from the front panel.
Control Supply100-240V 50/60Hz Single Phase at 0.25A
Outputs12 x Switched feed thru outputs at 20A(inductive)
RelaysRated switch current: 50A resistive, 20A lighting loadRated inrush current: 500ARated switching voltage: 440V AC
Supported wiring schemes:• Single Phase and Neutral• Three Phase and Neutral (Star)Maximum Device Load 180A
Control Inputs1 x DMX512 / RS485 DyNet serial port1 x programmable dry contact AUX input
User ControlsService Over-ride switch for each channelDiagnostic LED
Internal ControlsProgrammable Logic Controller
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral, Earth1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Output TerminalsLine In, Line Out for each channel1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline statusCircuit run time trackingNetwork Watchdog
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionPolycarbonate DIN rail enclosure (12 unit)
DimensionsH 93mm x W 211mm x D 75mm
WeightPacked weight 1.1kg
technical data
load compatibility Load Type (Max load may be limited by 500A inrush rating)All Types of switched loads up to 20A inductive
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDRC1220FR-GLRelay Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DDRC1220FR-GL Data Sheet Rev J April 2011
Supply:100-240V 0.25A
1 Phase
LNE
DyNetRS485
XU
AV
E+
+ D
- D
DN
Gdleih
S
CH12 IN
µP
CH11 IN
CH10 IN
CH9 IN
CH8 IN
CH7 IN
CH6 IN
CH5 IN
CH4 IN
CH3 IN
CH2 IN
CH1 IN
CH12 OUT
CH11 OUT
CH10 OUT
CH9 OUT
CH8 OUT
CH7 OUT
CH6 OUT
CH5 OUT
CH4 OUT
CH3 OUT
CH2 OUT
CH1 OUT
DRC1205Relay Controller
The DRC1205 is a 12 channel relay controller, with a maximum load of 5A per channel. It is used for switching both lighting and non-lighting loads. In areas where it is beneficial to sequentially switch on large lighting loads, such as factories and indoor sporting arenas, the DRC1205 can be programmed to stagger the switch on of the lights, to minimise peak demand current.
Supply 400/230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-Phase at 20A per phase or230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 60A
Outputs 12 x switched outputs at 5A (total device load is 60A)
Protection3 x 20A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers
Switching DeviceRelay 10A nom. (resistive)
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet serial port1 x programmable dry contact AUX input
User ControlsService Over-ride switch - All channels to 100% Diagnostic LED
Internal ControlsProgrammable Logic ControllerPhilips Dynalite Accessory Module enabled
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels)
Preset Scenes120
Supply TerminalsL1, L2, L3, N1 x 10mm2 max conductor size
Output TerminalsLine, Neutral for each channel2 x 4mm2 max conductor sizeEarth Link bar provided
Cable EntriesMains – 1 x 75mm x 53mm removable gland plateData – 1 x 25mm dia. knockout
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionAlloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish
DimensionsH 450mm x W 225mm x D 75mm (excludes wall brackets)
Weight Packed weight 4.8kg
technical data
All switched loads up to 5Aload compatibility
Extra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -ACombined MCB and RCD internal protection fitted – RCBO
options
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DRC1205Relay Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DRC1205 Data Sheet Rev O April 2011
Supply:
230V 20A3 Phase
or230V 60A1 Phase E
DyNetRS485
AUX
+VE
D + D -
GND
SHIE
LD
NL3
µP
L2L1
NCH2
CH1
NCH3
CH4N
N
NCH6
CH5
NCH7
CH8N
N
NCH10
CH9
NCH11
CH12N
N
165 mm
225 mm
500 m
m
480 m
m
450 m
m
80 m
m
75 m
m
DRC810DTRelay Controller
The DRC810DT relay controller is designed for operation of general purpose switched loads in applications where facilities for input connection are also required. Incorporating voltage free change-over SPDT output relays, the DRC810DT is ideal for controlling bi-directional motors, such as those used for curtains. The device is also suitable for connection to third-party systems where a low voltage contact interface is required. Multipurpose programmable dry contact and analogue inputs are also provided for interfacing to other devices. The DRC810DT also incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and arithmetic functions.
Supply 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 0.1A
Switched Outputs 8 x SPDT voltage free changeover contactsmaximum ratings for each output:- NO contact – 10A 250V AC (resistive) 10A 30V DC (resistive) TV8 rated- NC contact – 5A 250V AC (resistive) 5A 30V DC (resistive) * Snubbers/spark killers not fitted, de-rate for reactive loads.* All 8 outputs must be on the same Phase.* Functional isolation only between switched outputs, do not mix SELV and non-SELV loads on the same DRC810DT.
Maximum Total Box Load 80A
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet serial port / DMX1 x AUX programmable dry contact input8 x multi-purpose programmable dry contact / 0-5V / 0-10V DC analogue inputs
User ControlsService Over-ride switch - All channels to 100%Diagnostic LED
Internal ControlsProgrammable Logic Controller
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Output TerminalsC, NO, NC for each channel1 x 4mm2
max conductor size Earth link bar provided
Cable EntriesMains – 1 x 75mm x 53mm removable gland plateData – 1 x 25mm dia. knockout
Dry Contact Terminals 1 x 1mm2 max conductor size
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
Construction Alloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish Dimensions H 320mm x W 225mm x D 75mm (excludes wall brackets)
WeightPacked weight 3.5kg
technical data
Any switched load, up to 10A per channelDry contact interface unitsBlind motors
Loads requiring changeover contactsCurtain motors
load compatibility
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DRC810DTRelay Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DRC810DT Data Sheet Rev J April 2011
CNONCC
NONCC
NONCC
NONCC
NONCC
NONCC
NONCC
NONC
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
IN1 A/D
A/D
A/D
A/D
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
0V
IN8
5V
Dry Contact & Analogue
Inputs
Dry ContactOutputs
Supply:230V 0.1A1 Phase E
DyNetRS485
AUX
+12VD
+D
-
GN
DS
HIEL
D
NL
µP
A/D
A/D
A/D
A/D
DRC1210 & DRC1220GLRelay Controllers
The DRC1210 and DRC1220GL are 12 channel relay controllers, with a maximum load per channel of 10A and 20A respectively. They are used for switching both lighting and non-lighting loads. Both controllers have an optional accessory card for control of electronic dimmable ballasts. In areas where it is beneficial to sequentially switch on large lighting loads, such as factories and indoor sporting arenas, the DRC1210 and DRC1220GL can be programmed to stagger the switch on of the lights, to minimise peak demand current.
Supply DRC1210 - 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 40A, or 400/230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-Phase at 40A per phaseDRC1220GL - 230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-Phase at 63A per phase
Outputs DRC1210 - 12 x switched outputs at 10A (max device load is 120A)DRC1220GL - 12 x switched outputs at 20A (max device load is 180A)
ProtectionDRC1210 - 12 x 10A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakersDRC1220GL - 12 x 20A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers
RelayDRC1210 & DRC1220GL - Relay - 50A 230V AC inductive (5000W lighting load rated)
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet serial port / DMX1 x programmable dry contact AUX input
User ControlsService Over-ride switch - All channels to 100% Diagnostic LED
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 200mA (supply for approx. 10 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Supply TerminalsDRC1210 - L1, L2, L31 x 16mm2 max conductor size DRC1220GL - L1, L2, L31 x 35mm2 max conductor size
Output TerminalsLine for each channel1 x 10mm2 max conductor sizeNeutral Link bar providedEarth Link bar provided
Cable EntryMains – 4 x 25mm dia. knockouts mounted on a 100mm x 50mm removable gland plateData – 1 x 25mm dia. knockoutOutputs - 6 x 25mm
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionAlloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish
DimensionsH 457mm x W 252mm x D 126mm (excludes wall brackets)
(-RCBO version H 585mm)
Weight10.25kg
technical data
Any switched loadload compatibility
Extra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -AEarth leakage and overload protection on each channel - RCBO (note larger enclosure)
options
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DRC1210 & DRC1220GLRelay Controllers
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DRC1210 & DRC1220GL Data Sheet Rev S April 2011
Supply:230V
3 Phase
E
DyNetRS485
AUX+V
E
D +
D -
GN
DSH
IELD
NL3
µP
L2L1
CH2
CH1
CH3
CH4
CH6
CH5
CH7
CH8
CH10
CH9
CH11
CH12
NNN
N
NNN
N
NNN
N
Leading Edge Dimmer Controllers
Leading Edge Dimmer Controllers are ideal for lighting circuits with resistive and inductive properties, including mains voltage incandescent fittings, neon and low voltage lamps with a compatible electronic transformer. Available in both DIN rail and wall box configuration, Philips Dynalite supports a vast range of leading edge dimmer controllers with a variety of circuit numbers and sizes to work individually or part of a system, fitting any project requirement. Standard built-in features of the dimmers include: • power conditioning to protect lamps• over voltage• surge protection• brownout/sag protectionStandard features will increase lamp life, reducing the ongoing running costs.
DDLE802 Leading Edge Dimmer Controller
The DDLE802 is an 8 channel leading edge dimmer with a maximum load per channel of 2 Amps. It is suitable for use with incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent fixtures. It is also highly recommended for use in residential and hotel applications. The DDLE802 features Philips Dynalite’s superior voltage regulation and soft start technologies, which protect low voltage lamps and dramatically increase lamp life.
The front panel of the DDLE802-MO (Manual Over-ride) version includes a rear-lit keypad that provides status indication and local control of individual channels. It also features an LED illuminated service switch for diagnostics and local over-ride. Adjacent to the keypad is a network socket for ease of programming. The device is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard, optionally next to circuit breakers feeding the circuits to be controlled.
Supply230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 16A
Outputs8 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 2A. Maximum device load is 16A.
ProtectionEach pair of channels protected by a replaceable 6.3A time delay M205 fuse
Regulating DeviceTriac - 20A, 600V, 200A surge
Power Conditioning• Regulated outputs• Over voltage protection• Surge protection• Brownout/Sag protection• Spike protection• Soft start• 16 bit fade resolution (65,536 steps)
Cooling SystemNaturally ventilated, no forced cooling, no maintenance
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet and DMX512 serial port1 x AUX programmable dry contact input
User ControlsServer SwitchLED
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Supply Terminals2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor sizeLine, Neutral, Earth
Output TerminalsLine, Neutral for each channel, 2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size
Diagnostic FunctionsCircuit run time tracking on each channelDevice Online/Offline status
Operating Environment0º to 40ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
EnclosurePoly Carbonate DIN Rail enclosure (12 unit)
DimensionsH 93mm x W 211mm x D 75mm
WeightPacked weight 0.94kg
technical data
IncandescentIron core transformersLeading edge electronic transformers
load compatibility
- 120V supply option -120V- 100V supply option -100V- Manuel over-ride -MO
options
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDLE802Leading Edge Dimmer Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DDLE802 Data Sheet Rev J April 2011
Supply:230V 16A
1 Phase E
DyNetRS485
AUX
+VE
D + D -
GND
SHIE
LD
NNL
CH2
CH1
µP
T 6.3A M205
N
N
CH4
CH3T 6.3A M205
N
N
CH6
CH5T 6.3A M205
N
N
CH8
CH7T 6.3A M205
N
DLE1203Leading Edge Dimmer Controller
The DLE1203 is a 12 channel leading edge energy management controller with a maximum load per channel of 3A and a total device load of 32A. It is suitable for use with incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent fixtures. It is especially suitable for residential applications. When used with Philips Dynalite’s System Integrator, the lighting control system can be integrated into a total smart home solution including security, HVAC, home theatre, blind control and exterior lighting. The DLE1203 protects low voltage lamps and dramatically increases lamp life, through utilisation of Philips Dynalite’s superior voltage regulation and soft start technologies.
Supply230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 32A
Outputs12 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 3A (total device load is 32A)
Protection2 x 16A 6kA single pole thermal magneticcircuit breakers
Regulating DeviceTriac 600V 40A nom. 400A surge
Power Conditioning• Regulated outputs• Over voltage protection• Surge protection• Brownout/Sag protection• Spike protection• Soft start• 16 bit fade resolution (65536 steps)
Cooling SystemNaturally ventilated, no forced cooling, no maintenance
Interference SuppressionIron powder toroidal choke
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet serial port1 x programmable dry contact AUX input
User ControlsService SwitchDiagnostic LED
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral2 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Output TerminalsLine, Neutral for each channel2 x 4mm2 max conductor sizeEarth Link bar provided
Cable EntriesMains – 1 x 75mm x 53mm removable gland plateData – 1 x 25mm dia. knockout
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 40ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionAlloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxyfinish
DimensionsH 450mm x W 225mm x D 75mm(excludes wall brackets)
WeightPacked weight 6.0kg
technical data
IncandescentNeon
Iron core transformersLeading edge electronic transformers
load compatibility
Extra RS485 DyNet / DMX512 port -ACircuit breaker trip reporting -BT
options
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DLE1203Leading Edge Dimmer Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DLE1203 Data Sheet Rev I April 2011
Supply:230V 32A1 Phase E
DyNetRS485
AU
X+V
E
D + D -
GN
DSH
IELD
NNL
CH2
CH1
NCH3
CH4N
N
NCH6
CH5
NCH7
CH8N
N
NCH10
CH9
NCH11
CH12N
N
µP
165 mm
225 mm
500m
m
480 m
m
450 m
m
80 m
m
75 m
m
DLE405Leading Edge Dimmer Controller
The DLE405 is a 4 channel energy management controller with a maximum load per channel of 5A. It is suitable for use with incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent lighting. Where retail merchandise is on display, the DLE405 protects low voltage lamps and dramatically increases lamp life. This is achieved through Philips Dynalite’s superior voltage regulation and soft start technologies.
Supply230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 20A
Outputs4 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phasecontrol) at 5A
Protection4 x 6A 6kA single pole thermal magneticcircuit breakers
Regulating DeviceTriac 600V 40A nom. 400A surge
Power Conditioning• Regulated outputs• Over voltage protection• Surge protection• Brownout/Sag protection• Spike protection• Soft start• 16 bit Fader resolution (65536 steps)
Cooling SystemNaturally ventilated, no forced cooling, nomaintenance
Interference SuppressionIron powder toroidal choke
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet serial port1 x programmable dry contact AUX input
User ControlsService Over-ride switch - All channels to 100%Diagnostic LED
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral2 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Output TerminalsLine, Neutral for each channel2 x 4mm2 max conductor sizeEarth Link bar provided
Cable EntriesMains – 1 x 75mm x 53mm removable gland plateData – 1 x 25mm dia. knockout
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 40ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionAlloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxyfinish
DimensionsH 320mm x W 225mm x D 75mm(excludes wall brackets)
WeightPacked weight 4.2kg
technical data
IncandescentNeon
Iron core transformersLeading edge electronic transformers
load compatibility
Circuit breaker trip reporting -BTExtra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -A
Earth leakage and overload protection on each channel - RCBO (note larger enclosure)
options
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DLE405Leading Edge Dimmer Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DLE405 Data Sheet Rev O April 2011
Supply:230V 20A1 Phase
N
E
DyNetRS485
AU
X
+VE
D + D -
GN
D
CH1
N
CH2
CH3
CH4
N
N
SHIE
LD
µP
LN
365 m
m
225 mm
165 mm
345 m
m
320 m
m
80 m
m
75 m
m
DLE1205Leading Edge Dimmer Controller
The DLE1205 is a 12 channel leading edge dimmer with a maximum load per channel of 5A and a total device load of 60A. It is suitable for use with incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent fixtures. The combination of load capacity, sub circuit protection and attractive pricing makes it especially suitable for residential and small commercial applications. When used with the Philips Dynalite range of integration accessories, the lighting control system can be integrated into a total smart home solution including security, HVAC, home theatre, blind control and exterior lighting. The DLE1205 protects low voltage lamps and dramatically increases lamp life. This is achieved through Philips Dynalite’s superior voltage regulation and soft start technologies.
Supply400/230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-Phase at20A per phaseor230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 60A
Outputs12 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 5A. Total device load is 60A.
Protection12 x 6A 6kA single pole thermal magneticcircuit breakers
Regulating DeviceTriac 600V 40A nom. 400A surge
Power Conditioning• Regulated outputs• Over voltage protection• Surge protection• Brownout/Sag protection• Spike protection• Soft start• 16 bit fade resolution (65536 steps)
Cooling SystemNaturally ventilated, no forced cooling, no maintenance
Interference SuppressionIron powder toroidal choke
Rise Time100μS at 230V
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port1 x programmable dry contact AUX input
User ControlsService Over-ride Switch/Over-rideDiagnostic LED3 x Phase indicator LEDHardware bypass switches for each channel
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 200mA (supply for approx. 10 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Supply TerminalsL1, L2, L31 x 10mm2 max conductor size
Output TerminalsLine for each channel1 x 4mm2 max conductor sizeNeutral Link bar providedEarth Link bar provided
Cable EntryMains: 4 x 25mm dia. knockouts mountedon a 100mm x 50mm removable gland plate6 x 25mm dia. knockouts on the right sideof enclosureData: 1 x 25mm dia. knockout
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 40ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionAlloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxyfinish
DimensionsH 626mm x W 255mm x D 176mm(including wall brackets)
WeightPacked weight 14kg
technical data
IncandescentNeon
Iron core transformersLeading edge electronic transformers
load compatibility
Extra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -AThree Pole circuit breakers -3PoleCircuit breaker trip reporting -BT
Earth leakage and overload protection on each channel - RCBOoptions
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DLE1205Leading Edge Dimmer Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DLE1205 Data Sheet Rev S April 2011
606 m
m62
6 mm
582 m
m
255 mm221 mm
15 m
m
176 m
m14 m
m14
7 mm
Supply:
400/230V 20A3 Phase:
E
DyNetRS485
AUX+V
E
D +
D -
GN
DSH
IELD
NL3
µP
L2L1
CH2
CH1
CH3
CH4
CH6
CH5
CH7
CH8
CH10
CH9
CH11
CH12
NNN
N
NNN
N
NNN
N
Single phase:400/230V 60A
DLE410Leading Edge Dimmer Controller
The DLE410 is a 4 channel energy management controller with a maximum load per channel of 10A. It is suitable for use with incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent light sources. In applications where there can be numerous users, such as lecture theatres, the DLE410 can be configured with control panels and an IR Receiver to provide preset scenes for entry, set-up, cleaning and presentations. An over-ride capability for presenters can be provided using Philips Dynalite’s IR handset.
Supply230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 40A
Outputs4 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phasecontrol) at 10A
Protection4 x 10A 6kA single pole thermal magneticcircuit breakers
Regulating DeviceTriac 600V 40A nom. 400A surge
Power Conditioning• Regulated outputs• Over voltage protection• Surge protection• Brownout/Sag protection• Spike protection• Soft start• 16 bit Fader resolution (65536 steps)
Cooling SystemNaturally ventilated, no forced cooling, no maintenance
Interference SuppressionIron powder toroidal choke
Rise Time100μS at 230V
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet serial port / DMX1 x programmable dry contact AUX input
User ControlsService Over-ride switch - All channels to 100%Diagnostic LEDHardware bypass switches for each channel
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 200mA (supply for approx. 10 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral2 x 10mm2 max conductor size
Output TerminalsLine, Neutral for each channel2 x 4mm2 max conductor sizeEarth Link bar provided
Cable EntriesMains – 7 x 25mm dia. knockoutsData – 1 x 25mm dia. knockout
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 40ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionAlloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxyfinish
DimensionsH 300mm x W 212mm x D 144mm(excludes wall brackets)
WeightPacked weight 8.8kg
technical data
IncandescentNeon
Iron core transformersLeading edge electronic transformers
load compatibility
Extra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -ACircuit breaker trip reporting -BT
Earth leakage and overload protection on each channel -RCBO
options
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DLE410Leading Edge Dimmer Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DLE410 Data Sheet Rev P April 2011
S upply:230V 40A1 P has e
N
E
DyNetR S 485
AU
X
+VED + D -
GN
D
C H1
N
C H2
C H3
C H4
N
N
µP
N
L
Sh
ield
DLE1210GLLeading Edge Dimmer Controller
The DLE1210GL is a 12 channel leading edge dimmer with a maximum load per channel of 10A and a total device load of 75A. It is suitable for control of large loads, including incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent light sources. The DLE1210GL is the ideal choice in applications requiring reliability combined with large power handling. It is DMX512 compatible, making it perfect for use in theatres, shopping centres and auditoriums. The DLE1210GL protects low voltage lamps and dramatically increases lamp life. This is achieved through Philips Dynalite’s superior voltage regulation and soft start technologies.
Supply400/230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-phase at25A per phaseor230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 75A
Outputs12 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 10A. Total device load is 75A.
Protection12 x 10A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers
Regulating DeviceTriac 600V 40A nom. 400A surge
Power Conditioning• Regulated outputs• Over voltage protection• Surge protection• Brownout/Sag protection• Spike protection• Soft start• 16 bit fade resolution (65536 steps)
Cooling SystemNaturally ventilated, no forced cooling, no maintenance
Interference SuppressionIron powder toroidal choke
Rise Time100μS at 230V
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port1 x programmable dry contact AUX input
User ControlsService Switch Over-rideDiagnostic LED3 x Phase indicator LEDsHardware bypass switches for each channel
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 200mA (supply for approx. 10 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Supply TerminalsL1, L2, L31 x 16mm2 max conductor size
Output TerminalsLine output for each channel1 x 4mm2 max conductor sizeNeutral Link bar providedEarth Link bar provided
Cable EntryMains: 4 x 25mm dia. knockouts mountedon a 100mm x 50mm removable gland plate6 x 25mm dia. knockouts on the right sideof enclosureData: 1 x 25mm dia. knockout
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 40ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionAlloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxyfinish
DimensionsH 626mm x W 255mm x D 176mm(including wall brackets)
WeightPacked weight 18kg
technical data
IncandescentNeonIron core transformers
Leading edge dimmable electronictransformers
load compatibility
Extra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -ACircuit breaker trip reporting -BTThree Pole circuit breakers -3Pole
Earth leakage and overload protection oneach channel - RCBOoptions
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DLE1210GLLeading Edge Dimmer Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DLE1210GL Data Sheet Rev G April 2011
Supply:3 Phase:
230 @ 25ASingle Phase:
230 @ 75AN
L1 CH1
NL2
CH2
CH3
N
CH4
N
CH5
CH6
N
N
L3
E
N
CH7
N
CH8
CH9
N
CH10
N
CH11
CH12
N
N
N
RS485DyNet
AU
X
+VE
D + D -
GN
D
SHIE
LD
µP
DLE1210Leading Edge Dimmer Controller
The DLE1210 is a 12 channel energy management controller with a maximum load per channel of 10A. It is suitable for control of large loads, including incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent light sources. The DLE1210 is the ideal choice in applications requiring reliability combined with large power handling capability. It is DMX512 compatible, making it perfect for use in theatres and auditoriums.
Supply400/230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-Phase at40A per phase
Outputs12 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 10A, total box load is 120A max.
Protection12 x 10A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers on each channel
Regulating DeviceTriac 600V 40A nom. 400A surge
Power Conditioning• Regulated outputs• Over voltage protection• Surge protection• Brownout/Sag protection• Spike protection• Soft start• 16 bit fade resolution (65536 steps)
Cooling SystemNaturally ventilated, no forced cooling, no maintenance
Interference SuppressionIron powder toroidal choke
Rise Time200μS at 230V
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port1 x programmable AUX dry contact input
User ControlsService/Override SwitchDiagnostic LED3 x Phase indicator LEDsHardware bypass switches for each channel
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 200mA (supply for approx. 10 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Supply TerminalsLine1, Line2, Line31 x 16mm2 max conductor sizeEarth Link bar providedNeutral Link bar provided
Output TerminalsLine for each channel1 x 16mm2 max conductor sizeEarth Link bar providedNeutral Link bar provided
Cable EntriesMains - 4 x 25mm dia. knockouts on a 105mm x 145mm removable gland plateData - 1 x 25mm dia. knockout
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 40ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionAlloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxyfinish
DimensionsH 600mm x W 345mm x D 187mm(excludes wall brackets)
WeightPacked weight 30kg
technical data
IncandescentNeon
Leading edge electronic transformersIron core transformers
load compatibility
Second RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -AEarth leakage and overload protection on each channel -RCBO
Circuit breaker trip reporting -BTThree Pole circuit breakers -3Pole
options
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DLE1210Leading Edge Dimmer Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DLE1210 Data Sheet Rev K April 2011
Supply:230V 40A 3 Phase N
L1 CH1
NL2
CH2
CH3
N
CH4
N
CH5
CH6
N
N
L3
E
N
CH7
N
CH8
CH9
N
CH10
N
CH11
CH12
N
N
N
RS485DyNet
AU
X
+VE
D + D -
GN
D
SHIE
LD
µP6
40
mm
20
4m
m
18
7m
m
345mm
265mm
62
0m
m
DLE120-SLeading Edge Dimmer Controller
The DLE120-S is a single channel energy management controller with a maximum load of 20A. It is suitable for the control of large loads including incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent light sources. The DLE120- S is designed for applications where lamp life is critical, such as where lamp maintenance is difficult or expensive. It complements Philips Dynalite’s multi-channel dimmers by providing an extra channel when additional load capacity is required.
Supply230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 20A
Outputs1 x dimmed output (leading edge phase control) at 20A,
ProtectionNo internal protection, supply from a 20A circuit breaker.
Regulating DeviceDual SCR’s 800V 65A nom. 800A surge
Power Conditioning• Regulated outputs• Over voltage protection• Surge protection• Brownout/Sag protection• Spike protection• Soft start• 16 bit fade resolution (65536 steps)
Cooling SystemNaturally ventilated, no forced cooling, no maintenance
Interference SuppressionIron powder toroidal choke
Rise Time200μS at 230V
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port8 x dry contact/0-5V/0-10V analogue1 x AUX programmable dry contact input
User ControlsService/Override SwitchDiagnostic LED
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 200mA (supply for approx. 10 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral2 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Output TerminalsLine, Neutral2 x 4mm2 max conductor sizeEarth Link bar provided
Cable EntriesMains - 1 x 75mm x 53mm removable gland plateData - 1 x 25mm dia. knockout
Dry Contact Terminal1 x 1mm2 max conductor size
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 40ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionAlloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish
DimensionsH 320mm x W 225mm x D 75mm(excludes wall brackets)
WeightPacked weight 3.5kg
technical data
IncandescentNeon
Leading edge electronic transformersIron core transformers
load compatibility
Second R5485 DyNet/ - A DMX512 partoptions
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DLE120-SLeading Edge Dimmer Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DLE120-S Data Sheet Rev G April 2011
CH1
N
Supply:230V 20A1 Phase
E
N
L
DyNetRS485
AU
X
+VE
D + D -
GN
D
SHIE
LD
µP
0V
5V
365m
m
225 mm
165 mm
345m
m
320m
m
80mm
75mm
DLE220-SLeading Edge Dimmer Controller
The DLE220-S is a 2 channel energy management controller with a maximum load of 20A per channel. It is suitable for control of large loads, including incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent light sources. The DLE220-S is designed for applications where lamp life is critical, such as where lamp maintenance is difficult or expensive. It complements Philips Dynalite’s multi-channel dimmers by providing extra channels when additional load capacity is required. It is DMX512 compatible, making it perfect for use in theatres and auditoriums.
Supply230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 40A
Outputs2 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 20A, total box load is 40A max
Protection2 x 20A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers on each channel
Regulating DeviceDual SCRs - 800V 65A nom. 800A surge
Power Conditioning• Regulated outputs• Over voltage protection• Surge protection• Brownout/Sag protection• Spike protection• Soft start• 16 bit fade resolution (65536 steps)
Cooling SystemNaturally ventilated, no forced cooling, no maintenance
Interference SuppressionIron powder toroidal choke
Rise Time200μS at 230V
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port1 x programmable AUX dry contact input
User ControlsService/Override SwitchDiagnostic LEDHardware Over-ride switch on each channel
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 200mA (supply for approx. 10 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral 1 x 16mm2 max conductor sizeEarth link bar
Output TerminalsLine, Neutral for each channel1 x 16mm2 max conductor sizeEarth Link bar provided
Cable EntriesMains - 3 x 25mm dia. knockouts Data - 1 x 25mm dia. knockouts
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 40ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionAluminium/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish
DimensionsH 285mm x W 210mm x D 150mm (excludes wall brackets)
WeightPacked weight 4.2kg
technical data
IncandescentNeon
Leading edge electronic transformersIron core transformers
load compatibility
Second RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -ACircuit breaker trip reporting -BT
Earth leakage and override protection on each channel -RCBO
options
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DLE220-SLeading Edge Dimmer Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DLE220-S Data Sheet Rev E April 2011
Supply:230V 40A1 Phase E
DyNetRS485
AU
X
+VE
D + D -
GN
D
CH1
N
CH2
N
µP
NL
Shie
ld
176 mm
mm
mm
1 mm
1
mm
1
mm17
mm
176
m
m
DLE1220GL-SLeading Edge Dimmer Controller
The DLE1220GL-S is a 12 channel energy management controller with a maximum load per channel of 20A. It is suitable for control of large loads, including incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent light sources. The DLE1220GL-S is the ideal choice in applications requiring reliability combined with large power handling capability. It is DMX512 compatible, making it perfect for use in theatres and auditoriums.
Supply400/230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-Phase at 63A per phase
Outputs12 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 20A, total box load is 180A max.
Protection12 x 20A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers on each channel
Regulating DeviceDual SCRs - 800V 65A nom. 800A surge
Power Conditioning• Regulated outputs• Over voltage protection• Surge protection• Brownout/Sag protection• Spike protection• Soft start• 16 bit fade resolution (65536 steps)
Cooling SystemNaturally ventilated, no forced cooling, no maintenance
Interference SuppressionIron powder toroidal choke
Rise Time200μS at 230V
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port1 x programmable AUX dry contact input
User ControlsService/Override SwitchDiagnostic LED3 x Phase indicator LEDsHardware Over-ride switch on each channel
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 200mA (supply for approx. 10 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Supply TerminalsLine1, Line2, Line31 x 35mm2 max conductor sizeEarth Link bar providedNeutral Link bar provided
Output TerminalsLine for each channel1 x 16mm2 max conductor sizeEarth Link bar providedNeutral Link bar provided
Cable EntriesMains - 5 x 25mm dia. knockouts on a 105mm x 145mm removable gland plateData - 1 x 25mm dia. knockout
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline statusChannel override switches
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 40ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionAlloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish
DimensionsH 600mm x W 345mm x D 187mm (excludes wall brackets)
WeightPacked weight 35kg
technical data
IncandescentNeon
Leading edge electronic transformersIron core transformers
load compatibility
Second RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -ACircuit breaker trip reporting -BTThree Pole circuit breakers -3Pole
Earth leakage and overload protection on each channel -RCBOoptions
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DLE1220GL-SLeading Edge Dimmer Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DLE1220GL-S Data Sheet Rev J April 2011
640m
m20
4mm
187m
m
345mm
265mm
620m
m
Supply:230V 63A 3 Phase N
L1 CH1
NL2
CH2
CH3
N
CH4
N
CH5
CH6
N
N
L3
E
N
CH7
N
CH8
CH9
N
CH10
N
CH11
CH12
N
N
N
RS485DyNet
AU
X
+VE
D + D -
GN
D
SHIE
LD
µP
Trailing Edge Dimmer Controllers
Compatible with main voltage incandescent fittings and low voltage electronic transformers, the Philips Dynalite range of trailing edge dimmer units bring together the very best in lighting control technology. All units support a three phase supply making them ideal for track-lighting dimming applications. Utilising trailing edge dimming techniques can achieve the quietest style of dimming for projects where noise is critical. This makes trailing edge dimmers the perfect choice for art galleries, museums, music hall and lecture rooms. Built-in power conditioning to protect lamps from over voltage, surge protection, brownout/sag protection increases lamp life, reducing ongoing project maintenance costs.
DTE310Trailing Edge Dimmer Controller
The DTE310 is a 3 channel energy management controller with a maximum load per channel of 10A. It has a trailing edge output, making it suitable for use with most types of dimmable electronic transformers. The DTE310 can operate from a three phase or single phase supply, and is especially suited for controlling track mounted fixtures on three circuit track. Using a three phase supply when the DTE310 is connected to three circuit track allows the track to be loaded to it’s maximum rating. Philips Dynalite’s superior voltage regulation and soft start technologies protect lamps, dramatically extending their life. Multi-purpose programmable dry contact and analogue inputs are provided for interfacing to other systems such as AV controllers. The device also incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and macro functions.
Supply 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 30A or 230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-Phase at 10A
Outputs3 x dimmed outputs (trailing edge phase control) at 10A each
Protection3 x 10A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakersInternal inductive load detectionOver voltage / current detection
Regulating DevicesDual MOSFET’s - 47A, 650V, 141A surge
Power Conditioning• Regulated outputs• Over voltage protection• Surge protection• Brownout/Sag protection• Spike protection• Soft start• 16 bit Fader resolution (65536 steps)
Cooling SystemNaturally ventilated, no forced cooling, no maintenance
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port1 x AUX programmable dry contact input8 x multi-purpose programmable dry contact/0-5V/0-10V DC analogue inputs
User ControlsService Over-ride switch - All channels to 100%Diagnostic LEDHardware bypass switch for each channel
Internal ControlsProgrammable Logic Controller DyNet DC Supply12V @ 200mA (supply for approx. 10 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status
Supply TerminalsL1, L2, L3, N.1 x 16mm2 max conductor size
Output TerminalsL, N, for each channel1 x 16mm2 max conductor size
Earth link bar provided
Dry Contact Terminal1 x 1mm2 max conductor size
Operating Environment0º to 40ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Construction Alloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish Dimensions H 450mm x W 225mm x D 75mm (excludes wall brackets)
WeightPacked weight 6kg
technical data
Trailing edge electronic transformersIncandescent lamps
Leading edge electronic transformersTrack lighting
load compatibility
Earth leakage and overload protection on each channel - RCBO
Second RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -AThree Pole isolators -3Pole
options
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DTE310Trailing Edge Dimmer Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DTE310 Data Sheet Rev H April 2011
165 mm225 mm
500 m
m
480 m
m
450 m
m
80 m
m
75 m
m
Supply:230V 30A3 Phase
L1
NE
CH1
N
CH2
CH3
N
N
L2L3
DyNetRS485
AU
X+V
E
D +
D -
GN
DS
HIEL
D
DTE1210Trailing Edge Dimmer Controller
The DTE1210 is a 12 channel energy management controller with a maximum load per channel of 10A. It has a trailingedge output, making it suitable for use with most types of dimmable electronic transformers. The DTE1210 can operatefrom a three phase or single phase supply, and is especially suited for controlling track mounted fixtures on three circuittrack. Using a three phase supply when the DTE1210 is connected to three circuit track allows the track to be loaded to it’s maximum rating. Philips Dynalite’s superior voltage regulation and soft start technologies protect lamps, dramatically extending their life. The power circuit for each channel is contained within plug in modules for ease of maintenance. The device incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process complex conditional and sequential logic and macro functions. It is DMX512 compatible, making it perfect for use in theatres and auditoriums.
Supply 400/230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-Phase at 40A per phase
Outputs 12 x dimmed outputs (trailing edge phase control) at 10A, total box load is 120A max.
Protection12 x 10A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers on each channelInternal inductive load detectionOver voltage / current detection
Regulating DeviceDual MOSFET’s - 47A, 650V, 141A surge
Power Conditioning • Regulated outputs• Over voltage protection• Surge protection • Brownout/Sag protection• Spike protection• Soft start• 16 bit fade resolution (65536 steps) Cooling SystemNaturally ventilated, no forced cooling, no maintenance
Control IO 1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port1 x programmable AUX dry contact input
User ControlsService Over-ride switch - All channels to 100% Diagnostic LED 3 x Phase indicator LEDs
Hardware bypass switch for each channel
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 200mA (supply for approx. 10 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Supply TerminalsLine1, Line2, Line3, Neutral1 x 16mm2 max conductor size Earth Link bar provided
Output TerminalsLine, Neutral for each channel1 x 16mm2 max conductor sizeEarth Link bar provided
Cable EntriesMains - 4 x 25mm2 knockouts on a 133mm x 44mm removable gland plateData - 1 x 25mm2 dia. knockout
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 40ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionAlloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish
DimensionsH 610mm x W 290mm x D 190mm (excludes wall brackets)
Weight Packed weight 16.7kg
technical data
Trailing edge electronic transformersIncandescent lamps
Leading edge electronic transformersTrack lighting
load compatibility
Three pole isolators -3POLESecond RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -A
Earth leakage and overload protection on each channel - RCBO
options
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DTE1210Trailing Edge Dimmer Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DTE1210 Data Sheet Rev F April 2011
Supply:230V 40A 3 Phase N
L1 CH1
NL2
CH2
CH3
N
CH4
N
CH5
CH6
N
N
L3
E
N
CH7
N
CH8
CH9
N
CH10
N
CH11
CH12
N
N
N
AUX+V
E
D +
D -
GN
DS
HIEL
D
µP
DyNetRS485
Signal Dimmer Controllers
The Philips Dynalite range of Signal Dimmer Controllers, have been engineered to meet the future demands of projects. They are capable of transmitting all industry standard ballast signals (1-10V, DSI, DALI and Broadcast DALI) and support installation opportunities of both DIN rail and wall box, to allow for flexible install opportunities. The Signal Dimmer Controller range also support a vast range of ballast controllers with a variety of circuit numbers and sizes to work individually or as part of a system, suiting any project requirement.
DDBC516FR Dimmer Controller
The DDBC516FR is designed to provide cost effective control of DALI high frequency fluorescent ballasts. Each of the five control outputs support DALI broadcast, DALI Addressed, 1-10V and DSI protocols. The control signals can be programmed to operate in tandem with the five internal switched outputs, which will automatically isolate the power circuit when all associated channels are at 0%. This feature is useful for energy savings applications, as DALI ballasts draw a significant amount of power when the lamps are turned off via a DALI command. The device is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard next to the circuit breakers supplying power to the controlled lighting circuits. The DDBC516FR contains an integral DALI bus power supply, removing the need for an additional external device.
Control Circuit Supply100-240V 50/60Hz Single Phase at 0.5A
Control Outputs5 x Control Outputs, each selectable to;- DALI broadcast: max 10 DALI loads/ch- DALI addressed: max 10 DALI loads/ch- 1-10V: max 10mA Sink or Source/ch- DSI: max 5 DSI loads/ch
Mains Outputs5 x 16 Amp feed thru switched circuits for ballast mains supply
Control Inputs1 x RS485 DyNet serial port1 x AUX programmable dry contact input
Bus Power SupplyInternal DALI bus power supply
User ControlsOver-ride switch for each switched channelOn/Off status indicator for each switched outputService SwitchDiagnostic LED
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 200mA (supply for approx. 5 panel)
Preset Scenes170
Diagnostic FunctionsLamp failure reportingBallast failure reportingBallast run time tracking for each ballast and the switched outputDevice Online/Offline status
Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral, Earth1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Output Terminals5 x Ballast power circuit - Line In, Line out1 x 4mm2 max conductor size5 x Ballast control circuit - Dx, Dx1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Operating Environment0˚ to 40˚C ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non-condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
EnclosurePolycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (12 units wide)
DimensionsH 93mm x W 211mm x D 75mm
WeightPacked weight 0.8kg
technical data
DALI, DSI and 1-10V HF ballastsDALI, DSI and 1-10V transformers
DALI, DSI and 1-10V LED driversDALI, DSI and 1-10V Relay Modules
load compatibility
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDBC516FRDimmer Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DDBC516FR Data Sheet Rev B April 2011
E
N
L CH1 Out
CH1 In
CH2 Out
CH2 In
CH3 Out
CH3 In
CH4 Out
CH4 In
1-10V/DSI/DALI
Ballast DA 1
Ballast DA 1
1-10V/DSI/DALI
Ballast DA 2
Ballast DA 2
1-10V/DSI/DALI
Ballast DA 3
Ballast DA 3
1-10V/DSI/DALI
Ballast DA 4
Ballast DA 4
1-10V/DSI/DALI
Ballast DA 5
Ballast DA 5
Supply:100-240V50/60Hz1 Phase
Shield
Gnd
D-
D+
+12V
AUX
RS485DyNet
CH5 Out
CH5 In
DBC905Dimmer Controller
The Philips Dynalite DBC905 high frequency fluorescent dimmer controller is designed for direct installation within ceiling cavities. Each control output support DALI broadcast, DALI Addressed, 1-10V and DSI protocols. For ease of installation and maintenance the device incorporates structured wiring connectors, which enables the unit to be readily connected without the use of tools. The DBC905 can be readily integrated with a Building Management System (BMS) via the DyNet control network, making it ideally suited to commercial office installations where a cost effective control solution is required. The device design provides easy connection without the use of tools and is available for three popular wiring brands; CMS Electracom (Modular Wiring) - DBC905C, Wieland - DBC905W and Wago - DBC905MA.
technical data
load compatibility DALI, DSI and 1-10V HF ballastsDALI, DSI and 1-10V transformersDALI, DSI and 1-10V LED driversSwitched loads
DBC905W
Supply230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 16A
Outputs1 x Maintained NC switched output at 5A resistive (not in WA)9 x Switched outputs, each rated at 5A resistive, 2A electronic ballast, 100A surge (max load per block of 3 channels is 5A)
Protection3 x 6.3A replaceable HRC fusesFuse 1 feeds Channels 1, 2, 3 (max load allowed for sum of Channels 1, 2, 3 is 5A)Fuse 2 feeds Channels 4, 5, 6 (max load allowed for sum of Channels 4, 5, 6 is 5A)Fuse 3 feeds Channels 7, 8, 9, Maintained switched output (max load allowed for sum of Channels 7, 8, 9, MO is 5A)
Control Outputs9 x Control Outputs, each selectable to; - DALI broadcast: max 5 DALI loads per ch.- DALI addressed: max 5 DALI loads per ch.- 1-10V: max 10mA Sink or Source per ch.- DSI: max 5 DSI loads per ch.
Control IOLocal DyNet RS485:- 1 x RS485 DyNet Serial Port / DMX- 1 x AUX programmable dry contact input- 4 x RJ12 DyNet connections for multi- function sensors (motion, PE illuminance, and IR receive), user panels and other interface devices. Recommended total devices per RJ12 socket - 5, up to max. of 10. Max. total devices for all sockets - 20Floor DyNet RS485:- 1 x RS485 DyNet Serial Port (functionally isolated from mains)
Control Inputs4 x voltage free single pole double throw (SPDT) switch inputs, momentary or latch User ControlsService Over-ride Switch - all channels to 100%Diagnostic LED
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 400mA
Preset Scenes170
Diagnostic Functions*Lamp FailureBallast failureCircuit run time tracking/lamp life Automated battery tests Device Online/Offline status* DLight, DTK600 Touchscreen or BAS interface is required for analysing diagnostic data. The availability of some diagnostics is dependent on the ballast type.
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Enclosure Moulded ABS
DimensionsH 189mm x W 416mm x D 35mm
WeightPacked weight 2.0kg
Example DALI Ballast Limit CalculationsDALI ballasts with 15A startup inrush: 5 per channel. In this example the number of ballasts is limited by the control output limit of 5 DALI loads.
DALI ballasts with 40A startup inrush: 2 per channel. In this example the number of ballasts is limited by the switched circuit rating of 100A surge.
options Increased capacity - 165A surge switched outputs, 10 DALI loads per channel -HD
DBC905Dimmer Controller
output connector pole assignments
connector order codes
Switch Input & Floor Network Terminals5 x 3 pole removable terminal sockets Compatible screw terminal connectors:Wieland: Standard version: Type: Wiecon 8113 Wieland Order No.: 25.320.3353.0 (box of 100)Strain relieved version: Type: Wiecon 8113 Wieland Order No: 25.320.8353.0 (Box of 100)Phoenix:Standard version: Type: Combicon MSTB 2.5/3-ST Order No.: 1754465Strain relieved version: Type: Combicon MSTB 2,5/3-STZ-5,08 Pheonix Order No:1776168 (box of 50) PTR:Standard version: PTR Order No:AK950/3-5.0-GREEN Strain relieved version: PTR Order No: AK950/3L-5.0-GREEN
3 pole removable terminal socket6 pole removable terminal socket
StandardStandard Strain RelievedStrain Relieved
Local DyNet Terminals4 x RJ12 and 6 pole removable terminal socketCompatible screw terminal connectorsWieland:Standard version: Type: Wiecon 8113 Wieland Order No: 25.320.3653.0 (box of 50)Strain relieved version: Type: Wiecon 8113 Wieland Order No: 25.320.8653.0 (box of 50)Phoenix Contact:Standard version: Type: Combicon MSTB 2,5/6-ST Pheonix Order No: 1754520 (box of 50)PTR:Standard version: PTR Order No: AK950/6-5-0-GREENStrain relieved version: PTR Order No: AK950/6L-5.0-GREEN
Supply and Output ConnectorsPlease refer to Wieland, CMS or Wago Electracom for details on applicable connector and cable assemblies.
L E N M 0 + DA DB
DBC905W Output Connector Pole Assignments
L E N M 0 + DA DB
DBC905C Output Connector Pole Assignments
DBC905Dimmer Controller
electrical diagram
µP
Supply:23
16 Amp
0V 1 Phase E
NL
AUX
+VE
D +
D -
GND
SHIELD
LocalDyNetRS485
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
Control Output
Connectors
Sensor 1
Sensor 2
Sensor 3
Sensor 4
Switch 1
Switch 2
Switch 3
Switch 4
1-10V/DSI/DALI
1-10V/DSI/DALI
1-10V/DSI/DALI
1-10V/DSI/DALI
1-10V/DSI/DALI
1-10V/DSI/DALI
1-10V/DSI/DALI
1-10V/DSI/DALI
1-10V/DSI/DALI
ReplaceableFuses
T 6.3A H
D +
D -
GNDFloorDyNetRS485
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DBC905Dimmer Controller
mounting dimensions
For further information contact:
DBC905 Data Sheet Rev K April 2011
DDBC120FR-DALI Dimmer Controller
The DDBC120FR-DALIis designed for cost-effective control of DALI high frequency fluorescent ballasts, providing a full universe of 64 DALI channels. Direct DALI to DyNet mapping means that the DALI-imposed limits, such as the maximum of 16 groups, are seamlessly overcome. The device is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard next to the circuit breaker that is supplying power to the controlled lighting circuit. The DDBC120FR-DALIcontains an integral DALI bus power supply, removing the need for the provision of a separate external supply.
technical data
DALI high frequency fluorescent ballastsDALI electronic low-voltage transformersDALI LED fixtures
Philips Dynalite DALI UI devicesload compatibility
Supply100 -240V 50/60Hz Single Phase at 20A
Control Outputs1 x DALI control output, supporting one full DALI universe of 64 channels, including backward channel
Mains Outputs1 x 20A feed thru switched circuits for DALI ballast mains supply.
DALI Bus Power SupplyInbuilt 15V max 250mA (64 Ballast & 10 user interfaces)
DALI Insulation SystemBasic
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet serial port / DMX1 x AUX programmable dry contact input
User ControlsService Over-ride Switch Diagnostic LED
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Diagnostic FunctionsLamp failure reportingBallast failure reportingBallast run time tracking for each ballastDevice Online/Offline status
Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral, Earth1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Output Terminals1 x DALI Ballast circuit: DA-, DA+1 x 4mm2 max conductor size1 x Ballast power circuit = Line in, Line out, Loop1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Operating Environment0˚ to 40˚C ambient temperature0% to 90% RH non-condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
EnclosurePolycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (6 unit)
DimensionsH 94.5mm x W 105mm x D 75mm
WeightPacked weight 0.35kg
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDBC120FR-DALIDimmer Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DDBC120FR-DALIData Sheet Rev K April 2011
94.5
6946
38
51
75
59
105
DDBC300-DALI Dimmer Controller
The DDBC300-DALI is designed for cost-effective control of DALI high frequency fluorescent ballasts, providing 3 full DALI universes comprising 192 DALI channels. Direct DALI to DyNet mapping means that the DALI-imposed limits, such as the maximum of 16 groups, are seamlessly overcome. The device is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard next to the circuit breaker that is supplying power to the controlled lighting circuit. The DDBC300-DALI contains an integral DALI bus power supply, removing the need for an additional external device.
Supply100-240V 50/60Hz Single Phase at 0.5A
Control Outputs3 x DALI Control Outputs, each supporting a full DALI universe of 64 channels (192 total), including backward channel
DALI Bus Power SupplyInternal 15V rated 128mA per universe
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet serial port / DMX1 x AUX programmable dry contact input
User ControlsService Over-ride SwitchDiagnostic LED
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 200mA (supply for approx. 10 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Diagnostic FunctionsLamp failure reportingBallast failure reportingBallast run time tracking for each ballastDevice Online/Offline status
Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral, Earth1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Output Terminals3 x DALI Ballast circuits: DA-, DA+1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Operating Environment0˚ to 40˚C ambient temperature0% to 90% RH non-condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
EnclosurePolycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (12 unit)
DimensionsH 93mm x W 211mm x D 75mm
WeightPacked weight 0.49kg
technical data
DALI high frequency fluorescent ballastsDALI electronic low-voltage transformersDALI LED fixtures
load compatibility
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDBC300-DALIDimmer Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DDBC300-DALI Data Sheet Rev F April 2011
Supply:100-240V 0.5A
1 Phase
E
DyNetRS485
AU
X+V
E
D+
D-
GN
DS
HIE
LD
N
LµP
DALIDALI 1DALI 1
DALI 2DALI 2
DALI 3DALI 3
DALI
DALI
DDBC320-DALI Dimmer Controller
The DDBC320-DALI is designed to provide cost effective control of DALI high frequency fluorescent ballasts. It has three DALI outputs, allowing it to control up to 192 DALI devices. The DALI control signals can be programmed to operate in tandem with the three internal switched outputs, which will automatically isolate the power circuit when all associated DALI channels are at 0%. This feature is useful for energy savings applications, as DALI ballasts draw a significant amount of power when the lamps are turned off via a DALI command. Direct DALI to DyNet mapping means that the DALI imposed limits, such as the maximum of 16 groups, are seamlessly overcome. The device is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard next to the circuit breakers supplying power to the controlled lighting circuits. The DDBC320-DALI contains an integral DALI bus power supply, removing the need for an additional external device.
Supply100-240V 50/60Hz Single Phase at 0.5A
Control Outputs3 x DALI Control Outputs, each supporting a full DALI universe of 64 channels (192 total), including backward channel
DALI Bus Power SupplyInternal 15V rated 128mA per universe
Mains Outputs3 x 20 Amp feed thru switched circuits for DALI ballast mains supply
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet serial port / DMX1 x AUX programmable dry contact input
User ControlsService Over-ride SwitchDiagnostic LED
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 200mA (supply for approx. 10 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Diagnostic FunctionsLamp failure reportingBallast failure reportingBallast run time tracking for each ballast and the switched outputDevice Online/Offline status
Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral, Earth1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Output Terminals3 x Ballast power circuit - Line In, Line out, Loop, Loop, Loop1 x 4mm2 max conductor size3 x DALI Ballast circuits - DA-, DA+1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Operating Environment0˚ to 40˚C ambient temperature0% to 90% RH non-condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
EnclosurePolycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (12 unit)
DimensionsH 93mm x W 211mm x D 75mm
WeightPacked weight 0.8kg
technical data
DALI high frequency fluorescent ballastsDALI electronic low-voltage transformersDALI LED fixtures
load compatibility
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDBC320-DALIDimmer Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DDBC320-DALI Data Sheet Rev K April 2011
Supply:100-240V 0.5A1 Phase
E
DyNetRS485
AU
X+V
E
D+
D -
GN
DS
HIE
LD
N Out
NL
CH1 Out
DALIDALI 1DALI 1
CH1 In
N In
N Out
CH2 Out
DALIDALI 2DALI 2
CH2 In
N In
N Out
CH3 Out
DALIDALI 3DALI 3
CH3 In
N In
DMBC110Signal Dimmer & Relay Controller
The DMBC110 is designed to allow intelligent, networked control of individual lighting fixtures. The compact designenables the unit to be mounted directly within the gear enclosure of many fixtures. Each dimmer controller incorporates arelay output which can be used to control mains supply to the fixture and a HF ballast control output which can providedimming control of DALI, 1-10V and DSI compatible ballasts and transformers. The relay is very robust and fully ratedfor difficult lighting loads.
Supply230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at10A
Switched Output1 x relay output at 10A (inductive)
Control Output1 x output selectable to:DALI Broadcast, 1-10V, DSI
Control Output CapacityDALI Ballasts and transformers: 50-10V: 10mA source or 20mA sinkDSI Ballasts and transformers: 15
Switching DeviceRelay, Tungsten pilot contact,16A resistive, 165A surge
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port
Preset Scenes170
Diagnostic Functions Device Online/Offline status
DyNet Supply12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels)
Supply TerminalsLine In, Neutral1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Output TerminalsMains:Line Out, Neutral1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Control:B1, B21 x 1.5mm2 max conductor size
Operating Environment0˚ to 50˚C ambient temperature0% to 90% RH non-condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
EnclosureABS plastic
DimensionsL 185mm x W 4mm x D 38mm
WeightPacked weight 0.19Kg
technical data
DALI, DSI and 1-10V HF BallastsDALI, DSI and 1-10V transformers
All types of Switched loadsload compatibility
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DMBC110Signal Dimmer & Relay Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DMBC110 Data Sheet Rev F April 2011
Supply:230V
1 Phase10A
LN
DyNetRS485
+VE
D + D -
GN
D
Shie
ld
µP
CH1
B1B21-10V / DSI /
DALI
DBC410Dimmer Controller
The DBC410 is designed for use with electronic dimmable fluorescent ballasts, either 1-10V or DSI. It has 4 heavy duty 10A relay outputs to switch fluorescent lighting or other loads in a DyNet energy management system. Four control outputs, selectable to 1-10V DC and DSI, are provided for control of HF ballasts. These control outputs can operate in tandem with or separately from the switched outputs.
Supply230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 40A
Mains Outputs4 x switched outputs at 10A
Control Outputs4 x 1-10V DC or DSI outputsDSI Mode: 100 DSI ballasts per channel1-10V mode: 50mA sink, 50mA source per channel
Overload Protection4 x 10A 6kA single pole thermal magneticcircuit breakers
Switching DeviceRelay 16A nom. (resistive) 165A surge
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet serial port1 x programmable dry contact AUX input
User ControlsService Over-ride switch - All channels to 100%Diagnostic LED
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 90mA (supply for approx. 4 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status
Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral1 x 10mm2 max conductor sizeEarth Link bar provided
Output TerminalsLine, Neutral for each channel2 x 4mm2 max conductor sizeEarth Link bar provided
V/DSI, +V/DSI for each channel1 x 2mm2 max conductor size
Cable EntriesMains - 1 x 75mm x 53mm removable gland plateData - 1 x 25mm dia. knockout
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
ConstructionAlloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish
DimensionsH 320mm x W 225mm x D 75mm (excludes wall brackets)
WeightPacked weight 4.0kg
technical data
Switched loadsDSI high frequency fluorescent ballasts
DSI low voltage transformers1-10V high frequency fluorescent ballasts
load compatibility
Extra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -AEarth leakage and overload protection on each channel -RCBO
Circuit breaker trip reporting -BToptions
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DBC410Dimmer Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
Supply:230V 40A1 Phase E
DyNetRS485
AUX
+VE
D +
D -
GN
DSH
IELD
NNL
CH2
CH1
NCH3
CH4N
N
0CH6
CH5
0CH7
CH80
0
1-10V / DSI
µP
1-10V / DSI
1-10V / DSI
1-10V / DSI
320m
m
345m
m
365m
m
80m
m
75m
m
225mm
165mm
DBC410 Data Sheet Rev R April 2011
DBC1205Dimmer Controller
The DBC1205 is designed for use with electronic dimmable fluorescent ballasts, either 1-10V or DSI. It has 12 x 5A relay outputs to switch fluorescent lighting or other loads in a DyNet energy management system. Twelve control outputs, selectable to 1-10V DC and DSI, are provided for control of HF ballasts.
Supply400/230V ±14% 50/60Hz 3-Phase Y at20A per phaseor230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 60A
Outputs12 x switched outputs at 5A12 x HF ballast control outputs, selectable to 1-10V DC and DSI
Protection3 x 20A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers
Switching deviceRelay 10A nom. (resistive)
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet serial port1 x programmable dry contact AUX input
User ControlsService Over-ride switch - All channels to 100%Diagnostic LED
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 90mA (supply for approx. 4 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status
Supply TerminalsL1, L2, L3, N1 x 10mm2 max conductor size
Output TerminalsLine, Neutral for each channel2 x 4mm2 max conductor sizeEarth Link bar provided
IV/DSI, +V/DSI for each channel1 x 2mm2 max conductor size
Cable EntriesMains - 1 x 75mm x 53mm removable gland plateData - 1 x 25mm dia. knockout
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
ConstructionAlloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxyfinish
DimensionsH 450mm x W 225mm x D 75mm(excludes wall brackets)
WeightPacked weight 5.2kg
technical data
Switched loadsDSI high frequency fluorescent ballasts
DSI low voltage transformers1-10V high frequency fluorescent ballasts
load compatibility
Extra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -AThree pole circuit breakers -3POLE
Circuit breaker trip reporting -BToptions
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DBC1205Dimmer Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
165 mm
225 mm
500
mm
480
mm
450
mm
80 m
m
75 m
m
DBC1205 Data Sheet Rev April 2011
S upply:
230V 20A3 P has e
or
230V 60A1 P has e
EN
L 3L 2L 1
NC H2
C H1
NC H3
C H4N
N
NC H6
C H5
NC H7
C H8N
N
NC H10
C H9
NC H11
C H12N
N
0C H2
C H1
0C H3
C H40
0
1-10V / DSI
0C H6
C H5
0C H7
C H80
0
DyNetR S 485
A UX
+VE
D +
D -
G ND
S HIE L D
µP
0C H10
C H9
0C H11
C H120
0
1-10V / DSI
1-10V / DSI
1-10V / DSI
1-10V / DSI
1-10V / DSI
1-10V / DSI
1-10V / DSI
1-10V / DSI
1-10V / DSI
1-10V / DSI
1-10V / DSI
DDBC1200Dimmer Controller
The DDBC1200 is designed to provide cost effective control of high frequency fluorescent ballasts and dimmable transformers. Each DDBC1200 has 12 independent output channels, each selectable to DALI Broadcast, 0-10V or DSI. When in 0-10V output mode, the device is suitable for interfacing to equipment with an analogue input port such as air dampers. The device can also be linked to a separate relay module for control of 1-10V HF fluorescent ballasts. LED indicators reflect the status of each channel. The device is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed on a switchboard next to the circuit breaker that is supplying power to the controlled lighting circuit.
Supply230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 0.5A
Outputs12 x control outputs, selectable to DALI 0-10V or DSI
Output CapacityDALI Broadcast Mode:80 DALI ballasts per channel, 500 total 0-10V mode:50mA sink, source per channel DSI Mode:100 DSI ballasts per channel, 1200 total
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet serial port / DMX1 x AUX programmable dry contact input
User ControlsService Over-ride switch - All channels to 100%Diagnostic LED
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 180mA (supply for approx. 9 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status
Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral, Earth1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Output TerminalsC, CH, for each channel 1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Operating Environment0° to 50°C ambient temperature 0% to 95% RH non condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
EnclosurePolycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (12 unit)
DimensionsH 93mm x W 211mm x D 75mm
WeightPacked weight 0.6kg
technical data
DSI high frequency fluorescent ballastsDSI electronic low voltage transformers DALI high frequency fluorescent ballasts broadcast mode onlyDALI electronic low voltage transformers broadcast mode only
1-10V high frequency fluorescent ballasts Devices that require 0-10V analogue control signs
load compatibility
Manual Override -MOControl panel on front cover
options
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDBC1200Dimmer Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DBC410 Data Sheet Rev N April 2011
S upply:230V 0.5A1 Phas e E
NL
0C H2
C H1
0C H3
C H40
0
0C H6
C H5
0C H7
C H80
0
0C H10
C H9
0C H11
C H120
0
AUX
+VE
D +
D -
GND
S HIE L D
µP
DALI 1-10V DSI
DALI 1-10V DSI
DALI 1-10V DSI
DALI 1-10V DSI
DALI 1-10V DSI
DALI 1-10V DSI
DALI 1-10V DSI
DALI 1-10V DSI
DALI 1-10V DSI
DALI 1-10V DSI
DALI 1-10V DSI
DALI 1-10V DSI
DyNetRS485
DBC1210 &DBC1220GL
Dimmer Controllers
The DBC1210 & DBC1220GL are designed for use with DALI, 1-10V and DSI electronic dimmable fluorescent ballasts and transformers. They have 12 x 10A and 12 x 20A relay outputs respectively, to switch fluorescent lighting or other loads in a DyNet energy management system. Twelve control outputs, selectable to DALI Broadcast, 1-10V and DSI are provided for control of HF ballasts.
SupplyDBC1210 - 400/230V ±14% 50/60Hz3-Phase at 40A per phaseDBC1220GL - 400/230V ±14% 50/60Hz3-Phase at 63A per phase
Switched OutputsDBC1210 - 12 x switched outputs at 10A (total device load is 120A)DBC1220GL - 12 x switched outputs at20A (total device load is 180A)
Control Outputs- DALI Broadcast mode: 64 ballast per channel, up to a maximum of 400- 1-10V mode: 50mA sink/source per channel- DSI mode: 100 ballast per channel, up to a maximum of 1200
Overload ProtectionDBC1210 - 12 x 10A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakersDBC1220GL - 12 x 20A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers
Switching DeviceDBC1210 & DBC1220GL - Relay - 50A230V AC inductive (5000W lighting load rated)
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet serial port / DMX1 x programmable dry contact AUX input
User ControlsService Over-ride switch - All channels to 100%Diagnostic LED
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status
Supply TerminalsDBC1210 - L1, L2, L31 x 16mm2 max conductor sizeDBC1220GL - L1, L2, L31 x 35mm2 max conductor sizeNeutral Link bar providedEarth Link bar provided
Output TerminalsLine for each channel1 x 10mm2 max conductor sizeNeutral Link bar providedEarth Link bar providedV/DSI/DALI, +V/DSI/DALI for each channel1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Cable EntriesMains - 4 x 25mm dia. knockouts mounted on a 88mm x 88mm removable gland plateData - 1 x 25mm dia. knockoutOutput - 6 x 25mm dia knockouts on side of chassis
Operating Environment0º to 40ºC ambient temperature0% to 90% RH non condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
ConstructionAlloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxy finish
DimensionsH 457mm x W 252mm x D 126mm(-RCBO version H 585mm)
WeightPacked weight 10.25kg
technical data
DALI fluorescent ballasts broadcast mode onlyDALI low voltage transformers1-10V fluorescent ballasts
DSI fluorescent ballastsDSI low voltage transformersSwitched loads
load compatibility
Extra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -AEarth leakage and overload protection on each channel - RCBO (Note: larger enclosure)
Three pole circuit breakers -3POLECircuit breaker trip reporting -BToptions
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DBC1210 & DBC1220GL
Dimmer Controllers
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DBC1210 & DBC1220GL Data Sheet Rev R April 2011
1-10V / DSI
Supply:230V
3 Phase
ENL3L2L1
CH2
CH1
CH3
CH4
CH6
CH5
CH7
CH8
CH10
CH9
CH11
CH12
COMM2
1
COMM3
4COMM
COMM
1-10V / DSI / DALI
COMM6
5
COMM7
8COMM
COMM
COMM10
9
COMM11
12COMM
COMM
N NNNNNNNNNNN
AUX+VE
D +D -
GNDSHIELD
µP
1-10V / DSI / DALI
1-10V / DSI / DALI
1-10V / DSI / DALI
1-10V / DSI / DALI
1-10V / DSI / DALI
1-10V / DSI / DALI
1-10V / DSI / DALI
1-10V / DSI / DALI
1-10V / DSI / DALI
1-10V / DSI / DALI
1-10V / DSI / DALI
DyNetRS485
LED PWM Controllers
Capable of directly driving LED fittings, the Philips Dynalite LED dimmers use Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) technology to great effect. Perfectly suited to Red, Green, Blue (RGB) colour changing applications, chase sequencing or provision of elegant scene settings. The Philips Dynalite LED drivers come in a range of configurations to meet the compatibility requirements of many of the available LED fittings.
Each device is ready to receive native DMX allowing them to be used in colour mixing or chase sequence applications.
DDLEDC60035 PWM Controller
The DDLEDC60035 is designed to control LED loads in decorative architectural lighting applications where creative colour mixing and sequencing is required. The controller provides six pulse width modulated common anode current mode outputs suitable for directly driving 350mA nominal current rated high intensity LED sources. Incorporating internal current regulation the controller is designed to directly operate series connected LED arrays without the need for any additional circuit devices. The device is supplied with a DIN rail mountable housing, designed for installation within a switchboard or suitable electrical enclosure. The DDLEDC60035 is DMX512 compatible and is suitable for the high chase speeds found in display lighting.
SupplyRegulated 18-32VDC 2.5A
LED Outputs6 x 350mA current mode, common anodeMinimum internal voltage drop 0.5VOutputs are short circuit protectedIntegral self resetting thermal overloadprotection
Maximum Power Dissipation6 Watts combined total for consecutivepairs of channels (Ch 1&2, Ch 3&4, Ch5&6). 4 Watts per individual channel.18 Watts Box TotalPd = (Vs - (Vdf x n)) x 0.35Pd = Power dissipation per channelVs = Supply voltageVdf = Diode forward voltagen = Number of diodes in series per channel
Maximum Supply VoltageVs max = 8.5 + (n x Vled) or 32VDC,whichever is the lesserVs max = Maximum supply voltagen = Number of diodes in series per channelVled = LED forward voltage
Minimum Supply VoltageVs min = 4 + (n x Vled) or 18VDC,whichever is the greaterVs min = Minimum supply voltagen = Number of diodes in series per channelVled = LED forward voltage
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port
User ControlsService switchDiagnostic LED
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Supply TerminalsPositive, Negative, Earth1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size
Output TerminalsCH, COM for each channel1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 40ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionABS DIN Rail enclosure (12 unit)
DimensionsH 86mm x W 209mm x D 66mm
WeightPacked weight 1.0kg
technical data
350mA Current Mode Common Anode LED fixtures
load compatibility
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDLEDC60035 PWM Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DDLEDC60035 Data Sheet Rev I April 2011
CH4
COM
DyNet/DMX512RS485
AU
X
+VE
D + D -
GN
D
Shie
ld
Supply:18-32VDC
2.5A
+-E
µP
CH3
COM
CH2
COM
CH1
COM
CH5
COM
CH6
COM
top view
side view
end view
to suit 35mm DIN rail
209mm
66m
m
100mm
86m
m
47mm
60mm36
mm
48m
m
DDLEDC401 PWM Controller
The DDLEDC401 is designed to control four channel (RGBW) LED loads in decorative architectural lighting applications where creative colour mixing and sequencing is required. The controller provides four pulse width modulated voltage mode outputs suitable for driving high intensity LED sources. Controller nominal output voltage is 24VDC and can optionally be ordered as 12V output. The device is available in two output configurations to accommodate common anode (DDLEDC401-CA) or common cathode (DDLEDC401-CK) loads. The device is supplied with a DIN rail mountable housing, designed for installation installed within a switchboard or suitable electrical enlosure. The DDLEDC401 is DMX512 compatible and is suitable for the high chase speeds found in display lighting.
Supply230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 130 watts
LED Outputs4 x 1A (nominal) voltage modeMaximum per channel load 1AMaximum total box load 4AOutputs are short circuit protected12V output optionally available (-12V)
DDLEDC401-CAOutput - 24V common anode
DDLEDC401-CKOutput - 24V common cathode
Maximum Total Box Load100 Watts at 24V output50 Watts at 12V output (-12V version)
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port
User ControlsService switchDiagnostic LED
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels)
Preset Scenes96
Supply TerminalsPhase, Neutral, Earth1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Output TerminalsCH, COM for each channel1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 40ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionABS DIN Rail enclosure (12 unit)
DimensionsH 86mm x W 209mm x D 66mm
WeightPacked weight 1.0kg
technical data
Voltage mode LED fixturesload compatibility
120V input -IN120 12V output -OUT12
options
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDLEDC401 PWM Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DDLEDC401 Data Sheet Rev J April 2011
CH4
COM
DyNet/DMX512RS485
AU
X
+VE
D + D -
GN
D
Shie
ld
Supply:230V 1A1 Phase
ANE
µP
CH3
COM
CH2
COM
CH1
COM
top view
side view
end view
to suit 35mm DIN rail
209mm
66m
m
100mm
86m
m
47mm
60mm36
mm
48m
m
DDLEDC605-GLPWM Controller
The DDLEDC605-GL is designed to control LED loads in decorative architectural lighting applications where creative colour mixing and sequencing is required. The controller provides six pulse width modulated common anode voltage mode outputs suitable for directly driving high intensity LED sources. The controller is designed for connection to an external DC power supply enabling the unit to deliver a range of nominal output voltages. The device is supplied with a DIN rail mountable housing, designed for installation within a switchboard or suitable electrical enclosure. The DDLEDC605-GL is DMX512 compatible and is suitable for the high chase speeds commonly found in display lighting.
SupplyExternal 20A regulated power supplyController supply voltage range is 10-24VDC.
LED Outputs6 x 5A voltage mode, common anodeNominal output voltage is equal to the supply voltage, less internal voltage drop of max 0.5VOutputs are short circuit protected with integral self-resetting thermal overload protection
Maximum Total Box Load20A
Control Inputs1 x RS485 DyNet/DMX512 serial port
User ControlsService switchDiagnostic LED
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Supply TerminalsPositive, Negative, Earth1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Output TerminalsCH, COM for each channel1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 40ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionPolycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (6 unit)
DimensionsH 93mm x W 105mm x D 75mm
WeightPacked weight 1.0kg
technical data
Voltage Mode Common Anode LED fixtures
load compatibility
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDLEDC605-GLPWM Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DDLEDC605-GL Data Sheet Rev H April 2011
CH4
COM
DyNet/DMX512RS485
AUX
+VE
D + D -
GND
Shie
ld
Supply:10-24VDC
20A
+-E
µP
CH3
COM
CH2
COM
CH1
COM
CH5
COM
CH6
COM
94.5
6946
38
51
75
59
105
Multipurpose Controllers
Within any project many different lighting load types are required to achieve a desired result. Different lighting load types may require a different style of control. The Philips Dynalite range of multipurpose controllers allows customisation of the output types via different output module units.
When using the DIN rail multipurpose controllers, a control type choice for each circuit can be made from relay, leading edge dimmer, trailing edge dimmer, ballast control, fan control and blind/screen control. In any combination, multiple load types can be controlled from a single device.
The wall box multipurpose controller combines leading edge dimming, ballast control, and relay switching into one device. With 10A sized channels this device is perfectly suited as a standalone device for lecture theatres, board rooms and meeting rooms or working with other load controllers as part of a larger system.
DDMC802 Multipurpose Modular Controller
The DDMC802 is an 8 channel controller with a maximum load per channel of 2A. A variety of output modules are available to suit different types of loads and the DDMC802 can accept up to eight plug in modules, which by their removable design also facilitate ease of servicing. Available module types include:• Trailing edge phase control dimmer, suitable for use with most types of dimmable electronic transformers.• Leading edge phase control dimmer, suitable for incandescent lamps and some types of dimmable electronic transformers.• HF Ballast controller, suitable for controlling 1-10V and digital ballasts and transformers (a relay module should be paired with the HF ballast module when controlling 1-10V ballasts).• Relay module, suitable for most types of switched loads.• Fan control module.• Curtain control module.The device is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard, optionally next to circuit breakers feeding the circuits to be controlled.
Supply230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 16A
Output Options8 x output slots at 2A each. Maximum device load 16A. A derating factor may need to be applied if installed in a smaller sealed switchboard when using Leading or Trailing edge modules, see Instruction Manual for details. Some modules occupy 2 slots. Available modules include:DDBM100 - 1 Channel; 1-10V or digital HF Ballast control. Occupies 1 slotDDCM102 - 1 Channel x 2A SPDT Curtain Control. Occupies 2 slotsDDFM102 - 1 Channel 400VA Fan Control. Occupies 2 slotsDDLM102 - 1 Channel x 2A Leading edge dimmer. Regulating Device - Triac - 20A, 600V. Occupies 1 slotDDLM104 - 1 Channel x 4A Leading edge dimmer. Regulating Device - Triac - 20A, 600V. Occupies 2 slotsDDRM104 - 1 Channel x 4A relay.Switching device - Relay, 16A/250V TV5 100A surge. Occupies 1 slotDDTM102 - 1 Channel x 2A Trailing edge dimmer. Regulating Device - Dual MOSFET’s 22A, 500V, 88A surge. Occupies 1 slot
Dimmer Module Power Conditioning• Regulated outputs• Over voltage protection• Surge protection• Brownout/Sag protection• Spike protection• Soft start• 16 bit fade resolution (65,536 steps)
Front Panel Controls (-MO version)Channel Over-ride switches Channel status indicators Service SwitchService LED
technical data
Digital and 1-10V HF BallastsDigital and 1-10V transformersIncandescent lampsMagnetic transformers
Leading edge electronic transformersSwitched loadsTrailing edge electronic transformers
load compatibility
Manual Over-ride and Status indicators -MOoptions
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet and DMX512 serial port1 x AUX programmable dry contact input
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels)
Preset Scenes170
User ControlsService SwitchDiagnostic LED
Diagnostic FunctionsCircuit run time tracking on each channel Device Online/Offline status
Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral, Earth2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size
Output TerminalsLine, Neutral for each channel,2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size
Operating Environment0º to 40ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
EnclosurePolycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (12 unit)
DimensionsH 93mm x W 211mm x D 75mm
WeightPacked weight 0.94kg
Leading EdgeTrailing Edge
RelayHF Ballast
Curtain Fan
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDMC802 Multipurpose Modular Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DDMC802 Data Sheet Rev N April 2011
Supply:230V 16A1 Phase
L
CH1N
NE
Output Card 1 Slot
DyNetRS485
AU
X
+VE
D + D -
GN
D
Shie
ld
µP
CH2N
Output Card 2 Slot
CH3N
Output Card 3 Slot
CH4N
Output Card 4 Slot
CH5N
Output Card 5 Slot
CH6N
Output Card 6 Slot
CH7N
Output Card 7 Slot
CH8N
Output Card 8 Slot
T 6.3A M205
T 6.3A M205
T 6.3A M205
T 6.3A M205
T 6.3A M205
T 6.3A M205
T 6.3A M205
T 6.3A M205
Module DDRM1041 x 4 Amp Switched
Module DDBM1001-10V, DSI, Digital
HF Ballast Controller
1-10V DSI Digital
Module DDLM102 1 x 2AModule DDLM104 1 x 4ALeading Edge Dimmer
Module DDTM102 1 x 2ATrailing Edge Dimmer
Module DDCM102Curtain Controller
CH A
CH B
OFF
HI
MED
LO
Module DDFM102Fan Controller
module electrical diagrams
DDMC802GL Multipurpose Modular Controller
The DDMC802GL is an 8 channel controller with a nominal load per channel of 2A. A variety of output modules are available to suit different types of loads and the DDMC802GL can accept up to four plug in modules, which by their removable design also facilitate ease of servicing. Available module types include:• Trailing edge phase control dimmer, suitable for use with most types of dimmable electronic transformers.• Leading edge phase control dimmer, suitable for incandescent lamps and some types of dimmable electronic transformers.• HF Ballast controller, suitable for controlling DALI Broadcast, 1-10V and DSI ballasts and transformers.• Relay module, suitable for most types of switched loads.• Fan control module.• Curtain control module.The device is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard, optionally next to circuit breakers feeding the circuits to be controlled.
Supply100-240 50/60Hz Single Phase at max. 16A
Output Options4 x 2 channel output slots at 2A nominal per channel. Maximum device load is 10A. A derating factor may need to be applied if installed in a smaller sealed switchboard when using Leading or Trailing edge modules, see Instruction Manual for details. Some modules occupy 2 slots. Available modules include:DGBM200 - 2 Channel DALI Broadcast, 1-10V, DSI HF Ballast control. Occupies 1 slotDGCM102 - 1 Channel x 2A SPDT Curtain Control. Occupies 1 slotDGFM102 - 1 Channel 400VA Fan Control. Occupies 1 slotDGLM402 - 4 Channel x 2A Leading edge dimmer. Max. module total load 5A. Regulating Device - Triac - 20A, 600V. Occupies 2 slotsDGLM105 - 1 Channel x 5A Leading edge dimmer. Regulating Device - Triac - 20A, 600V. Occupies 2 slotsDGRM204 - 2 Channel x 4A relay.Switching device - Relay, 16A TV5 100A surge. Occupies 1 slotDGTM402 - 4 Channel x 2A Trailing edge dimmer. Max. module total load 5A. Regulating Device - MOSFET’s 25A, 500V, 62A surge. Occupies 2 slotsDGTM105 - 1 Channel x 5A Trailing edge dimmer. Regulating Device - MOSFET’s 25A, 500V, 62A surge. Occupies 2 slots
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet & DMX512 serial port8 x Programmable dry contact inputs
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 120mA (supply for approx. 6 panels)
Preset Scenes170
User ControlsService SwitchDiagnostic LED
Diagnostic FunctionsCircuit run time tracking on each channelDevice Online/Offline status
Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral, Earth2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size
Output TerminalsChannel, Common for each channel,2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor sizeDry contact input terminals1 x 10 pole removable terminal socketPTR item code: AK950/10-5-0-GREEN
Operating Environment0º to 40ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
EnclosurePolycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (12 unit)
DimensionsH 93mm x W 211mm x D 75mm
WeightPacked weight 0.94kg
technical data
DSI high frequency fluorescent ballastsDSI electronic low voltage transformers1-10V high frequency fluorescent ballasts
Devices that require 0-10V analogue control signals
load compatibility
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDMC802GL Multipurpose Modular Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DDMC802GL Data Sheet Rev F April 2011
Supply:230V 16A1 Phase
L
CH1N
NE
Output Card 1 Slot
µP
CH2NCH3NOutput Card 2 Slot
CH4NCH5NOutput Card 3 Slot
CH6NCH7NOutput Card 4 Slot
CH8N
T 6.3A M205
T 6.3A M205
T 6.3A M205
T 6.3A M205
DyNetRS485
AUX
+VE
D +
D -
GND
Shield
module electrical diagrams
DDLE6RC202Leading Edge/Relay
Multipurpose Controller
The DDLE6RC202 is an eight channel controller with six leading edge dimming outputs and two switched outputs with a maximum load per channel of 2 Amps. It is suitable for use with incandescent, low voltage, neon and selected fluorescent fixtures, and any small switched load. It is also highly recommended for use in residential and hotel applications. The DDLE6RC202 features Philips Dynalite’s superior voltage regulation and soft start technologies, which protect low voltage lamps and dramatically increase lamp life.
The front panel of the DDLE6RC202-MO (Manual Over-ride) version includes a rear lit keypad that provides status indication and local control of individual channels. It also features an LED illuminated service switch for diagnostics and local override. Adjacent to the keypad is a network socket for ease of programming.
The device is DIN rail mountable, designed to be installed in a switchboard, optionally next to circuit breakers feeding the circuits to be controlled.
Supply230V 50/60Hz single phase & neutral at 16A
Outputs6 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 2A. 2 x switched outputs at 2AMaximum device load is 16A. A derating factor may need to be applied if installed in a smaller sealed switchboard, see Instruction Manual for details
Overload ProtectionEach pair of channels protected by a replaceable 6.3A time delay M205 fuse
Regulating DeviceTriac - 20A, 600V.
Switching DeviceRelay - 10A
Power Conditioning• Regulated outputs• Over voltage protection• Surge protection • Brownout/Sag protection• Spike protection• Soft start• 16 bit fade resolution (65,535 steps)
Front Panel Controls (-MO version)Channel Over-ride switchesChannel Status indicatorsService SwitchService LEDRS485 DyNet port
Control Inputs1 x RS485 DyNet and DMX512 serial port1 x AUX programmable dry contact input
DyNet DC Supply120mA
Preset Scenes170
Diagnostic FunctionsCircuit run time tracking on each channelDevice Online/Offline status
Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral, Earth2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size
Output TerminalsLine, Neutral for each channel, 2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size
Operating Environment0º to 40ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Enclosure ABS DIN Rail enclosure (12 unit)
DimensionsH 96mm x W 211mm x D 75mm
WeightPacked weight 0.94kg
technical data
IncandescentIron core transformers
Leading edge electronic transformersSwitched loads
Manual Over-ride -MO
load compatibility
options
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDLE6RC202Leading Edge/Relay
Multipurpose Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DDLE6RC202 Data Sheet Rev B April 2011
93mm
150mm
211mm
75mm
46mm69mm
38mm51
mm75mm
DMC810GLLeading Edge/Signal Dimmer
Multipurpose Controller
The DMC810GL multipurpose controller offers control of both incandescent lamps and electronic dimmable and switched ballasts and transformers. Four 10A circuit breakers protect 8 channels rated at 10A each for control of dimmable loads. Four control outputs, selectable to 1-10V DC, DSI and DALI broadcast, are provided for control of HF ballasts. These control outputs can operate in tandem with or separately from, the switched outputs. The ability to control mixed load types from the one controller provides savings on initial capital costs, as well as installation.
Supply 230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 40A
Outputs 4 x dimmed outputs (leading edge phase control) at 10A each4 x switched outputs at 10A 4 x HF ballast control outputs, selectable to 1-10V DC, DSI and DALITotal box load is 40ATotal switched load is 40A orTotal dimmed load is 40A
Overload Protection4 x 10A 6kA single pole thermal magnetic circuit breakers
Regulating DeviceTriac 600V 40A nom. 400A surge
Switching DeviceRelay 16A nom. (165A surge)
Interference SuppressionIron powder toroidal choke
Rise Time100µS at 230V
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet serial port / DMX1 x programmable dry contact AUX input
User ControlsService Over-ride switch - All channels to 100%Diagnostic LED
Internal ControlsProgrammable Logic Controller
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 200mA (supply for approx. 10 panels)
Preset Scenes170
Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral2 x 10mm2 max conductor size
Output TerminalsLine, Neutral for each channels 1-82 x 4mm2 max conductor sizeEarth Link bar provided0V/DSI/DALI, +V/DSI/DALI for channels 9-121 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size
Cable EntriesMains – 8 x 25mm dia knockoutData – 1 x 25mm dia. knockout
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 40ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionAlloy/Steel wall mount case with powder coat finish
DimensionsH 370mm x W 215mm x D 170mm (excludes wall brackets)
WeightPacked weight 7.5kg
technical data
IncandescentNeonSwitched loadsDSI high frequency fluorescent ballasts
1-10V DC high frequency fluorescent Leading edge electronic transformersIron core transformers
load compatibility
Extra RS485 DyNet/DMX512 port -A Earth leaking and overload protection on each channel -RCBO
options
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DMC810GLLeading Edge/Signal Dimmer
Multipurpose Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DMC810GL Data Sheet Rev C April 2011
176212
412
392
366
179
149
15
Supply:230V 40A1 Phase E
N
NL
CH7
CH3
NCH8
CH4N
N
0CH10
CH9
0CH11
CH120
01-10V / DSI / DALI
NCH5
CH1
NCH6
CH2N
N
DyNetRS485
AUX
+VE
D + D -
GND
SHIE
LD
µP
1-10V / DSI / DALI
1-10V / DSI / DALI
1-10V / DSI / DALI
Integration Devices
Within any modern project, many third-party systems can be found performing different roles. Each separate system may use a different protocol for communication. To unite the efforts of these different systems, Philips Dynalite has developed a range of gateway devices that can be used to synchronise their functions together into one integrated system solution. By utilising the correct gateway, different systems can be integrated together allowing end-users to have access to a fully automated site from one interface. By successfully integrating third-party systems with Philips Dynalite, repetitive interaction from end-users is reduced. A range of different gateways have been developed to provide different integration opportunities and network management options.
DNG100BTEthernet Gateway
The Philips Dynalite DNG100BT provides cost effective integration between Philips Dynalite control systems and Ethernet networks. It is designed to provide remote control of sites and link multiple sites together, using the Internet or a corporate LAN as a backbone. The device supports the TCP/IP protocol, with static or DHCP assigned IP addressing. Routing Mode links multiple DNG100BT’s together in point to point or broadcast modes. An integral webserver allows Browser based control scenarios.The interface incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and arithmetic functions. The DNG100BT is capable of routing DyNet to third-party systems, such as audio-visual and building automation systems, providing an integrated approach to total building control and energy management.
Supply230V ± 14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at 0.1A
DyNet DC Supply12V DC @ 90mA (supply for approx. 4 panels)
Serial Ports1 x RS485 DyNet serial port1 x 10/100BaseT Ethernet port
Supported Ethernet ProtocolsTCP/IP (TCP & UDP)HTTPFTPTelnetEncryption: AES - 256 bit
Serial Port TerminalsDyNet RS485:Shield, GND, D-, D+, +12VAll available on screw terminals1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor sizeAlso available on RJ45 socket
Ethernet:Female RJ45 socket
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionSteel wall mount case with epoxy finish
DimensionsH 225mm x W 165mm x D 59mm
WeightPacked weight 2.2kg
technical data
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DNG100BTEthernet Gateway
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DNG100BT Data Sheet Rev I April 2011
µP
WebServer
100BaseTEthernetRJ45
Supply:230V 0.1A1 Phase
L
N
E
+VE
D +
D -
GND
SHIELD
RS485DyNet
RJ12
RS485DyNet
125
176
226
165
122
265359
37
DMNG100BTEthernet Gateway
The Philips Dynalite DMNG100BT provides cost effective integration between Philips Dynalite control systems and Ethernet networks. It is designed to provide remote control of sites and link multiple sites together, using the Internet or a corporate LAN as a backbone. The device supports the TCP/IP protocol, with static or DHCP assigned IP addressing. Routing Mode links multiple DMNG100BT’s together in point to point or broadcast modes. An integral webserver allows Browser based control scenarios. The interface incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and arithmetic functions. The DMNG100BT is housed in a small stand-alone enclosure that is an ideal size for installation behind racked equipment. The device is powered from the DyNet network and does not require to be supplied by mains voltage.
Supply15V DC supplied by the DyNet networkat 200mA
Serial Ports1 x RS485 DyNet serial port1 x 10/100BaseT Ethernet port
RS485 Port ConnectionsShield, GND, D-, D+, +12VAll available on screw terminals1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor sizeAlso available on RJ12 socket
Ethernet Port ConnectionsFemale RJ45 socket
Supported Ethernet ProtocolsTCP/IP (TCP & UDP)HTTPFTPTelnet
Data SecurityAES - 256 bit
User ControlsService SwitchDiagnostic LED
Internal ControlsProgrammable Logic Controller
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
EnclosureABS plastic
DimensionsH 30mm x W 80mm x D 150mm
WeightPacked weight 0.15kg
technical data
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DMNG100BTEthernet Gateway
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DMNG100BT Data Sheet Rev E April 2011
30mm 80mm
150m
m
+VE
D +
D -
GND
SHIELD
µP
RJ45EthernetPort
Web Server
RS485DyNetPort
DDNG100BTEthernet Gateway
The Dynalite DDNG100BT provides cost effective integration between Philips Dynalite control systems and Ethernet networks. It is designed to provide remote control of sites and link multiple sites together, using the Internet or a corporate LAN as a backbone. The device supports the TCP/IP protocol, with static or DHCP assigned IP addressing. Routing Mode links multiple DDNG100BT’s together in point to point or broadcast modes. An integral webserver allows Browser based control scenarios.The interface incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and arithmetic functions. The DDNG100BT is capable of routing DyNet to third-party systems, such as audio-visual and building automation systems, providing an integrated approach to total building control and energy management.
Supply230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at <0.1A
Serial Ports1 x RS485 DyNet serial port1 x 10/100BaseT Ethernet port
Supported Ethernet ProtocolsTCP/IP (TCP & UDP)HTTPFTPTelnetEncryption: AES - 256 bit
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 90mA
Supply TerminalsPhase, Neutral1 x 4mm2 max conductor sizeDNG100BT - Earth link bar provided
Serial Port TerminalsDyNet RS485:Shield, GND, D-, D+, +12VAll available on screw terminals1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor sizeAlso available on RJ12 socket
Ethernet:Female RJ45 socket
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionPolycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (12 unit)
DimensionsH 93mm x W 211mm x D 75mm
WeightPacked weight 0.86kg
technical data
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDNG100BTEthernet Gateway
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DDNG100BT Data Sheet Rev D April 2011
µP
WebServer
100BaseTEthernetRJ45
Supply:230V 0.1A1 Phase
L
N
E
+VE
D +
D -
GND
SHIELD
RS485DyNet
RJ12
RS485DyNet
DAC100BTArea Controller
The Philips Dynalite DAC100BT Area Controller is a network interface that also provides a range of area management and user control functions. The DAC100BT is ideal for commercial applications incorporating a common building services 100BaseT LAN backbone. The device supports the TCP/IP protocol, with static or DHCP assigned IP addressing. Routing Mode links multiple DAC100BT’s together in point to point or broadcast modes. An integral webserver allows browser based control scenarios. The interface incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and arithmetic functions. The DAC100BT is also capable of routing DyNet to third party systems, such as audio-visual and building automation systems, providing an integrated approach to total building control and energy management. Key features include OLED panel display highlighting panel status, along with local area overrides, integrated user front panel and a range of test buttons and maintenance switch indicators. A mechanical key lock is provided for secure access.
Supply230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at <0.1A
Serial Ports1 x RS485 DyNet serial port1 x 10/100BaseT Ethernet port
Supported Ethernet ProtocolTCP/IP (TCP & UDP)HTTPFTPTelnetEncryption: AES - 256 bit
DyNet DC Supply12V@ 90mA (supply for approx. 4 panels)
Supply TerminalsPhase, Neutral1 x 4mm2 max conductor sizeDNG100BT - Earth link bar provided
Serial Port TerminalsDyNet RS485:Shield, GND, D-, D+, +12VAll available on screw terminals1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor sizeAlso available on RJ12 socketEthernet:Female RJ45 socket
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status
User ControlsProgrammable Emergency Lighting Test select buttons with status indicators.Local Area Override On, Off and Fade Up, Down buttons with status indication.4 programmable user control buttons.Panel enable/disable key switch.
Control Inputs1 x RS485 DyNet serial port8 x multi-purpose programmable dry contact /0-5V DC analogue inputs for load shedding, alarm and emergency lighting.
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 40ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionSteel wall mount case with epoxy finish
DimensionsH 225mm x W 165mm x D 59mm
WeightPacked weight 2.2kg
technical data
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DAC100BTArea Controller
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DAC100BT Data Sheet Rev C April 2011
125
176
226
165
122
265359
37
µP
100BaseTEthernetRJ45
Supply:230V 0.1A1 Phase
L
N
E
+15V
D +
D -
GND
SHIELD
RS485DyNet
RJ12
RS485DyNet
Dry Contact& Analogue
Inputs
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN6
IN4
IN5
IN7
IN8
A/D
0V
5V
DNG232RS232 Network Gateway
The Philips Dynalite DNG232 is designed to enable cost effective serial port integration between the Philips Dynalite control system and third-party systems such as AV systems, lighting desks, data projectors, HVAC, BMS and security systems. The interface incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and arithmetic functions.
A library of data formats is available for the systems integrator to choose from or, alternatively, a format can be created using the on board conditional logic engine to assemble and transmit user-defined data strings. Macro functions are available to simplify the control of multiple devices.
Supply230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at<0.1A
Serial Ports1 x RS485 DyNet serial port2 x RS232 serial ports
RS485 Port ConnectionsShield, GND, D-, D+, +12VAll available on screw terminals1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor sizeAlso available on RJ12 socket
RS232 Port Connections2 x Female DB9 connectors
RS232 Port ModesDTE, DCE, selected by jumpers
RS232 Data FormatsBaudrate: 600-250kMax packet length: 254 bytesData bits: 7/8Stop bits: 1/2Parity: odd/even/noneFlow Control: none/RTS-CTS
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 90mA (approx. 6 panels)
User ControlsService SwitchDiagnostic LED
Internal ControlsProgrammable Logic Controller
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
ConstructionSteel wall mount case with epoxy finish
DimensionsH 225mm x W 165mm x D 59mm
WeightPacked weight 2.2kg
technical data
RS232 control lines Pin Function Implementation
1 DCD (data carrier detect) Not connected
2 RD (received data) Connected to UART
3 TD (transmitted data) Connected to UART
4 DTR (data terminal ready) Not connected
5 SG (signal ground) Connected to Ground
6 DSR (data set ready) Not connected
7 RTS (request to send) Software controlled
8 CTS (clear to send) Software controlled
9 RI (ring indicator) Not connected
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DNG232RS232 Network Gateway
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DNG232 Data Sheet Rev J April 2011
125
176
226
165
122
265359
37
+VE
D +
D -
G ND
S HIELD
µP
R S 232P ort 2
5 - S G
3 - R D
4 - DTR
2 - T D
1 - DCD
8 - C TS
9 - R I
7 - R TS
6 - DSR
DCE / DTESelector
R S 485DyNet
P ort
R S 232P ort 1
5 - S G
3 - R D
4 - DTR
2 - T D
1 - DCD
8 - C TS
9 - R I
7 - R TS
6 - DSR
S upply :230V 0.1A
1 P hase
L
N
E
DMNG232RS232 Network Gateway
The Philips Dynalite DMNG232 is designed to enable cost effective serial port integration between the Philips Dynalite control system and third-party systems such as AV systems, lighting desks, data projectors, HVAC, BMS and security systems. The interface incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and arithmetic functions. A library of data formats is available for the systems integrator to choose from or, alternatively, a format can be created using the on board conditional logic engine to assemble, transmit and receive user-defined data strings. Macro functions are available to simplify the control of multiple devices. The DMNG232 is housed in a small stand alone enclosure that is an ideal size for installation behind racked equipment. The device is powered from the DyNet network and does not require to be supplied by mains voltage.
Supply15V DC supplied by the DyNet networkat 50mA
Serial Ports1 x RS485 DyNet serial port1 x RS232 serial port
RS485 Port ConnectionsShield, GND, D-, D+, +12VAll available on screw terminals1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor sizeAlso available on RJ12 socket
RS232 Port ConnectionsFemale DB9 connector
RS232 Port ModesDTE, DCE, selected by jumpers
RS232 Data FormatsBaudrate: 600-250kMax packet length: 254 bytesData bits: 7/8Stop bits: 1/2Parity: odd/even/noneFlow Control: none/RTS-CTS
User ControlsService SwitchDiagnostic LED
Internal ControlsProgrammable Logic Controller
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
EnclosureABS plastic
DimensionsH 30mm x W 80mm x D 150mm
WeightPacked weight 0.15kg
technical data
RS232 control lines Pin Function Implementation
1 DCD (data carrier detect) Not connected
2 RD (received data) Connected to UART
3 TD (transmitted data) Connected to UART
4 DTR (data terminal ready) Not connected
5 SG (signal ground) Connected to Ground
6 DSR (data set ready) Not connected
7 RTS (request to send) Software controlled
8 CTS (clear to send) Software controlled
9 RI (ring indicator) Not connected
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DMNG232RS232 Network Gateway
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DMNG232 Data Sheet Rev H April 2011
+VE
D +
D -
GND
SHIELD
µP
RS232Port
5 - SG
3 - RD
4 - DTR
2 - TD
1 - DCD
8 - CTS
9 - RI
7 - RTS
6 - DSR
DCE / DTESelector
RS485DyNetPort
30mm 80mm
150m
m
DDNG232RS232 Network Gateway
The Philips Dynalite DDNG232 is designed to enable cost effective serial port integration between the Philips Dynalite control system and third-party systems such as AV systems, lighting desks, data projectors, HVAC, BMS and security systems. The interface incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and arithmetic functions. A library of data formats is available for the systems integrator to choose from or, alternatively, a format can be created using the on board conditional logic engine to assemble and transmit user-defined data strings. Macro functions are available to simplify the control of multiple devices.
Supply230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at<0.1A
Serial Ports1 x RS485 DyNet serial port1 x RS232 serial port
RS485 Port ConnectionsShield, GND, D-, D+, +12VAll available on screw terminals1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor sizeAlso available on RJ12 socket
RS232 Port Connections2 x Female DB9 connector
RS232 Port ModesDTE, DCE, selected by jumpers
RS232 Data FormatsBaudrate: 600-250kMax packet length: 254 bytesData bits: 7/8Stop bits: 1/2Parity: odd/even/noneFlow Control: none/RTS-CTS
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 90mA (approx. 6 panels)
User ControlsService SwitchDiagnostic LED
Internal ControlsProgrammable Logic Controller
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
ConstructionPolycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (12 unit)
DimensionsH 93mm x W 211mm x D 75mm
WeightPacked weight 0.86kg
technical data
RS232 control lines Pin Function Implementation
1 DCD (data carrier detect) Not connected
2 RD (received data) Connected to UART
3 TD (transmitted data) Connected to UART
4 DTR (data terminal ready) Not connected
5 SG (signal ground) Connected to Ground
6 DSR (data set ready) Not connected
7 RTS (request to send) Software controlled
8 CTS (clear to send) Software controlled
9 RI (ring indicator) Not connected
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDNG232RS232 Network Gateway
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DDNG232 Data Sheet Rev D April 2011
+VE
D +
D -
G ND
S HIELD
µP
R S 232P ort 2
5 - S G
3 - R D
4 - DTR
2 - T D
1 - DCD
8 - C TS
9 - R I
7 - R TS
6 - DSR
DCE / DTESelector
R S 485DyNet
P ort
R S 232P ort 1
5 - S G
3 - R D
4 - DTR
2 - T D
1 - DCD
8 - C TS
9 - R I
7 - R TS
6 - DSR
S upply :230V 0.1A
1 P hase
L
N
E
DDNG485Network Gateway
The Philips Dynalite DDNG485 is a flexible network communications gateway designed for DyNet RS485 networks. The two opto-isolated RS485 ports enable the DDNG485 to implement a trunk and spur topology on large project sites, with the device providing a high-speed backbone opto-coupled to many lower speed spurs. It also provides isolation of electrical faults to individual spurs. The device is also designed to enable cost effective integration between the Philips Dynalite control system and third-party devices. The on-board Programmable Logic Controller can assemble and transmit user-defined data strings. The DDNG485 has a DMX mode that can transmit or receive up to 64 channels of DMX512, with automatic DyNet conversion and Task triggering. This is a popular method of allowing a lighting operator temporary control of the house lights from the DMX lighting console in an auditorium scenario.
Supply12V DC max. 375mA from the DyNet Network, fed via Port 1
Control Ports2 x RS485 DyNet/DyNet II serial ports
Serial Port Isolation3.75KV RMS optical isolation between ports
User ControlsService switchDiagnostic LED
DMX Functions- DMX receive: 64 channels- DMX transmit: 64 channels
Internal ControlsProgrammable Logic Controller - 64 Tasks
Serial Port TerminalsPort 1:SHIELD, GND, D+, D-, +12V, AUX1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor sizePort 2:SHIELD, GND, D+, D-, +12V1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size1 x RJ12 socket for plug in connection
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionPolycarbonate DIN Rail case (6 units wide)
DimensionsH 93mm x W 105mm x D 75mm
WeightPacked weight 0.25kg
technical data
topology example
DUS703C
Universal Sensor
DyN
et T
runk
DyNet Spur
DUS703CUniversal Sensor
To up to 123 more devices
DUS703CDDNG485
Network GatewayUniversal Sensor
DyN
et T
runk
DyNet Spur
DUS703CUniversal Sensor
To up to 123 more devices
To otherfloors
To otherfloors
DBC410
CH4CH3CH2CH1
CH1CH2CH3CH4
EL1
DBC410
CH4CH3CH2CH1
CH1CH2CH3CH4
EL1
DBC410
CH4CH3CH2CH1
CH1CH2CH3CH4
EL1DBC410
CH4CH3CH2CH1
CH1CH2CH3CH4
EL1
DyN
et T
runk
DDNG485Network Gateway
DDNG485Network Gateway
DDNG485Network Gateway
DyNet - Up to 2 KilometersTo network devicesTo network devices
DDNG485
DDNG485
DDNG485
DDNG485
DDNG485
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDNG485Network Gateway
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DDNG485 Data Sheet Rev K April 2011
+VE
D +
D -
GND
SHIELD
µP
Port 1RS485DyNet
+VE
D +
D -
GND
SHIELD
Port 2RJ12 Socket
Port 2RS485DyNetDMX512
AUX
DC/DC
94.5
6946
38
51
75
59
105
DDNI485Network Passive Gateway
The Philips Dynalite DDNI485 is designed for cost effective optical isolation of DyNet RS485 networks. The two opto-isolated RS485 ports enable the DDNI485 to implement a trunk and spur topology, with each spur being electrically isolated from the others so a fault in one section of the network will be contained. It is a “passive” device that does not require programming.
Supply12V DC 100mA from the DyNet Network, fed via Port 1
Control Ports2 x RS485 DyNet/DyNet II serial ports
Serial Port Isolation2.5KV surge rated optical isolation between ports
Serial Port TerminalsPort 1:SHIELD, GND, D+, D-, +12V1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size1 x RJ12 socket for plug in connection
Port 2:SHIELD, GND, D+, D-, +12V1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size1 x RJ12 socket for plug in connection
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionPolycarbonate DIN rail enclosure (6 unit)
DimensionsH 93mm x W 105mm x D 75mm
WeightPacked weight 0.2kg
technical data
topology examples
DUS703C
Universal Sensor
DyN
et T
run
k
DyNet Spur
DUS703C
Universal Sensor
To up to 123 more devices
DUS703C
DDNI485Network Isolator
Universal Sensor
DyN
et T
run
k
DyNet Spur
DUS703C
Universal Sensor
To up to 123 more devices
To otherfloors
To otherfloors
DBC410
CH4CH3CH2CH1
CH1CH2CH3CH4
EL1
DBC410
CH4CH3CH2CH1
CH1CH2CH3CH4
EL1
DBC410
CH4CH3CH2CH1
CH1CH2CH3CH4
EL1
DBC410
CH4CH3CH2CH1
CH1CH2CH3CH4
EL1
DyN
et T
run
k
DDNI485Network Isolator
DDNI485Network Isolator
DDNI485Network Isolator
DyNet - Up to 2 Kilometers
To network devicesTo network devices
DDNI485
DDNI485
DDNI485
DDNI485
DDNI485
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDNI485Network Passive Gateway
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DDNI485 Data Sheet Rev E April 2011
+VE IN
D +
D -
G ND
S HIELD
P ort 1R S 485DyNet
+VE IN
D +
D -
G ND
S HIELD
P ort 2R J 12 S ocke t
P ort 2R S 485DyNet
P ort 1R J 12
S ocke t
DC /DC
94.5
6946
38
51
7559
105
DNG485RS485/DMX Gateway
The Philips Dynalite DNG485 is a flexible network communications bridge designed for RS485 networks. The two opto-isolated RS485 ports enable the DNG485 to implement a trunk and spur topology on large project sites, with the bridge providing a high-speed backbone opto-coupled to many lower speed spurs. It also provides isolation of electrical faults to individual spurs and augments network security and robustness through the definition of packet filtering rules for each direction. The DNG485 is capable of routing DyNet to third-party systems, such as audio-visual and building automation systems, providing an integrated approach to total building control and energy management. The DDNG485 has a DMX mode that can transmit or receive up to 64 channels of DMX512, with automatic DyNet conversion and Task triggering.
Supply230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at Max. 0.25A
Control Ports2 x RS485 DyNet serial ports
Serial Port Isolation3.75KV RMS optical isolation between ports
User ControlsService switchDiagnostic LED
Internal ControlsProgrammable Logic ControllerPacket filteringDyNet to DyNet II translation
DMX512 Support-DMX Receive: 64 channels-DMX Transmit: 64 channels
DyNet DC SupplySerial Port 1: 12V @ 450mA (approx. 20 panels)Serial Port 2: 12V @ 180mA (approx. 9 panels)
Supply TerminalsPhase, Neutral1 x 4mm2 max conductor sizeEarth link bar provided
Serial Port TerminalsSerial Port 1:SHIELD, GND, D+, D-, +12V1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor sizeSerial Port 2:SHIELD, GND, D+, D-, +12V1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size1 x RJ12 socket for plug in connection
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionAlloy/Steel wall mount case with epoxyfinish
DimensionsH 320mm x W 225mm x D 75mm
WeightPacked weight 3.1kg
technical data
typology examples
DUS703C
Universal Sensor
DyN
et T
run
k
DyNet Spur
DUS703C
Universal Sensor
To up to 123 more devices
DUS703C
DNG485Network Gateway
Universal Sensor
DyN
et T
run
k
DyNet Spur
DUS703C
Universal Sensor
To up to 123 more devices
To otherfloors
To otherfloors
DBC410
CH4CH3CH2CH1
CH1CH2CH3CH4
EL1
DBC410
CH4CH3CH2CH1
CH1CH2CH3CH4
EL1
DBC410
CH4CH3CH2CH1
CH1CH2CH3CH4
EL1
DBC410
CH4CH3CH2CH1
CH1CH2CH3CH4
EL1
DyNet - Up to 2 Kilometers
To powered network devicesTo powered network devices
Trunk/Spur
Buffer
DNG485
1 2
DNG485Network Gateway
DNG485
1 2
DNG485Network Gateway
DNG485
1 2
DNG485Network Gateway
DNG485
1 2
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DNG485RS485/DMX Gateway
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DNG485 Data Sheet Rev G April 2011
+VE
D +
D -
GND
µP
OptoIsolators
RS485DyNetPort 1
Supply:230V 0.1A1 Phase
LN
E
+VE
D +
D -
GND
SHIELD
RS485DyNetPort 2
Port 2RJ12Socket
DC/DC
365
mm
225 mm
165 mm
345
mm
320m
m
80m
m
75mm
DTK622Network Gateway
DTK622 network gateway provides passive integration to a PC or a RS232 system.
The DTK622-232 allows for full duplex integration to RS232. Useful for linking the Philips Dynalite system with an AV or airconditioning system that supports RS232 communications.
A DTK622-USB provides a useful interface between any PC and the Philips Dynalite system, The DTK622-USB allows complete access to all network messages present on DyNet. To be used in conjunction with any of the Philips Dynalite software, this tool can be used to commission, diagnose/repair with Envision Project or used as a permanent gateway to the system for the head-end software EnvisionManager.
Connectors DTK622-USB:1 x USB type B connector2 x RJ12 sockets (RS485 DyNet)
DTK622-232:1 x D9 Female socket (RS232)2 x RJ12 sockets (RS485 DyNet)
Operating Environment0º to 40ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
EnclosureABS enclosure
DimensionsH 25mm x W 50mm x D 90mm
WeightPacked weight 0.94kg
Supplied withDTK622-USB:1 x USB cable, type A to type B 1 x RJ12 cable1 x Dingus
DTK622-232:1 x 232 cable male to female connector1 x RJ12 cable1 x Dingus
technical data
DTK622-USB
DTK622-232
options DyNet RS485 <-> USB gateway-USBDyNet RS485 <-> RS232 gateway-232
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DTK622Network Gateway
DTK622-232 DTK622-USB
DTK622 Data Sheet Rev A July 2011
RJ12 - 6 Pole wiring
+ 12V
GroundD +D -
BROWN - PIN 1
YELLOW - PIN 2
GREEN - PIN 3
RED - PIN 4
WHITE - PIN 5
BROWN:YELLOW:
GREEN:RED:
WHITE:DRAIN:
Not connected
DRAIN - PIN 6
Drain
DDNI-LONLON Gateway
The DDNI-LON is designed to provide a LON single point interface to a Philips Dynalite control system. The DDNI-LON is based on Echelon Corporation’s Neuron 3120 chip, which supports 63 SNVT’s and will support preset control of 100 presets per area for 30 areas. Multiple DDNI-LON devices can be cascaded together to accommodate larger or more complex DyNet networks. The device is configured to operate on the LON network with Echelon Corporation’s LonMaker.
Supply12V DC @ 50mA from the DyNet network
Control Ports1 x RS485 DyNet serial port1 x TP/FTT10A twisted pair LonWorks port
User ControlsDyNet Service SwitchDyNet Diagnostic LEDLON Service SwitchLON Diagnostic LED
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
EnclosureABS DIN Rail enclosure (6 unit)
DimensionsH 86mm x W 105mm x D 70mm
WeightPacked weight 0.6Kg
technical data
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDNI-LONLON Gateway
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DDNI-LON Data Sheet Rev H April 2011
µPDyNetRS485
+VE
D +
D -
GNDSHIELD
TP/FT10LonWorks B
A94
.5
6946
38
51
75
59
105
DDNG-KNXKNX Network Gateway
The DDNG-KNX allows for high level integration between the Philips Dynalite system and BMS using the KNX protocol. This gateway between the two systems allows high level communication, opening up a number of integration opportunities.
When using the DDNG-KNX gateway, a projects BMS system can be used to directly trigger tasks, timed based events and the Philips Dynalite system can report back current system statuses. This allows for more flexible integration solutions.
Supply12V DC 50mA from the DyNet Network, fed via Port 1
Control Ports1 x RS485 DyNet/DyNet II serial ports1 x KNX
Serial Port Isolation2.5KV surge isolation between ports
User ControlsService switch DyNet & KNXDiagnostic LED DyNet & KNX
Internal ControlsProgrammable Logic Controller - 64 Tasks
Serial Port TerminalsPort 1: DyNetSHIELD, GND, D+, D-, +12V, AUX1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size
Port 2: KNXKNX +, KNX - 1 x 2.5mm2 max conductor size plug
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionPolycarbonate DIN Rail case (6 units wide)
DimensionsH 94.5mm x W 105mm x D 75mm
WeightPacked weight 0.25kg
technical data
topology example
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDNG-KNXKNX Network Gateway
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DDNG-KNX Data Sheet Rev A July 2011
7551
38
4669
105
94
DDNG-BACnetBACnet Network Gateway
The DDNG-BACnet allows for high level integration between the Philips Dynalite system and BMS using the BACnet protocol. This gateway between the two systems allows high level communication, opening up a number of integration opportunities.
When using the DDNG-BACnet gateway, a projects BMS system can be used to directly trigger tasks, timed based events and the Philips Dynalite system can report back current system statuses. This allows for more flexible integration solutions.
Supply15V VDC 1A
Control Ports1 x RS232 serial port1 x Ethernet BACnet
Serial Port TerminalsPort 1: RS232D9 connector Female
Port 2: Ethernet RJ45 socketBACnet Ethernet.
Port 3: Ethernet RJ45 socketWeb server configuration.
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionPolycarbonate DIN Rail case
DimensionsH 101mm x W 170mm x D 75mm
WeightPacked weight 0.55kg
technical data
options 200 BACnet addressing points -2001000 BACnet addressing points-1000
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDNG-BACnetBACnet Network Gateway
recommended installation
DDNG-BACnet Data Sheet Rev A July 2011
Additional Philips Dynalite devices shown are not supplied with BACnet Gateway
Part number Description
DDNP1501 Network Power supplyDTK622-232 RS232 <-> RS485 Bidirectional GatewayDPN308N Wall plate network socket
See other product data sheets for more details
DDMIDC8 Low Level Input Integrator
The DDMIDC8 is designed to enable cost effective input integration to the Philips Dynalite control system from third-party systems such as Security, HVAC and BMS. The interface incorporates a Programmable Logic Controller that can process comprehensive conditional and sequential logic and arithmetic functions. Eight digital inputs are provided, each of which can be individually configured as a dry contact input or a 0-24V AC/DC input. Each input has an LED indicator to provide visual status indication, and all inputs are individually optically isolated for high noise immunity. In addition to the digital inputs, four 0-5V/0-10V (software selectable) analogue inputs are provided. The DDMIDC8 is housed in a 6 unit wide DIN enclosure for installation into switchboards and also has internal fixing points that allow the device to be fixed to a surface without the use of DIN rail. The device is powered from the DyNet network and does not require a separate mains voltage supply.
Supply12V DC supplied by the DyNetnetwork37mA with all Dry Contacts open68mA with all Dry Contacts closed
Digital Inputs8 x opto-isolated inputs, each orconfigurable to Dry Contact 0-24VAC/DC (Safety Extra Low Voltage only)
Digital Input IsolationOptical isolation (2.5kV surge rated)
Analogue Inputs4 x inputs, configurable to 0-5V or0-10V (Safety Extra Low Voltage only)
Analogue Input Impedance20K Ohm
Serial Port1 x RS485 DyNet serial port
User ControlsLED status indicators for digital inputs
Internal ControlsProgrammable Logic Controller
Digital Input TerminalsA, B for each input1 x 2.5mm2 conductor size
Analogue Input TerminalsCH, GND, for each input1 x 2.5mm2 conductor size
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
EnclosurePolycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (6 unit)
DimensionsH 93mm x W 105mm x D 75mm
WeightPacked weight 0.281kg
technical data
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDMIDC8 Low Level Input Integrator
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DDMIDC8 Data Sheet Rev M April 2011
7551
38
4669
105
94
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
+VE
D +
D -
GND
SHIELD
µP
GND
CH2
CH1
GND
CH3
CH4
GND
GND
0-5V/0-10VAnalogue Inputs
A/D
A / D
A / D
A / D
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
+5V
DyNetRS485
Optical Isolation Barrier
Opto IsolatedDry Contact/0-24VAC/DC Digital Inputs
DPMI940Dry Contact Gateway
The DPMI940 is a four way dry contact interface designed to allow mechanical switches and relays to interface to the DyNet network. The function of each input is programmable and the small size of the product combined with the inputs being presented on flyleads makes it perfect for installation behind multi-gang switch grids. In addition to use as a simple dry contact interface, the DPMI940 has a “motion detector” mode that turns a third-party motion detector into a fully featured DyNet sensor. The flylead that connects to the motion relay and tamper switch also has a 0V and +12VDC pair for powering the motion detector from the DyNet network power supply. The small size of the DPMI940 allows it to be fitted completely inside many brands of motion detectors.
Supply12V at 20mA, from the DyNet network
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet serial port
Inputs4 x dry contact inputs
Dry Contact Flyleads+12V, GND, GND, SW1, SW2, SW3,SW4; all presented on a 2mm pitch x160mm long ribbon cable
Serial Port TerminalsSHIELD, GND, D+, D-, +15V1 x 2mm2 max conductor size
Diagnostic FunctionsDevice Online/Offline status
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionBare circuit board with heatshrink cover
DimensionsH 19mm x W 40mm x D 19mm
WeightPacked weight 15.5 grams
technical data
DPMI940
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DPMI940Dry Contact Gateway
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DPMI940 Data Sheet Rev D April 2011
40 mm Ribbon Cable
19m
m
side view
top view
19m
m
µP GND
+12V
DyNetRS485
AUX+VE
D +D -
GNDShield
GND
GND
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
DryContactInputs
+12VDCOutput
Ribbon CableBlack Trace
DIR-TX8Infra-red Transmitter
The DIR-TX8 is designed to provide cost effective integration and control of all types of infrared controllable devices, such as AV equipment. User-friendly PC software is used to program the DIR-TX8 with common IR codes from the supplied library. The DIR-TX8 also has an integral IR receiver that is used to learn and save previously unknown IR codes. Multiple IR codes can be arranged into macros and played back at any time with a single DyNet command. The device includes an internal Programmable Logic Controller and supports all Philips Dynalite script commands.
Supply12V @ DC 50mA, supplied from DyNet network
IR Transmit Outputs8 independent, individually controllableoutputs. Connector type is 4 x 3.5mm stereo jacks which accept stereo and mono plugs.
IR Inputs1 IR input, used for learning and savingunknown IR codes
Control Inputs1 x RS485 DyNet serial port1 x AUX programmable dry contact input
Internal ControlsProgrammable Logic Controller
User ControlsService SwitchDiagnostic LEDIR Transmit/Learn LED
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
ConstructionABS plastic enclosure
DimensionsH 30mm x W 80mm x D 150mm
WeightPacked weight 0.15kg
DIR-EM2 (supplied separately)2 x separately controllable IR Emitter LEDs2 metre lead lengthTerminates in 3.5mm stereo plugAdhesive mounting pads supplied
technical data
pc software
DIR-TX8
DIR-EM2(supplied separately)
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DIR-TX8Infra-red Transmitter
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DIR-TX8 Data Sheet Rev H April 2011
30mm 80mm
150m
m
+VE
D +
D -
GND
SHIELD
µP
IR Zone 1 (CH1A = Tip, CH1B = Ring)RS485DyNetPort
AUX
IR Learner
IR Outputs4 x 3.5mm stereo jacks
IR Zone 2 (CH2A = Tip, CH2B = Ring)
IR Zone 3 (CH3A = Tip, CH3B = Ring)
IR Zone 4 (CH4A = Tip, CH4B = Ring)
DDFCUC024 Fan Coil Unit Controller
The DDFCUC024 is a Fan Coil Unit controller designed for direct connection to components commonly found in airconditioning systems. Triac outputs are provided for controlling hot and chilled water valves, relay outputs for driving fan motors, a high capacity relay output is available for electrical heaters. Inputs are provided for a resistive type temperature sensor and the device can use data from a networked temperature sensor such as the Philips Dynalite DTS900. Programmable auxiliary inputs are provided for peripherals such as smoke detectors, motion detectors, window open/close sensors and airflow detectors. The device can be networked with other equipment, such as Philips Dynalite Revolution DRP wall stations and DTP160 touchscreen, via an onboard RS485 DyNet port.
Supply230V ±14% 50/60Hz Single Phase at10A
Outputs1 x dual triac 24VAC output for open/close or floating hot water valve
1 x dual triac 24VAC output for open/close or floating chilled water valve
3 x 230VAC relay outputs for high/med/low fan control
Temperature Sensor Input20K NTC(networked temperature sensors alsosupported)
Dry Contact Inputs3, programmable for devices including:- window sensor- motion detector- airflow sensor
Control Inputs1 x RS485 DyNet serial port
DyNet DC Supply12V @ 120mA (Max. 6 panels)
User ControlsService SwitchDiagnostic LED
Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral, Earth2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size
Output TerminalsHot water valve:common, open, close,2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size
Chilled water valve:common, open, close,2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size
Fan:neutral, low, med, high2 x 2.5mm2 or 1 x 4mm2 conductor size
Operating Environment0º to 40ºC ambient temperature0% to 90% RH non condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
EnclosurePolycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (12 unit)
DimensionsH 93mm x W 211mm x D 75mm
WeightPacked weight 0.8kg
technical data
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDFCUC024Fan Coil Unit Controller
wiring diagram
DDFUCU024 Data Sheet Rev G April 2011
ShieldGND
+D-D
+VE
mounting dimensions
Envision Software
EnvisionProject and EnvisionManager software delivers powerful functionality, time saving and user-friendly benefits to ensure success through the life of a project. This fully integrated end-to-end solution is the next generation software, to deliver advanced lighting control commissioning and management.
DLight III ServerGateway Integration Software
DLight III Server (EnvisionManager) is designed to provide high level integration and control options to a Philips Dynalite DyNet network via a Local Area Network. The DyNet network is connected to a server PC’s COM or USB port or over Ethernet when using a DNG100BT. Information can then be exchanged via client software running on the server PC or clients connecting remotely over the Ethernet network using TCP/IP. Integration to other services is made simple via the use of a set of calls using an industry standard DCOM interface. DLight III Server accompanied by it’s main MapView client software is an inexpensive solution for providing occupants of open plan office space with control over their local environment. The MapView management software provides a sophisticated control and monitoring environment that can be tailored to the specifications of the customer. Using a multi-page graphical environment, a building manager has quick and easy control and status reflection of the lighting system. The system provides status indicators of alarm events, such as device offline, circuit breaker trips and lamp failures – both visually in real-time and via reports. Diagnostic and maintenance data such as lamp burn time is also available as well as features such as Emergency Lamp Test and Notional Power reporting. TrayPan end-user client software can reside in the tool tray of desktop PC’s in the open plan office use the existing LAN to communicate with DLight III Server, provides a cost benefit over the provision of local control panels that would otherwise be required. The optional DLight III Toolbox Software Development Kit provides a rapid integration environment for connection toBuilding Management Systems. A set of system calls and example clients, including source code, are provided to assist with developing integration solutions and custom clients. The DLight III Server license model takes the size and scope of the Philips Dynalite system into account, making the productaffordable for both large and small sized systems.
LAN InterfaceEthernet - TCP/IP
Server Software InterfacesDCOM
DyNet Interface1 serial interface, via USB or RS232 portOptional DNG100BT connectivity
Hardware Requirements*Hardware Platform: PCProcessor: Minimum 2Ghz Dual CoreHard Disk: Minimum 10Gb free spaceSystem Memory: Minimum 2GB RAMGraphics Memory: Minimum 256MB RAMSerial Ports: One free RS232 or USB portNetwork: Ethernet Network card1 x Philips Dynalite PC Node adaptor
We recommend the PC is powered from an Uninterruptible Power Supply
Operating Systems SupportedWindows XP Professional SP3Windows 7 SP1Windows 2003 Server SP1Windows 2008 Server SP2
ClientsMapView - Master control GUITrayPan virtual PC Panel
Client InterfacesDLight III ToolBox SDK optionally available to assist creating custom clients and/or integration gateways
Client SecurityIntegrates with and uses Windows Domain and Workgroup Security Groups and Users. Rights configurable on a User and Group basis.
Ordering InformationDL3SBL Server with 10 Device/Area** LicensesDL3SUL Additional Device/Area* LicenseDL3TB ToolBox SDK
*Note: minimum requirements will vary depending on the size of the site and the number of simultaneously connected clients. Consult the DLight III Server Implementation Guide for more details.**The required Licenses are based on the quantity of networked hardware devices or the number of Areas
technical data
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DLight III ServerGateway Integration Software
typical application
DLight III Server Data Sheet Rev H April 2011
traypan operation traypan setup options
Network Devices & Commissioning Tools
To bring all the different devices together, Philips Dynalite supports a range of network devices that are useful in creating a problem free installation.
DDNP1501Network Power Supply
The DDNP1501 is a 15V DC 1.5 Amps regulated power supply, designed to supplement the DyNet network DC supply. The switchmode design allows the device to be used with a wide range of supply voltages without the need for a manual selector setting. Normally a DyNet network is self-powered by the built-in DC supplies integrated within all mains powered devices. However, in certain applications this supply may need to be supplemented with the DDNP1501 when using peripherals with a high supply requirement, such as edge lit touchscreens. The DDNP1501 is housed in a 6 unit DIN rail mount enclosure that has a circuit breaker profile. This enables the device to be installed in all types of electrical equipment enclosures, including those with cover apertures specifically designed for circuit breakers.
Supply100-240V 50/60Hz Single Phase at 0.5A
Output15 Volt DC @ 1.5 Amps (@230V supply)15 Volt DC @ 1.0 Amps (@110V supply)
Electrical DesignSwitchmode
ProtectionSelf resetting overload protectionShort circuit proofAutomatic thermal shutdown
Supply TerminalsLine, Neutral, Earth1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
Output TerminalsGND, GND, +15V, +15V1 x 4mm2 max conductor size
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionPolycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (6 unit)
DimensionsH 93mm x W 105mm x D 75mm
WeightPacked weight 0.2kg
technical data
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDNP1501Network Power Supply
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DDNP1501 Data Sheet Rev G May 2009
+15V
GND
SHIELD
Output:15VDC
1.5A at 230V
Supply:100 - 240VAC0.5 A 1 Phase
LNE
LOOP
LOOP
94.5
6946
38
51
75
59
105
DDPB22RJ12Network Junction Box
Allowing installers to have onsite flexible networking options, the DDPB22RJ12 allows for 22 DyNet flat cables of the Philips Dynalite system, to be terminated together in one location. Acting as a junction box, the DDPB22RJ12 takes advantage of the RJ12 connection system allowing for a quick install and easy implementation of a network star topology.
Connectors 1 x 5 way screw terminal 22 x RJ12 sockets
User ControlsInternal Diagnostic LED for network connection
Operating Environment0º to 40ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
EnclosurePolycarbonate DIN Rail enclosure (12 unit)
DimensionsH 93mm x W 211mm x D 75mm
WeightPacked weight 0.94kg
Flat network cable ordering codes:200m Roll: DYNET-SFLAT6-CABLE10m Lead: DYNET-SFLATE6-CABLE-10M5M Lead: DYNET-SFLATE6-CABLE-5M3M Lead: DYNET-SFLATE6-CABLE-3M
technical data
RJ12 - 6 Pole wiring + 12V
GroundD +D -
BROWN - PIN 1
YELLOW - PIN 2
GREEN - PIN 3
RED - PIN 4
WHITE - PIN 5
BROWN:YELLOW:
GREEN:RED:
WHITE:DRAIN:
Not connected
DRAIN - PIN 6
Drain
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DDPB22RJ12Network Junction Box
electrical diagram mounting dimensions
DDPB22RJ12 Data Sheet Rev A July 2011
DyNet Data Cable100MHz 100Ω STP 4 pair CAT5E
DyNet data cable is specifically designed for high reliability RS485 network wiring. In addition to a twisted pair forRS485 data, conductors are provided to supply DC power to network powered peripherals. Conductors are shieldedfor maximum data integrity. The data cable is flexible, as all conductors are stranded, which also allows for robusttermination into pressure plate style terminals used on Philips Dynalite equipment. The extra thick outer jacket is mains ratedfor use in switchboards and enhances the robustness of the cable. The cable is supplied in 305 metre lengths.
Conductors4 twisted pairs and shield
Construction: Stranded Bare Copper 7 x Ø 0.23mm (24AWG)
Insulation: Polyethylene PE Ø 1.00±0.02mm
Pair IdentificationPAIR 1: blue/white-bluePAIR 2: orange/white-orangePAIR 3: green/white-greenPAIR 4: brown/white-brown
ShieldingAluminium/Mylar tape, 100% coverageDraw Wire: Tinned Copper Ø 0.51mm (24AWG)
Mechanical Characteristics Outer jacket construction: PVCThickness: 0.74±0.05mm Ø 7.3±0.20mm
Outer jacket colour: Orange
Minimum cable bending radius installed:8 times outer cable diameter
Maximum tensile load - Installation: 100 N
Maximum tensile load - Installed: No stretch
Electrical PropertiesCharacteristic Impedance: 100±5Ω @ 100MHz
DC loop resistance: Max. 190 Ω/km
DC resistance imbalance: Max. 2.5%
Dielectric strength between pairs: 1KV RMS/minute
Dielectric strength conductors to screen: 2.5KV RMS/minute
Capacitance: 56pF/m
Capacitance Imbalance: Max. 3.3pF/m
Velocity of Propagation: <620 nsec/100m @ 100MHzΩ
Outer jacket voltage rating: 600V RMS
Operating EnvironmentInstallation: 0°C to +50°COperation: -20°C to +60°C
Standards ComplianceTIA/EIA-568B.2 Category 5EUL Verified E227171ACA Approval N1756
PackagingCable length: 305 metresCarton: H 425mm x W 212mm x D 425mmWeight: 15.0 Kg
Order CodeDYNET-STP-CABLE
technical data
electrical performance Frequency Attenua-tion, Max
(dB/100M)
NeXt(dB)
PS NEXT (dB)
ELFEXT (dB)
PS ELFEXT (dB)
Return Loss (dB/100m)
1.0MHz 3.10 65 62 64 61 20.00
4.0MHz 6.10 56 53 52 49 23.00
10.0MHz 9.70 50 47 44 41 25.00
16.0MHz 12.40 47 44 40 37 25.00
20.0MHz 13.90 46 43 38 35 25.00
31.25MHz 17.60 43 40 34 31 24.30
62.5MHz 25.50 38 35 28 25 21.50
100.0MHz 33.00 35 32 24 21 20.10
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DyNet Data Cable100MHz 100Ω STP 4 pair CAT5E
DyNet Data Cable Data Sheet Rev F May 2009
DYNET-SFLAT6-CABLECable Roll and Cable Kits
Flat data cable is specifically designed for high reliability localised network wiring as found in residential applications.In addition to a conductor pair for data, conductors are provided to supply DC power to network powered peripherals.Conductors have an overall shield for maximum data integrity. The data cable is flexible, as all conductors are stranded.It is designed for rapid crimp termination into RJ12 plugs for use with Philips Dynalite products with supporting RJ12 sockets.The cable is supplied in 200 metre rolls, or in pre-terminated leads of 3, 5 and 10 metre lengths.
Conductors
5 x 26AWG 12/0.12mm
Shield
Drain: Copper foil wrapped 24AWG 9/0.12mm
Shield: Aluminium/polyester tape
Conductor Colours
Shield: silver1: white2: Red3: Green4: Yellow5: Black
Mechanical Characteristics
Outer jacket construction: PVC
Cross section Dimensions: 2.65mm x 6.95mm
Outer jacket colour: Orange
Electrical Properties
Conductor DC loop resistance: Max. 240Ω/km
Drain DC resistance: Max. 40Ω/km
Operating Environment
Installation: 0°C to +50°COperation: -20°C to +60°C
Packaging
Cable length: 200 metresWeight: 8.0 Kg
Order Codes
200m Roll: DYNET-SFLAT6-CABLE10m Lead: DYNET-SFLAT6-CABLE-10M5m Lead: DYNET-SFLAT6-CABLE-5M3m Lead: DYNET-SFLAT6-CABLE-3M
technical data
Stripped back cable
DYNET-SFLAT6-CABLE
DYNET-SFLAT6-CABLE-5M
BROWN - PIN 1
YELLOW - PIN 2
GREEN - PIN 3
RED - PIN 4
WHITE - PIN 5
DRAIN - PIN 6
BROWN:YELLOW:
GREEN:RED:
WHITE:DRAIN:
Not connected+ 12VD -D +GroundDrain
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DYNET-SFLAT6-CABLECable Roll and Cable Kits
DyNet-SFLAT6-Cable Data Sheet Rev B May 2009
DPP601Portable Programmer
The DPP601 is a portable, hand-held programmer designed for making programming changes to a Philips Dynalite system without the use of a computer. The DPP601 plugs into any point on the DyNet network and the LCD display will help guide the user step by step through the programming task. Information such as channel, area and preset scene names are automatically uploaded from the network to assist in programming. The DPP601 programmer can copy individual channel levels and preset scene values to reduce set-up time. It can be used in conjunction with standard control panels to access preset scenes that are not commonly used or that require protection from accidental selection. The DPP601 has a astronomical 365 day timer clock with Sunrise/Sunset tracking, automatic Daylight Saving adjustment and powerful macro and conditional logic functions. The timer clock interfaces with other devices over the DyNet RS485 network to automate tasks and events.
Supply12V DC 50mA from the DyNet network
Control IO1 x RS485 DyNet serial port via an RJ12socket.
Network Connection MethodRJ11<>RJ11 patchlead(5 metre patchlead supplied)
User Controls1 x 110 x 33 pixel rear lit LCD display1 x 12 button LCD transport keys1 x 12 button numeric keypad
ClockBattery back up64 tasks
MemoryAll data stored in 100 year life EEPROM
ComplianceCE, C-Tick
Operating Environment0º to 50ºC ambient temperature0% to 95% RH non condensing
ConstructionPowdercoat pressed metal body
DimensionsH 79mm x W 143mm x D 25mm
WeightPacked weight 0.427kg
technical data
For further information contact:
Specifications subject to change without notice. © WMGD Pty Ltd Trading as Dynalite. Unit 6, 691 Gardeners Road Mascot 2020 Australia. ABN 33 097 246 921. All rights reserved. Dynalite, DyNet and associated logos are the registered trademarks of WMGD Pty Ltd. Not to be reproduced without permission.
t +61 2 8338 9899 • f +61 2 8338 9333www.philips.com/dynalite • [email protected]
DPP601Portable Programmer
mounting dimensions
DPP610 Data Sheet Rev H April 2011
143mm
25mm
79m
m
23mm
3. Application G
uides
application guide aged care
Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Aged Care Page 1 of 8
This application guide contains information on: q
Assistive Living solutions using the Dynalite control system
Integration with airconditioning
Integration with security and nurse call systems
Control of equipment such as blinds and floor heating
Control through wall mount touchscreens
Monitoring through motion sensors
The Philips Dynalite control system lends itself well to providing a safe and secure living environment for
the elderly. Living facilities that incorporate this type of technology can afford the occupants much
greater independence and in doing so, ease the burden on health services infrastructure. This type of
accommodation is often referred to as „assistive living‟. These residences are often built in complexes
where all are connected to a central monitoring office that can readily dispatch nurses or alternative
health care services through a nurse call type system.
The typical assistive living unit incorporates smart sensors that can monitor activity during nominated
times and flag potential emergency situations much earlier. In addition to this, services such as heating
and airconditioning can be easily monitored through user-friendly touchscreens. The security system can
also be interfaced to the same touchscreen to alleviate the complexity associated with several dedicated
control panels. Other servers such as electric blinds and curtains can also be controlled from lighting
control panels to reduce the complexity and effort, in addition to allowing automated control take care
of day-to-day, potentially strenuous, activities. Smoke sensors are interfaced into the Philips Dynalite
system to allow early warning of potential fire hazards by illuminating egress paths. The occupants can
also alert monitoring staff through nurse call controls on the touchscreen or lighting control panels.
Different lighting settings can also make the unit much safer, avoiding potential accidents while moving
around in the unit during the night.
typical layout
Page 2 of 8 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Aged Care
system outline All the internal lighting is dimmable and labeled from D1-D4. Lighting in the courtyard and vanity is non-
dimmable labeled R1 & R2. Lamp numbers per lighting group are kept low so not to over light the areas.
Smaller lighting groups allow for more effective and efficient lighting design and flexible control
solutions. This allows for scenes to be created by having multiple lighting groups set to different levels
to suit the user‟s requirements. To facilitate the use of such a lighting plan, the DIN series of controllers
lend themselves perfectly to the task. The Dynalite DIN series controllers occupy a smaller footprint
require less real estate in the distribution board and have many independently controlled channels that
have a low rating.
In this example, the floor-heating and airconditioning are monitored by Philips Dynalite through the use
of DTS900 temperature sensor (DTS1) in the living room. Every room that has floor-heating also uses a
temperature sensor (for simplicity, this detail is not depicted in the diagram on the following page). The
DTS900 temperature sensor can be programmed to provide temperature feedback for the area it‟s
installed, to the Philips Dynalite control system. If the temperature reaches a particular set point, the
sensor will automatically send a message through the Dynet network that will switch off the floor
heating or airconditioning system. The same network message could also be used to trigger other events
if required. The temperature trigger levels are set through the touchscreen and can be manually
activated from there or from any of the control panels. In addition, a touchscreen can display the
current ambient temperature of any area from the DTS900 for system feedback.
Different services within the accommodation can be integrated together to achieve advanced functions.
For example, the lighting control motion detector can activate and de-activate when the security system
is armed and disarmed. In this scenario, the motion sensors are programmed to detect movement over
defined times after the security system is disarmed by the occupant. If no movement has been detected
for a certain period of time, a call is sent to a monitoring office, flagging the possibility of a medical
emergency. In addition, the touchscreen and all control panels have the ability to flag the same type of
alert if the nominated button is pressed longer than three seconds. The smoke sensors are interfaced to
the Philips Dynalite system and will generate a similar type of alert back to the estates security in the
event of fire hazard. Multiple functions can be triggered when one of the alarms is activated such as all
lights are turned to full and the blinds and curtains opened. In addition, the occupants can wear a third-
party radio frequency (RF) pendant transmitter with a panic button. The third-party RF receiver can
detect this remote press (from within the unit) and communicate back through the Philips Dynalite
system, the need for an alarm to be triggered to the estates security.
Within the bathroom, there is a water solenoid that prevents water overflow or the likelihood of water
scalding if it‟s been accidentally left on. The third-party water level and temperature sensor provides
feedback to the Philips Dynalite control system so that it can turn off the water valve (R12) and triggers
an audible alarm so the occupant knows that the water temperature maybe too hot (or cold).
Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Aged Care Page 3 of 8
The Philips Dynalite touchscreen allows occupants to trigger the security system and can display pre-
defined messages from the monitoring office such as “RECREATION EVENTS ON MONDAY”. Several PANIC
buttons are configured on the lighting control panels, in addition to the RF pendant worn by each
occupant. When these buttons are pressed, the PANIC alarm alerts the monitoring office in addition to
illuminating all the lights in the unit. Furthermore, all the electrical appliances are switched off to
prevent the possibility of electrical fires.
the equipment
the system in operation
The lighting control panels mounted in each of the areas in the unit provide control for the lighting
groups and other related equipment in each immediate area. The touchscreens are capable of
controlling every area around the home from the one location.
A DDNP1501 network power supply can be used to supplement the network, as user interface requires
power that supplied to the network by the load controllers could be exceeded, due to the presence of
the Philips Dynalite touchscreen.
Page 4 of 8 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Aged Care
All blinds are connected to the DDRC810DT-GL in the following manner.
Any of the lighting control panels can be programmed to drive individual blinds or groups of blinds either
up or down from a single button press.
Floor heating is controlled by connecting the power directly to the output of the DDRC820FR due to the
high currents associated with these appliances. The Philips Dynalite system can then activate the floor
heating elements at programmed times. When the floor-heating element is active the temperature is
then monitored by the DTS900. This equipment is connected in the following way.
The water valves are connected to the DDRC810DT-GL in addition to feedback from the third party water
level sensor through the AUX input of this same device. The sensor used in this installation provides a
contact closure upon detecting pre-defined water levels.
N/OC N/C
DownUp
M
Do
wn
Up
Ne
utra
l Earth
240V Motor
Supply
C N/O N/C
Twin &
Earth
D+
SH
LD
GN
D
+15v
D-
AU
X
C
N/O
N/C
N/O
N/C
C
Micro
Processor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Step
Down
TRX
240V Control
Supply
Relay Coils
Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Aged Care Page 5 of 8
The third-party water temperature sensor is connected to another DDMC802‟s AUX input and is also
programmed to control the water valve in the same way as above. As all the devices are connected to
the same network, features can be triggered from any of the controllers.
A security system can be interfaced to Philips Dynalite through a dry contact closure to trigger the
required response from the lighting control system. Upon the ALARM or PANIC event, the security system
provides the Philips Dynalite system with a contact closure via one of the AUX inputs as described above.
This action then flags this event to the monitoring station and turns on all of the lights in the unit if
required.
Page 6 of 8 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Aged Care
Lights
Blinds
PANIC
Balcony
This same activity can be also be triggered from a lighting control panel that incorporates a programmed
PANIC button. This button can be programmed so that it must be pressed for at least three seconds to
avoid inadvertent or accidental triggers. When activated it signals the duress alarm to the security
system and/or the nurse call system by breaking the normally closed dry contact input, as shown above.
The Philips Dynalite touchscreen can control all the equipment connected to the Philips Dynalite system.
It does this by displaying simple pages of controls to the homeowner as shown below.
The Philips Dynalite lighting control panels throughout the unit are programmed to do more than
activate lights On and Off. Panels in main living areas such as the living/family room have the ability to
control blinds and the Nurse Call system. A typical display on the touchscreen is as follows.
The first button on this panel dims the lights in the room up and down. By
pressing and holding the button, this will cause the lights within the area to
dim up or down. The Blinds button will operate the blinds in that room in a
sequence of presses. The first press will raise the blinds, the second press
will stop the blinds and the third press will lower the blinds, in that order.
The PANIC button flags a call both to the Nurse Call system and security
system simultaneously. The Balcony button activates the lights on the
balcony. All button functions are completely configurable to suit the
required needs of the facility.
load controllers
One of the controllers used in this example project is the DDMC802GL. This
channels of this unit can be individually fitted with a range of different module types to suit the control
requirements. The following table details the different control modules used. This load schedule also
outlines all the devices found in the distribution board.
Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Aged Care Page 7 of 8
The DDMC802 mixed controller is used for dimming the lamps within the unit. One controller (Box 1) has
been fitted with a four-channel relay module (LSRM402 4 x 2A) and a four-channel leading edge dimming
module (LSDM402 4 x 2A). Further dimming controllers could be fitted with 2 x LSDM402 modules if there
was a requirement for more control channels.
The DDRC810DT-GL is used to switch Extra Low Voltage (ELV) loads such as the water valve solenoid
that‟s usually powered by a 24VDC power supply. ELV loads must never be switched on this same device
when switching 240VAC loads.
The DDRC820FR unit is a relay device used to switch the heavy control loads such a floor heating.
load schedule Load Controller Cct
Capacity Drawing Designator
Fixture Qty Load
DDMC802 Box 1 C1 240W D1 LV Downlight 50W 3 150W*
DDMC802 Box 1 C2 240W D2 LV Downlight 50W 4 200W
DDMC802 Box 1 C3 240W D3 LV Downlight 50W 4 200W
DDMC802 Box 1 C4 240W D4 LV Downlight 50W 2 100W
DDMC802 Box 1 C5 240W R1 T5 Linear fluorescent 18W 1 18W
DDMC802 Box 1 C6 240W R2 Incandescent uplight 50W 1 50W
DDMC802 Box 1 C7 240W
DDMC802 Box 1 C8 240W
DDRC810DT Box 2 C1 240W R3 Blind motor 1 500W
DDRC810DT Box 2 C2 240W R4 Blind motor 1 500W
DDRC810DT Box 2 C3 240W R5 Blind motor 1 500W
DDRC810DT Box 2 C4 240W R6 Blind motor 1 500W
DDRC810DT Box 2 C5 240W R7 Blind motor 1 500W
DDRC810DT Box 2 C6 240W R8 Blind motor 1 500W
DDRC810DT Box 2 C7 240W
DDRC810DT Box 2 C8 240W
DDRC810DT Box 3 C1 2400W R12 ELV water solenoid 1 500W
DDRC810DT Box 3 C2 2400W Air Conditioning ELV Dry contact 1 500W
DDRC810DT Box 3 C3 2400W
DDRC810DT Box 3 C4 2400W
DDRC810DT Box 3 C5 2400W
DDRC810DT Box 3 C6 2400W
DDRC810DT Box 3 C7 2400W
DDRC810DT Box 3 C8 2400W
DDRC820FR Box 4 C1 4800W R9 Floor heating 1 4800W
DDRC820FR Box 4 C2 4800W R10 Floor heating 1 4800W
DDRC820FR Box 4 C3 4800W R11 Floor heating 1 4800W
DDRC820FR Box 4 C4 4800W
DDRC820FR Box 4 C5 4800W
DDRC820FR Box 4 C6 4800W
Page 8 of 8 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Aged Care
*The maximum load current for any DDMC802 output is 2A. Each controller base/motherboard the total
load current should not exceed 10A and it is strongly recommended that each such controller be
protected with its own dedicated circuit breaker.
2011 Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Limited (ABN 97 095 929 829). All rights reserved. Not to be reproduced without permission. Dynalite, DyNet,
DLight and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Ltd.
application guide apartment
Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Apartment Page 1 of 5
This application guide contains information on:
Designing a lighting control system for a residence within a multi-dwelling environment
Basic lighting control functionality
Integration with access control
Considerations for common area lighting
From an aesthetic and lifestyle perspective, lighting control allows the homeowner to present their
residence in the best possible light, creating a scene to suit any occasion; from intimate late-night
dining, celebratory drinks with friends, to quietly reading a book on a rainy Sunday afternoon – no two
moods are the same.
A lighting control system can produce advantage on a practical & environmental level, one of the major
features that can be built into a lighting control system for residential application is that lights can be
automatically set to dimmed when turned on to 95% rather than 100% without any discernable difference
to the human eye. The immediate benefit is a significant saving from extending the lamp life from two
to three times.
This document describes basic lighting control system design for an apartment in a multi-dwelling
development. It also incorporates general notes on integration with a keyless access system and lighting
in the common areas of the building. For further information on home automation or to learn more
about integration with other services in a residential environment, see Philips Dynalite Application Design
Guide – The Luxury Home.
typical layout
Page 2 of 5 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Apartment
system outline All of the main areas of the apartment; living, dining, master bed and bathroom, have dimmed lighting
circuits. Light fittings within each of the lighting groups are low, as smaller groups allow for more
effective and efficient lighting design to create the perfect scene.
In addition to dimming in the main living areas, on/off controlled lighting is applied in utility areas such
as the laundry. The bathroom exhaust fan shares a circuit with a linear fluorescent fitting, ensuring it
does not remain on when lighting has been turned off and the bathroom unoccupied.
A basic design with small lighting loads is particularly well suited to the use of the economical Philips
Dynalite DIN series controllers, which occupy a smaller footprint than traditional wall-mounted dimmers.
This series of dimmers is designed for installation into a switchboard, next to the circuit breaker that is
supplying power to the controlled lighting circuit.
Lighting control panels are positioned in convenient locations throughout the apartment, providing the
occupant with many different options to change and adjust the control system. Each can be fitted with
an infrared receiver, which allows the use of hand-held remote controls to activate any of the stored
presets, removing the need for physical contact with the panel.
In the common areas outside the apartment, hallway lighting is being controlled via motion sensors
located adjacent to the elevator and fire exit on each level of the building. The access control system is
integrated to both the common area lighting and the individual apartment lighting control system,
meaning local apartment settings can be altered even before the occupant reaches the front door.
Simply accessing the building‟s elevator or even the main entry of the apartment complex can trigger the
lighting within the apartment itself.
the equipment
Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Apartment Page 3 of 5
the system in operation
control panels
Lighting control panels located around the apartment generally provide local control of lighting groups in
the immediate area. Buttons can be programmed to execute „one-touch press and hold‟ for fading the
light level or toggle functionality, for „ON‟ to „OFF‟.
The building‟s access control system is connected to the lighting control system in the apartment via the
auxiliary (AUX) input in one of the load controllers. It places the apartment into a „WELCOME‟ setting
when activated which, at its most basic level, would typically switch on the apartments entry lighting,
allowing the owner to return to the apartment safely and to create an inviting environment. Once inside,
using the “WELCOME” mode from a pushbutton panel can be used for setting entry, kitchen & dining
levels to 70% and master bedroom & living to 80%, for example.
This panel typically performs control functions for immediate areas and features
custom engraving detail to clearly identify each button function. In addition to
the „Welcome‟ setting, some examples of illustrated functionality on CP6;
ALL ON
All lights in the area come on to full, providing total illumination when
required, including in times of duress or emergency.
AWAY All lights are dimmed to „off‟ over 10 minutes. Subsequently, a
random sequence of varying light levels is activated in the living areas
of the house, giving the illusion of occupancy & providing a
preventative security measure when the house is unoccupied.
Lighting control panels CP1 and CP2 (left) are located bedside in the master
bedroom and provide the user with global control functions. For instance, the
„GOODNIGHT‟ preset could turn off all house lights over a period of one or two
minutes, ensuring that no lights are left on overnight, while giving other members
of the house time to get to bed before lights reach 0%. The „PATH‟ preset
illuminates a pathway from bedroom to bathroom that varies depending on the time
of day from the use of a network timer clock. For example, when this preset is used
between 10pm and 6am, ceiling lights in the bathroom turn on to 40% ensuring that
a late-night visit to the bathroom, does not disrupt sleeping members of the
household. At all other times, both ceiling and vanity lights are turned on to 90% and
100% respectively, providing near-full illuminance for clear visibility.
Lighting control panels in the remaining areas around the apartment are similarly configured to provide
both ambiance and functionality. For example, in the toddler‟s bedroom, a button is programmed to dim
lights down to „off‟ over a one-hour period. This is achieved with a staggered approach; first dimming
LAMP
GOODNIGHT
LIGHTS
PATH
BALCONY
CP6
CP1-CP2
ENTRY
AWAYWELCOME
BALCONY
LIVING
DINING
ALL ON
MEDIA
KITCHEN
HALL
Page 4 of 5 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Apartment
the lights in the bedroom down to 40% over two seconds, then to 20% over 20 minutes and finally to off,
over the remaining 40 minutes.
load controllers
Apartment-wide lighting control in this scenario is achieved using 2 x DDMC802 Multipurpose Controllers.
These controllers allows for each of the channels to be fitted with different styles of module control to
suit the requirement of the user and their apartment. The first (Box #1), contains two 4 x 2A dimming
module cards (LSDM402), for control of the low voltage incandescent fittings contained throughout the
living areas.
The second DDMC802 (Box #2) has been fitted with a 4 x 2A relay module card (LSRM402) for switched
on/off control of lighting in utility areas; bathroom, laundry and courtyard. A vacant slot in Box #2 has
been allowed for future requirement, provisioning for an additional four channels of dimming, relay or
fan control at a later stage, should the homeowner desire.
Integration with the building access control system is easily achieved through a dry contact output
connected to the AUX input of any Philips Dynalite controller; in this case, either of the two DDMC802
Multipurpose Controllers being employed. By adding a network timer clock DDTC001, can provide time-
based event control such as programming bedroom lights to turn on at 7:00am each day, Monday through
to Friday.
The DDNP1501 Network Power Supply (Box#3) is used to supplement power being provided to the network
by the load controllers (about 50mA per DDMC802) for the user interface such as pushbutton panels and
timer clocks. It is commonly used in situations where there are only a few load controllers with many
control panels required.
load schedule
Load Controller Cct Capacity Drawing Designator Fixture Qty Load
DDMC802 Box 1 Ch1 240W* D1 LV Downlight 50W 5 250W
DDMC802 Box 1 Ch2 240W D2 LV Downlight 50W 4 200W
DDMC802 Box 1 Ch3 240W D3 LV Downlight 50W 1 50W
DDMC802 Box 1 Ch4 240W D4 LV Downlight 50W 3 150W
DDMC802 Box 1 Ch5 240W D5 LV Downlight 50W 1 50W
DDMC802 Box 1 Ch6 240W D6 LV Downlight 50W 2 100W
DDMC802 Box 1 Ch7 240W D7 LV Downlight 50W 4 200W
DDMC802 Box 1 Ch8 240W D8 LV Downlight 50W 4 200W
DDMC802 Box 2 Ch1 240W R1 Incandescent 60W 1 60W
DDMC802 Box 2 Ch2 240W R2 Linear fluorescent 18W T5 1 18W
DDMC802 Box 2 Ch3 240W R3 CFL 15W 1 15W
DDMC802 Box 2 Ch4 240W Future capacity
Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Apartment Page 5 of 5
DDMC802 Box 2 Ch5
Future expansion slot for further plug-in module DDMC802 Box 2 Ch6
DDMC802 Box 2 Ch7
DDMC802 Box 2 Ch8
*The maximum load current for any one DDMC802 output is 2A. Each plug-in module, such as the LSDM402, should
never exceed a 5A total load. Where 2 x LSDM402 modules are used with a DDMC802 controller base/motherboard,
the total load current should not exceed 10A. It is strongly recommended that each such controller be protected
with a dedicated circuit breaker.
2011 Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Limited (ABN 97 095 929 829). All rights reserved. Not to be reproduced without permission. Dynalite, DyNet,
DLight and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Ltd.
application guide boardroom
Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Boardroom Page 1 of 4
This application guide contains information on: q
Control of workspace and decorative lighting
Control of a data projector via RS232
Control of audio-visual equipment via infrared (IR)
Control of a projection screen
Control of window curtains
Infrared (IR) remote control
Integration with a room booking calendar via the office Ethernet LAN
The boardroom is often the centrepiece of a workplace, communicating an overall image of the
company. During corporate presentations, precisely co-ordinated control of lighting, audio-visual
systems and other devices, such as motorised blinds and curtains, is vital. Boardrooms and meeting
rooms are often used for corporate hospitality, so it is desirable for a control system to accommodate
entertaining.
typical layout
Circuit 1
Circuit 2
Circuit 8
Circuit 4
Circuit 6Circuit 5
CP1 CP2
S1 S2
CP3
Circuit 3
Circuit 7
M1
M2
M3 M4 M5
M6
LEGEND
Incandescent Lamp
Bi-directional Motor
Cold Cathode Neon
User Control Panel
Multifunction Sensor
CP3
S2
system outline
The boardroom includes a cabinet that houses audio-visual equipment. A ceiling-mounted data projector
casts images on to a motorised screen, which is retracted when not in use to provide access to a
whiteboard.
Page 2 of 4 Philips Dynalite Application Guide - Boardroom
Within the area, different lighting groups are used individually or collectively to achieve certain scenes
that best suit the current use of the boardroom. Lighting over the audio-visual cabinet (circuit 1) and the
boardroom table (circuits 5 & 6) comprises narrow beam low voltage downlights, which enables precise
illumination over work areas. Downlights (circuits 2 & 3) are also used for general room lighting (circuits
2 & 3) and cold cathode neon, concealed in a ceiling coffer, provides perimeter lighting around the table
(circuit 4). Separate control of circuit 2 allows fittings near the screen to be dimmed when the
projector is being used.
Control panels are located adjacent to the entry doors (CP1 & CP2) and to the left of the whiteboard
(CP3). An infrared remote provides control for those seated at the boardroom table. Ceiling mounted
sensors (S1 & S2) pick up signals from the IR remote.
Each of the five windows is fitted with motorised curtain track to reduce natural light levels during
projector operation. Two control channels are used per curtain; one for direction of travel and the
other for motion. This enables partial closure of the curtains and de-energises the motors at the end of
travel so that motor limit switches are not relied upon constantly. The figure below illustrates the
motor control circuit.
ML
N
CH1 CH2 UP
DOWN
the equipment
Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Boardroom Page 3 of 4
the system in operation control panels
CP1 and CP2 are located next to the entry doors and provide control over lighting and curtains. CP3 is
located to the left of the whiteboard and has the same functionality as CP1 and CP2, with an additional
eight buttons for controlling the audio-visual system. Meeting members seated at the table use an IR
remote for control of lighting and other devices, as does the standing presenter.
sensors
Philips Dynalite DUS804C 360° universal sensors incorporate motion detect, infrared receiver and natural
light level detection capability (in this application the light level function would not be used). The
motion detect function is used to turn lighting off after a predetermined period of no activity, ensuring
that lights are not left on unnecessarily in an empty room and to notify the building management system
(BMS) that the room is no longer occupied. The IR receive function can be used to recall preset scenes
by a roving presenter with the hand-held remote.
gateways to other systems
AV equipment
Many popular AV system vendors have developed software integration tools that enable direct network
integration to the Dynalite system. Connection to the DyNet network is generally achieved using a
DTK622 connected to an RS232 port on the AV system. This support enables control objects within the
AV system, such as buttons and sliders, to be configured so they directly control and monitor functions
within the Philips Dynalite system. This also allows command to be sent from the AV system to the
lighting control system if required.
Where direct control of AV equipment is required from the Philips Dynalite system, integration to audio-
visual equipment can be implemented using a DIRTX8 Infrared Transmitter. This is a convenient and cost
effective method of integration, as most commercial and domestic AV products are supplied with an IR
port. The DIRTX8 has eight outputs, more than meeting the requirements of a typical application. It is
capable of replaying ‘macros’ of IR commands with appropriate delays and conditional logic in between
each step of the macro. In addition to the supplied library of IR commands, the DIRTX8 has an inbuilt
learner to record IR commands.
data projector
Control of the data projector is implemented using a DMNG232 Network Gateway configured to ASCII
mode. This allows bi-directional communication with the projector using text, via an RS232 port. Other
methods of interfacing include using a DIRTX8 infrared transmitter for projectors that are IR enabled.
Page 4 of 4 Philips Dynalite Application Guide - Boardroom
LAN services
EnvisionManager provides a DCOM integration platform that enables connectivity over TCP/IP across an
office or commercial LAN. With this approach the Philips Dynalite system can be readily controlled from
any PC installed on the LAN, using intranet web pages, or a range of software utilities available from
Philips Dynalite.
It also enables popular applications from Microsoft and many other software vendors to directly control
the system. An example may involve a reservation system within Microsoft Outlook or Lotus Notes that
sets a boardroom into an appropriate mode prior to a scheduled meeting.
load controllers
Two DLE405 4 x 5A dimmers provide eight channels of leading edge dimming for downlights and cold
cathode neon. Control of curtain motors and the projection screen is achieved using two DRC810DT-GL 8
x 10A relay controllers. The DRC810DT-GL employs dry contact changeover outputs, which are
particularly suitable for control of curtain motors.
load schedule
Load Controller Cct Capacity Drawing Designator Fixture Qty Load
DLE405 Box 1 C1 1200W Circuit 1 LV Downlight 50W 3 150W
DLE405 Box 1 C2 1200W Circuit 2 Downlight 100W 3 300W
DLE405 Box 1 C3 1200W Circuit 3 Downlight 100W 5 500W
DLE405 Box 1 C4 1200W Circuit 4 Cold Cathode Neon 1 600W
DLE405 Box 2 C1 1200W Circuit 5 LV Downlight 50W 11 550W
DLE405 Box 2 C2 1200W Circuit 6 LV Downlight 50W 3 150W
DLE405 Box 2 C3 1200W Circuit 7 Downlight 100W 3 300W
DLE405 Box 2 C4 1200W Circuit 8 Downlight 100W 5 500W
DRC810DT Box 3 C1 2400W M1 M1 curtain movement 1 25W
DRC810DT Box 3 C2 2400W M1 M1 curtain direction
DRC810DT Box 3 C3 2400W M2 M2 curtain movement 1 25W
DRC810DT Box 3 C4 2400W M2 M2 curtain direction
DRC810DT Box 3 C5 2400W M3 M3 curtain movement 1 25W
DRC810DT Box 3 C6 2400W M3 M3 curtain direction
DRC810DT Box 3 C7 2400W M4 M4 curtain movement 1 25W
DRC810DT Box 3 C8 2400W M4 M4 curtain direction
DRC810DT Box 4 C1 2400W M5 M5 curtain movement 1 25W
DRC810DT Box 4 C2 2400W M5 M5 curtain direction
DRC810DT Box 4 C3 2400W M6 M6 curtain movement 1 25W
DRC810DT Box 4 C4 2400W M6 M6 curtain direction
DRC810DT Box 4 C5 2400W Spare
DRC810DT Box 4 C6 2400W Spare
DRC810DT Box 4 C7 2400W Spare
DRC810DT Box 4 C8 2400W Spare
2011 Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Limited (ABN 97 095 929 829). All rights reserved. Not to be reproduced without permission. Dynalite, DyNet,
DLight and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Ltd. Microsoft Outlook is the registered trademark of
Microsoft Corporation. Lotus Notes is the registered trademark of Lotus Development Corporation.
application guide hotel ballroom
Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Hotel Ballroom Page 1 of 4
This application guide contains information on: q
DMX512 control of lighting in addition to ‘in-house’ control
Automatic room join functions when a space is changed by movable walls
Providing a locking mechanism for control panels in public spaces
The appearance of the ballroom is a major selling feature of a hotel. The lighting control system should
present the room in the best possible light. A ballroom generally accommodates a variety of operating
modes and hotel staff need to be able to quickly and easily reconfigure the room between functions, to
meet the differing needs of each client. To achieve this aim, the lighting designer would set up the
preset scenes for all likely applications and room combinations in advance.
Occasionally, stage sets, catwalks and other temporary equipment will be erected in the space, often
positioned in front of lighting control points, which makes it imperative to provide duplicate control
points in several locations and ‘smart’ sockets for portable control stations. The control system must be
flexible enough to allow third-party access for DMX512 theatrical control signals. For this to be
practical, the system must support ‘locking out’ of DMX control of emergency exits and other critical
areas.
As well as the requirement for flexibility and repeatability of lighting settings, the room must be as
energy-efficient as possible when not in use. To effectively render the colours in the room, decorative
light fittings and chandeliers typically utilise energy-hungry incandescent lamps. These have a short life
span and are often difficult to access, but are necessary to create the atmosphere that guests expect.
The control system should restrict use of expensive-to-operate lamps during times when only hotel staff
is present and use of expensive ‘public’ lighting should only be permitted by authorised persons.
typical layout
CP1
CP2
CP3
TS1 TS2 TS3
CP4 CP5 CP6
Pre Function Room
Service Corridor
Room A Room B Room C
Removable
WallRemovable
Wall
DMX2DMX1 DMX3SW1 SW2
Page 2 of 4 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Hotel Ballroom
system outline room joining
The ballroom has a pre-function area and two removable walls, which partition the main area into any
one of four combinations;
All partitions open: A + B + C
All partitions closed: A | B| C
Zone A as an area with B + C as a second area
Zone C as an area with A + B as a second area
For each of these four combinations, there may be several room ‘modes of operation’. Examples could
be ‘cocktail party’, ‘banquet’, ‘AV presentation’ and ‘dinner dance’. A preset such as ‘All On’ will vary
dramatically from one mode to another. For example, wall washers illuminating removable walls in one
setting would be a source of glare in another where the walls were removed. As a result, allowing for as
few as eight presets per combination, per mode, there is a requirement for over one hundred presets.
The system has automatic room join functions in the form of magnetic proximity switches mounted on
de-mountable partition tracks. These switches are connected to a dry contact interface unit (Dynalite
DDMIDC8) that automatically detects the presence or absence of removable walls. This unit then
configures the local control panels and the set of presets they use to suit the current status. This means
that with all of the partitions closed, each control panel would only control the lighting within that
space and if a partition were to be opened between two rooms, each of the local control panels would
work in parallel and control all of the lighting within the enlarged space. Similarly, if all partitions were
open, all control panels would work in parallel and control all of the lighting. Provision is made to
override the automatic partition status, which can be useful if one of the partitions is only partially in
place, such as when a buffet area is required during a conference.
DMX512 control
The casual use of theatrical lighting desks is enabled through the provision of dual port load controllers.
This allows a separate control network for DMX512 signals, while still allowing the use of the main
control system. The touchscreens provided have a password protected section that allows the selection
of the circuits for which DMX512 control is allowed. It is also possible to only allow partial control of a
circuit via DMX512, in the form of setting a ‘low limit’, which is useful for allowing partial control of
critical circuits such as egress lighting, but never allowing these circuits to be switched off or be dimmed
to an unacceptably low level.
Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Hotel Ballroom Page 3 of 4
the equipment
TS1 TS2
DLE1210
CH12
CH11
CH10
CH9
CH8
CH7
CH6
CH5
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
3 Phase
40 AMP
DLE1210
CH12
CH11
CH10
CH9
CH8
CH7
CH6
CH5
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
3 Phase
40 AMP
DLE1210
CH12
CH11
CH10
CH9
CH8
CH7
CH6
CH5
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
3 Phase
40 AMP
DLE1210
CH12
CH11
CH10
CH9
CH8
CH7
CH6
CH5
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
3 Phase
40 AMP
To other Load
Controllers
as required
DyNet
DMX512
DyNet
DMX512
DyNet
DMX512
CP6
Unlock
Lock
Network
TS3CP5CP4
Unlock
Lock
Network
CP3
Unlock
Lock
Network
CP2
Unlock
Lock
Network
CP1
Unlock
Lock
Network
DDMIDC8
SW2SW1
Unlock
Lock
Network
DMX Input
Room A
DMX Input
Room B
DMX Input
Room C
DMX512
Patch
Panel
DMX512
Output
the system in operation
control panels
CP1-CP6 provide preset recall buttons, as well as some additional features.
A key-switch allows the panel to be ‘locked out’, to prevent unauthorised
use. This is particularly important in a ballroom environment, where correct
placement of control panels often dictates that they will be in locations
accessible to the public. The control panels may also be remotely locked or
unlocked via a utility page on the touchscreens. A network socket is
included on each panel to allow easy connection of portable control panels
and hand-held programming units.
load controllers
The types and quantities of load controller required will vary substantially, depending on the size of the
ballroom and types of loads. Because of this, only a small example of load controllers has been included
in the system drawing. An important feature of the specified load controllers is that they incorporate
two serial ports, one for carrying the DyNet signal and the other for connection to a separate DMX512
network. The DyNet network can be used to provide ‘on-the-fly’ configuration of DMX features, via a
DMX utility page on the touchscreen.
1
2
3
4
OFF
CLEANER
Unlock
Lock
Network
CP1-CP6
Page 4 of 4 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Hotel Ballroom
touchscreens
TS1-TS3 provide preset recall options similar to other control panels, as well as other control and set-up
options including;
Manual control of each circuit using an on-screen fader
Reprogram the presets that are recalled from the other control panels
Remotely lock and unlock the other control panels
Set DMX control options
Override the state of the automatic room join system
Operate the lighting in other rooms, as well as it’s own room
Set timed events
Sample touch screen pages – incorporate logos, set security levels, preset control, scene editing, room join and lockout features
2011 Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Limited (ABN 97 095 929 829). All rights reserved. Not to be reproduced without permission. Dynalite, DyNet, DLight and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Ltd.
application guide lecture theatre
Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Lecture Theatre Page 1 of 5
This application guide contains information on:
Control of workspace and presentation lighting
Control of a data projector via RS232
Control of audio equipment via infrared (IR)
Integration with a building management system (BMS) using the LON protocol
Occupancy sensing
Infrared (IR) remote control
In a lecture theatre, a flexible control system is an essential part of the lighting. Lecture theatres need
to accommodate a wide range of uses and as a result, the demands on the lighting control system in this
type of application are surprisingly complex. The control system must maintain the most comfortable
lighting levels for a wide range of tasks, adapt to a number of room combinations, provide for safe
egress in case of an emergency, interface with other systems such as AV and BMS and of course, maintain
the aesthetics of the room and present the best possible appearance at all times.
Users often leave lights on when vacating the space, so it is desirable for the control system to turn off
lighting when the room is unoccupied. In a university or similar environment, there is often a BMS
responsible for access control and HVAC. To optimise running cost and reduce energy consumption, the
lighting control system should notify the BMS if the room is not in use and the airconditioning not
required.
typical layout
Circuit 1
Circuit 2
Circuit 4Circuit 3 Circuit 5
Circuit 7
Circuit 7
Circuit
6
Circuit 9
Circuits
10, 11, 12
Circuit 8Circuit 8
Circuit 8 Circuit 8
CP2
CP1
CP3
CP6
TS1
TS2
CP4
CP5
S1
S4
S2
S5
S3
S6
LEGEND
Incandescent LV
Track Lighting
Fluorescent Luminaire
Touch Screen
Control Panel
TS1
CP2
Page 2 of 5 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Lecture Theatre
system outline The lecture theatre would typically incorporate a projection room where data, video and other audio-
visual equipment would be housed. The lighting within the projection room (circuits 1 & 2) comprises
narrow beam downlights, which prevents distracting light spills into the lecture theatre during
presentations.
Within the body of the lecture theatre, the primary lighting would be provided by recessed fluorescent
luminaires (circuits 3, 4 & 5) fitted with electronic dimmable ballasts. There are a number of types of
dimmable ballasts including 2-Wire, 1-10V, DSI & DALI. Philips Dynalite controllers support all of these
control methods. In this case, DSI ballasts are used, as the individual control capability of DALI ballasts
is not needed. Control of the fluorescent luminaires is divided into three circuits to cater for the
theatre being occupied by varying group sizes and to allow for delivery of even levels of light to the
seating if the ceiling is raked.
There are a number of incandescent low voltage circuits in this design; downlights (circuits 6, 7 & 8)
provide safe lighting levels for walkways and doorways. Separate control of the podium area downlights
(circuit 9) allows for either AV projections or whiteboard presentations. Track spotlights (circuits 10, 11
& 12) allow for tightly controlled lighting of the presenter at a variety of lectern positions.
Sensors (S1-S6) are placed over podium and seating areas to receive signals from a hand-held infrared
remote control and to notify the control system when the space is unoccupied.
the equipment
Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Lecture Theatre Page 3 of 5
the system in operation lectern touchscreens The lectern touchscreens allow complete control of the system. The panel allows selection of the preset
lighting scenes, which have been programmed using CP2, as well as individual control of each circuit.
The system will be configured to ‘know’ which of the lectern positions is in use and dim up the
appropriate channel of track lighting. The touchscreen’s main menu allows navigation to three sections;
Lighting, Audio & Video, as well as preset scenes that provide operation of all three services from a
single action, eg a ‘play DVD’ button would simultaneously; dim the lighting, turn on the projector and
select the DVD player as the source, configure the audio routing system to use the DVD player as the
source and select the main speakers at the front of the room at a default volume level and play the
currently loaded DVD.
Sample Touchscreen Pages
control panels
CP1 is located next to the door in the projection room and controls the lighting
within the room. It selects the various preset levels needed for both set-up and
operation of the room. ‘UP’ and ‘DOWN’ keys allow fine adjustment. An
additional button manually selects ‘ALL OFF’, which switches all lights off in the
control room and in the lecture theatre, as well as triggering a transmission to
the BMS, which indicates that the room is no longer in use. A panic reset button
resets the panic condition on CP3-CP6.
HIGH
MED
LOW
OFF
ALL
OFF
PANIC
RESET
CP1
Page 4 of 5 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Lecture Theatre
1
2
3
4 MANUAL
CP2
CP2 is located in the projection room and
controls the lighting in the lecture theatre.
It includes manual slider controls and
provides one of the various methods by which
preset scenes can be programmed in Philips
Dynalite systems, having the ability to both
program and recall presets. The preset
scenes are recalled from TS1 and TS2 touchscreens at the two lectern positions in the front of the room.
This panel includes a manual slider fader for each lighting circuit. This type of panel provides a very
simple method for non-technical users to set up lighting presets. The slider faders also provide for ‘live’
adjustment of individual circuits. To program a preset, the operator first presses the ‘MANUAL’ button,
adjusts the slider faders until the desired lighting settings are achieved and the presses and holds down
the preset button to which the new settings are to be saved. Philips Dynalite call this programming
method ‘hold-down programming’. Alternative methods for programming presets include PC software,
LCD touchscreens, pushbutton programming panels and plug-in portable programmers.
CP3-CP6 are installed adjacent to lecture theatre doors. They have
two buttons, one to select the ‘ON’ preset and the other to select the
‘OFF’ preset. From these control panels, the ON scene would have a
relatively fast fade time, say three seconds. However, the fade time
for the OFF scene would be in the region of 15-20 seconds, ensuring that
the person operating the control panel has adequate time to leave the
room before the lighting fades out. All four of these control panels
would work in parallel and all would include panic switches. To reset
the panic condition, a ‘RESET PANIC’ switch is provided on CP1.
sensors
Dynalite DUS804C 360° universal sensors incorporate motion detect, infrared receiver and PE cell
capability (in this application the PE function would not be used). The motion detect function is used to
turn lighting off after a predetermined period of no activity, ensuring that lights are not left on
unnecessarily and to notify the BMS that the room is no longer occupied. The IR receive function is used
to recall preset scenes by a roving presenter with the hand-held remote.
gateways to other systems data projector
Control of the data projector is implemented using a DNG232 Network Gateway configured to ASCII
mode. This allows bi-directional communication with the projector using text, via an RS232 port. Other
methods of interfacing include using a DIRTX8 infrared transmitter for projectors that are IR enabled.
Emergency
Use Only
ON
OFF
CP3-CP6
Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Lecture Theatre Page 5 of 5
audio controller
Integration to audio equipment is implemented using a DIRTX8 Infrared Transmitter. This is a convenient
and cost effective method of integration as most commercial and domestic AV products are supplied
with an IR port. The DIRTX8 has eight outputs, more than meeting the requirements of a typical
application. It is capable of replaying ‘macros’ of IR commands with appropriate delays and conditional
logic in between each step of the macro. In addition to the supplied library of IR commands, the DIRTX8
has an inbuilt learner to record IR commands.
Other methods of interfacing with audio controllers include using a DNG232 Network Gateway for
equipment that has an RS232 port. Some AV controllers have an RS485 port, which allows direct
connection to the Philips Dynalite RS485 network. Most leading AV control systems include libraries that
enable control of Philips Dynalite systems.
building management system
Integration with the BMS is achieved with the DDNI-LON Network Interface. This device translates Philips
Dynalite’s DyNet protocol to LON protocol, using the standard lighting SNVTs (standard network variable
type). Whenever the door entry panels are used to switch the lights on, or the motion sensors detect
motion or any absence of motion, the DDNI-LON notifies the BMS, which in turn sets the airconditioning
to the appropriate state. There are several other common methods of interfacing with a BMS, ranging
from simple interfaces such as dry contact closures, to high-level interfaces, such as DCOM over TCP/IP.
load controllers
The controllers are a DBC410 (4 x 10A ballast controller) and DLE1205 (12 x 5A leading edge dimmer).
For this installation, controllers with individual circuit breakers on each circuit have been selected. This
is to allow for simplified connection and testing of emergency lighting systems (see separate Technical
Guide: Emergency Lighting).
load schedule Load Controller Cct Capacity Drawing Designator Fixture Qty Load
DLE1205 Box 1 C1 1200W Circuit 1 LV Downlight 50W 6 300W
DLE1205 Box 1 C2 1200W Circuit 2 LV Downlight 50W 2 100W
DLE1205 Box 1 C3 1200W Circuit 6 LV Downlight 50W 11 550W
DLE1205 Box 1 C4 1200W Circuit 7 LV Downlight 50W 14 700W
DLE1205 Box 1 C5 1200W Circuit 8 LV Downlight 50W 4 200W
DLE1205 Box 1 C6 1200W Circuit 9 LV Downlight 50W 4 200W
DLE1205 Box 1 C7 1200W Circuit 10 Track
DLE1205 Box 1 C8 1200W Circuit 11 Track
DLE1205 Box 1 C9 1200W Circuit 12 Track
DLE1205 Box 1 C10 1200W Spare
DLE1205 Box 1 C11 1200W Spare
DLE1205 Box 1 C12 1200W Spare
DBC410 Box 2 C1 2400W Circuit 3 Fluorescent 2 x 36W 6 432W
DBC410 Box 2 C2 2400W Circuit 4 Fluorescent 2 x 36W 6 432W
DBC410 Box 2 C2 2400W Circuit 5 Fluorescent 2 x 36W 9 648W
DBC410 Box 2 C4 2400W Spare
2011 Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Limited (ABN 97 095 929 829). All rights reserved. Not to be reproduced without permission. Dynalite, DyNet,
DLight and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Ltd. LON is the registered trademark of Echelon Corporation.
application guide luxury home
Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Luxury Home Page 1 of 11
This application guide contains information on: q
Basic lighting control functionality
Integration with airconditioning
Integration with security systems
Integration with audio-visual systems
Control of equipment such as blinds, ceiling fans, louvres, irrigation systems and floor heating
Remote control through hand-held control units, the Internet or over the telephone
The typical smart home comprises several integrated systems transparently working together to provide
convenience and security to the homeowner. Some of the resulting functionality includes:
Different lighting scenes and moods such as WELCOME, GOODBYE or GOODNIGHT that can be
activated from any keypad, wired or wireless touchscreen or remote control
Control of many different styles of lighting sources such as LED, incandescent or fluorescent
lamps, from the push of one button.
Control of lighting, music and airconditioning on the same lighting control keypad
The drawing of blinds and extinguishing of lights to occur when the security system is armed
The activation of lights and music to welcoming levels in desired areas, when the security system
is disarmed
The activation of key internal lights, blinds opened and keypads frozen while the external lights
flash on and off to attract attention, if the PANIC button is pressed or the security system is
triggered
Different profile actions to occur when the security system is disarmed by different members of
the family
The home to appear occupied when nobody’s present through the activation of lights and other
equipment at different times of the day or at random
Floor heating, irrigation systems and pool plant, garage doors, ceiling and exhaust fans, heated
towel rails or external louvers to be integrated together with the lighting control, so that it will
automatically be turned on/off through timer control or from one lighting control panel.
Monitoring the home through cameras over the Internet
Activation of all egress pathways when smoke sensors have been tripped in addition to initiating
the PANIC alarm on the security system
Allowing irrigation systems to operate only when the soil is too dry, regardless of any ongoing
timer program
Turning lights on when presence is detected and turning them off after a nominated time of no
presence
Cinema style control in the Home Theatre room when the MOVIE button is selected: sequential
activation of the projector, dimming the lights over time, drawing open the drapes as the
projector screen lowers into position and selecting the appropriate movie title or sound track on
the DVD player
Page 2 of 11 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Luxury Home
The Philips Dynalite control system interfaces to the above equipment through common integration such
as RS232, RS485, Infra Red and TCP/IP (Ethernet) through the DMNG232, DNG485, DIRTX8 and DNG100BT
network gateways, respectively. Simple equipment such as floor heating, irrigation solenoids and
airconditioning are usually controlled through relay or contact closure respectively.
typical layout
Lower Ground Floor
Ground Floor
First Floor
Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Luxury Home Page 3 of 11
system outline
All the main living areas such as the Living, Dining, Bedrooms and Bathrooms have dimmed lighting. Light
fitting numbers are kept low (around 5-6 low-voltage down lights per group of lights). Smaller groups
allow for more effective and efficient lighting design and control (i.e. D1, D2 etc), in addition to
facilitating the use of the DIN series controllers. The Philips Dynalite DIN series controllers occupy a
smaller footprint and require less real estate in distribution boards. The home’s distribution boards can
be found on the ground floor and the first floor, in well-ventilated areas. This is done to minimise cable
runs. On-Off lighting control is applied in utility areas such as the Laundry Storeroom and Garage (i.e.
R1, R2 etc.) as they do not require dimming of the lighting. Lighting control panels are placed in each
room (i.e. CP1, CP2 and CP12). These panels allow the homeowner control for such functions as “PANIC”
and “GOODNIGHT”. Other panels such as those by the front door (CP6) allow system wide presets such as
“GOODBYE” and “AWAY”. The latter preset emulates occupancy when nobody’s home - as a preventative
security measure. The home also has LED lamps in the stairwell and pool areas for color changing effects
and general mood setting.
In addition to fundamental lighting, the Philips Dynalite system also controls other equipment such the
ceiling fan in the master bedroom, bathroom run-on exhaust fans, garage doors, blinds and external
louvers. The timers within the Philips Dynalite system allow periodic operation of pool cleaners, floor
heating and heated towel rails. Sensors in the bathrooms activate lights when someone enters the space
then turn everything off after a nominated period of vacancy, including any heat lamps or exhaust fans
that were left running. Nominated sensors determine the amount of light present in the home and
control the external louvers and blinds to ease the burden on the airconditioning system.
The Philips Dynalite control system also interfaces to the security system so that all the internal lights
are activated upon alarm or duress and all external lights flash periodically to attract attention from
passers-by. Furthermore, all controlled blinds and louvers are opened allowing greater visibility of the
inside of the home – from the outside. In addition to this, all internal lighting control panels are frozen –
preventing lights from being switched off. Strategically placed PANIC buttons are configured on the
lighting control panels. When pressed for a few seconds these allow the Philips Dynalite system to flag a
duress alarm to the security system. The Philips Dynalite security interface also allows personalised
settings to be applied throughout the home upon security system disarm by different family members.
For example, a family member will disarm the security system with their designated PIN code at the
front door location. A pathway of dimmed light illuminates the way to the first floor bedrooms (D11 at
80%, D7 at 80%, D12 at 95%, D27 and D28 at 80%). If the sensor in the bathroom detects that ample light
is present then only the staircase lights (D12 at 80%) are activated to minimise the use of energy and
exploit ambient daylight entering the home. At night, in addition to the above, the backyard lights (D18,
R15) are also activated to provide a greater sense of security and discourage any would be intruder. This
also allows the darkest corners of the home to be lit and inspected at a glance. The Philips Dynalite
system also communicates with the multi-room audio system, channeling their favorite music track to
the lounge and first floor sitting rooms only. The ducted airconditioning system is also instructed to
Page 4 of 11 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Luxury Home
commence operation at a pre-programmed set point. Different set points are chosen for different times
of the year.
Upon arming the security system, the Philips Dynalite system immediately activates a “lived-in” profile
sequence of events. This activity activates lights and audio in different parts of the home, at nominated
(or random) times, making the home appear occupied from the outside.
The smoke sensors throughout the home are also interfaced to the Philips Dynalite control system. As
these sensors are physically interconnected, a trip on any one sensor necessarily trips all others, which in
turn also activates the PANIC scene as described above.
The irrigation solenoids are also controlled by Dynalite relays at different times of the day and different
seasons from the built-in 365-day timer. When the third party moisture sensor detects the presence of
adequate moisture in the soil, the timer program is overridden and the garden is not watered.
A third-party wireless touchscreen allows each family member complete control over the Philips Dynalite
system as does the Philips Dynalite wall touchscreen. These units typically offer Ethernet connectivity,
allowing their pages to be displayed not only in the home through a wireless router yet also over the
World Wide Web. Different control actions can be sent from these units such as control of light levels in
different rooms, audio source selection, timer programs for floor heating and irrigation systems. In
addition to this, web cameras can also be incorporated to allow viewing of different areas around the
home. Many of these audio control commands can be replicated on the same Philips Dynalite lighting
control keypads in each room in addition to airconditioning settings.
The home theatre room has audio-visual devices such as a DVD player, projector and audio
amplifier/receiver. The Philips Dynalite system can co-ordinate the operation of these devices through
the press of one MOVIE button on the lighting control keypad in that room. This will commence dimming
the lights (D2 to 5% over 30 seconds) to a low level. The projector screen is then controlled to lower into
position, behind the closed curtains (R3, R4). When the screen is in position, the curtains are controlled
to open (R5, R6). All along, the projector has been activated and warming up. As the curtains are drawn,
the opening credits and title of the selected movie appear on the lowered screen as the Philips Dynalite
system has instructed the DVD player to start playing its disc in addition to instructing the receiver to
channel the DVD source out into the speakers in that room. When the movie concludes, the homeowner
presses the END button either on the lighting control keypad or the wireless touchscreen to initiate a
reverse sequence of the above events. The third-party universal remote control can also be used to
achieve this and other functions as it too can execute similar functionality. All the Philips Dynalite
lighting control keypads and sensors are equipped with infrared receivers so that any sequence of codes
transmitted from the universal remote are received and acted upon in the same way as a button press.
Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Luxury Home Page 5 of 11
the equipment (ground floor distribution board only)
the system in operation
The lighting control panels around the home provide control for the lighting groups and other relayed
equipment in each immediate area. The touchscreens are capable of controlling every area around the
home.
N/OC N/C
DownUp
M
Do
wn
Up
Ne
utra
l Earth
240V Motor
Supply
C N/O N/C
Twin &
Earth
D+
SH
LD
GN
D
+15v
D-
AU
X
C
N/O
N/C
N/O
N/C
C
Micro
Processor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Step
Down
TRX
240V Control
Supply
Relay Coils
Page 6 of 11 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Luxury Home
The DDNP1501 (Box#3) is utilised to supplement the network power supply, as the number of lighting
control panel power requirement exceeds that supplied to the network by the two load controllers
(Box#1 through to Box#8), due to the presence of the Philips Dynalite touchscreen.
All blinds and curtains are connected to the DDRC810DT-GL in the following manner.
Lighting control panels can be programmed to drive the blinds either up or down by manipulating the
outputs of the associated controller in the desired manner.
Floor heating is controlled by connecting the power directly to the output of the DDRC820FR due to the
high currents associated with these appliances. The Philips Dynalite system can then activate the floor
heating elements at programmed times. When the floor-heating element is active the temperature is
then controlled by its own specific thermostat. This equipment is connected in the following way.
Ceiling fans are controlled by Philips Dynalite through the DDMC801 controller, fitted with the LSFCM202
and connected in the following way.
Four levels of control are possible through the LSFCM202. Four lighting control panel buttons are
dedicated to the four settings HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW and OFF respectively.
The irrigation solenoids are connected to the DDRC810DT in addition to feedback from the third-party
moisture sensor through the AUX input of this same device. The third-party moisture sensor used in this
installation outputs a contact closure upon detecting pre-defined moisture levels.
Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Luxury Home Page 7 of 11
Although the irrigation system will operate during programmed times, the moisture sensor input can
override this until such time that moisture levels drop.
The security system has been interfaced to Philips Dynalite through simple dry contact closure upon
different security events. Upon the ALARM situation, the security system provides the Philips Dynalite
system with a contact closure via one of the AUX inputs as described above. This action then triggers a
sequence events starting with activation of all the lights in the home. Immediately afterwards, all blinds
are drawn while the lighting control keypads are frozen.
This same activity can be also be triggered from a lighting control panel that incorporates a programmed
PANIC button. This button must be pressed for at least three seconds to avoid inadvertent or accidental
presses. When activated it signals a duress alarm to the security system by breaking the normally closed
dry contact input, as shown below.
Two types of airconditioning systems can be found in this home, ducted and split. Both systems typically
interface to the Dynalite control system through dry contact closure. The home has ducted air
conditioning throughout with separate split units in the living and master bedroom areas, although this is
not depicted in the diagrams above for simplicity. Both systems usually require add-on modules available
from the vendor. Connection occurs via the DDRC810DT-GL. One of these units can be found in both
distribution board and is used specifically for ELV switching only. Light control panels in the master
bedroom (CP20,21), bedrooms (CP16,17,14), living room (CP11) and sitting room (CP13) incorporate an
Page 8 of 11 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Luxury Home
AC button which turns the airconditioning on and off at different set-points for different times of the day
and year.
Home theatre equipment is connected and controlled by the Philips Dynalite system both through the
DIRTX8 with infrared commands and through the DNG232 with serial RS232 commands in the manner
shown below.
Each of these devices is programmed to transmit the necessary codes in the appropriate sequence. For
example, the DMNG232 will first transmit the STANDBY code to the home theatre receiver. Subsequently
the commands to select the desired source (DVD) and zone are sent one after the other. In addition to
this, the volume is gradually increased to attain the true cinema experience. Simultaneously, the Philips
Dynalite control system has been dimming the lights (D2) over 30 seconds and lowering the projector
screen.
The wireless touchscreen can control all the equipment connected to the Philips Dynalite system. It does
this by displaying HTML pages of controls that reside on the DNG100BT web page server. These pages are
transmitted wirelessly throughout the home via the connected third-party wireless router. In addition to
this, several web cameras are also accessible from these pages and allow inspection of different areas
around the home both from within the home or on any web browser over the internet, through the
homeowner’s connection. The DMNG100BT translates Ethernet into DyNet and accordingly provides
Internet connectivity to the Dynalite control system. The DMNG100BT and wireless router connections
are depicted in the diagram below.
Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Luxury Home Page 9 of 11
Off
CD
Air Con
Relax
Blinds
Tuner
iPod
The Philips Dynalite lighting control panels throughout the home are programmed to do more than
activate lights On and Off. Panels in main living areas such as the living/family room have the ability to
control lights, audio, blinds and airconditioning. This panel (CP11) is shown below.
The first button on the first column activates the Relax mood setting in this area. This setting entails
dimming the main lights to a lower level (D17,16 to 85% over 5 sec). If a different lighting level is desired
then the up and down arrow buttons can be pressed to either raise or lower the current light setting
respectively. In addition to this a preselected music track is channelled into the living room while the
blinds are drawn down. The Air Con button can start or stop the airconditioning in that area. According
to the time of year, different temperature presets are chosen automatically. The Blinds button, when
pressed, changes the function of the up and down arrow buttons to inch up or down the blinds. The
second button column allows the homeowner to select a music source for listening in the living room
through the multi-room audio system. The Off button extinguishes all volume and de-activates source
equipment. The third button column provides the transport controls for the audio selection. The buttons
are (in order): Play, Stop, Pause, Skip FWD, Skip REV, Fast FWD. The up and down arrow buttons on the
column, control the volume in the living room.
The engraving on each button is back-lit allowing the
homeowner to make the correct selection every time.
Furthermore, the LED indicators on each button can be
programmed to flash at different frequencies during
different activities such as Play, Blinds up and Blinds
down.
Page 10 of 11 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Luxury Home
The bed side panels (CP20,21) allow control of lighting in the room and
surrounding areas. The Fan button toggles the ceiling fan between HIGH to
MEDIUM to LOW to OFF when pressed in succession. The LED indicator for
this button flashes intermittently, indicating that the cycle of fan control in
currently underway. The DNstairs button illuminates a dim path from the
master bedroom to the downstairs kitchen (D25 to 20%, D27,D28 and D12 to
40%, D10 to 50%) when pressed after 11pm. At other times, this button only
activates the lights in the adjacent hallway (D27 to 80%).
The Goodnight button (with the engraved moon icon) shuts the home down if
pressed for longer than three seconds. This press delay is done to avoid
accidental activation as for the adjacent Panic button (with the engraved
bell icon). The Goodnight setting turns Off everything in and around the home, connected to the Philips
Dynalite system. In addition, blinds are drawn closed and the airconditioning system is turned off. The
Philips Dynalite control system then indicates to the security system that the home’s perimeter (front
door and window reed switches and glass break sensors) is to be sealed, securing the home while
everyone sleeps.
load controllers
The following load schedule outlines the devices found in the ground floor distribution board. The
DDMC801 mixed controller is used for dimming resistive type lamps within the apartment. One
controller (Box 3) has been fitted with a four-channel relay module (LSRM401 4 x 1A) and a four-channel
leading edge dimming module (LSDM401 4 x 1A). The other controllers have been fitted with 2 x LSDM401
modules. The DDRC810DT-GL is used to switch Extra Low Voltage (ELV) loads such as the irrigation
solenoids that are usually powered by a 24VDC power supply. ELV loads must never be switched on this
same device when switching 240VAC loads also.
load schedule for distribution board on ground floor
Load Controller Cct Capacity
Drawing Designator
Fixture Qty Load
DDMC802 Box 1 C1 240W D1 LV Downlight 50W 2 100W
DDMC802 Box 1 C2 240W D2 LV Downlight 50W 6 300W*
DDMC802 Box 1 C3 240W D3 Incandescent 50W uplight 1 50W
DDMC802 Box 1 C4 240W D4 LV Downlight 50W 2 100W
DDMC802 Box 1 C5 240W D5 LV Downlight 50W 2 100W
DDMC802 Box 1 C6 240W D6 LV Downlight 50W 4 200W
DDMC802 Box 1 C7 240W D7 LV Downlight 50W 3 150W
DDMC802 Box 1 C8 240W D8 LV Downlight 50W 4 200W
DDMC802 Box 2 C1 240W D9 LV Downlight 50W 6 300W
DDMC802 Box 2 C2 240W D10 LV Downlight 50W 2 100W
DDMC802 Box 2 C3 240W D11 LV Downlight 50W 2 100W
DDMC802 Box 2 C4 240W D12 Incandescent 50W uplight 2 100W
DDMC802 Box 2 C5 240W D13 LV Downlight 50W 2 100W
DDMC802 Box 2 C6 240W D14 LV Downlight 50W 1 50W
DDMC802 Box 2 C7 240W D15 LV Downlight 50W 1 500W
DDMC802 Box 2 C8 240W D16 LV Downlight 50W 4 200W
DDMC802 Box 3 C1 240W D17 LV Downlight 50W 4 200W
DDMC802 Box 3 C2 240W D18 LV Downlight 50W 4 200W
DDMC802 Box 3 C3 240W D19 LV Downlight 50W 2 100W
WIR
DNstairs
Fan
Balcony
Reading
Lights
Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Luxury Home Page 11 of 11
DDMC802 Box 3 C4 240W D21 Incandescent 50W uplight 3 150W
DDMC802 Box 3 C5 240W R12 Exhaust fan 1 240W
DDMC802 Box 3 C6 240W R13 Exhaust fan 1 240W
DDMC802 Box 3 C7 240W R17 CFL Bick light 15W 1 15W
DDMC802 Box 3 C8 240W R10 LV Dowlight 50W 2 100W
DDRC1220FR Box 4 C1 2400W R8 LV Downlight 50W 1 50W
DDRC1220FR Box 4 C2 2400W R1 CFL Brick light 15W 4 60W
DDRC1220FR Box 4 C3 2400W R9 LV Downlight 50W 2 100W
DDRC1220FR Box 4 C4 2400W R11 T5 Linear Fluorescent 18W 3 54W
DDRC1220FR Box 4 C5 2400W R14 Incandescent 100W 4 400W
DDRC1220FR Box 4 C6 2400W R15 Incandescent 100W 2 200W
DDRC1220FR Box 4 C7 2400W R16 CFL Brick light 15W 3 45W
DDRC1220FR Box 4 C8 2400W R28 CFL Bollard 10W 6 60W
DDRC1220FR Box 4 C9 2400W R29 DFL Bollard 10W 10 100W
DDRC1220FR Box 4 C10 2400W R18 TF Linear fluorescent 1 18W
DDRC1220FR Box 4 C11 2400W
DDRC1220FR Box 4 C12 2400W
DDRC810DT Box 5 C1 240W R3 Projector screen motor 1 500W
DDRC810DT Box 5 C2 240W R4 Projector screen motor 1 500W
DDRC810DT Box 5 C3 240W R5 Curtain motor 1 500W
DDRC810DT Box 5 C4 240W R6 Curtain motor 1 500W
DDRC810DT Box 5 C5 240W R23 Blind motor 1 500W
DDRC810DT Box 5 C6 240W R24 Blind motor 1 500W
DDRC810DT Box 5 C7 240W R25 Blind motor 1 500W
DDRC810DT Box 5 C8 240W R26 Blind motor 1 500W
DDRC810DT Box 6 C1 2400W R27 Blind motor 1 500W
DDRC810DT Box 6 C2 2400W R28 Blind motor 1 500W
DDRC810DT Box 6 C3 2400W 1 500W
DDRC810DT Box 6 C4 2400W 1 500W
DDRC810DT Box 6 C5 2400W 1 500W
DDRC810DT Box 6 C6 2400W 1 500W
DDRC810DT Box 6 C7 2400W 1 500W
DDRC810DT Box 6 C8 2400W 1 500W
DDRC810DT Box 7 C1 ELV R7 Pulsed dry contact** 1 ELV
DDRC810DT Box 7 C2 ELV R25 ELV Irrigation solenoid 1 ELV
DDRC810DT Box 7 C3 ELV R26 ELV Irrigation solenoid 1 ELV
DDRC810DT Box 7 C4 ELV R27 ELV Irrigation solenoid 1 ELV
DDRC810DT Box 7 C5 ELV 1 ELV
DDRC810DT Box 7 C6 ELV 1 ELV
DDRC810DT Box 7 C7 ELV 1 ELV
DDRC810DT Box 7 C8 ELV 1 ELV
DDRC820FR Box 8 C1 4800W R19 Pool cleaner 1 4800W
DDRC820FR Box 8 C2 4800W R20 Pool water jet pump 1 4800W
DDRC820FR Box 8 C3 4800W R21 Pool waterfall pump 1 4800W
DDRC820FR Box 8 C4 4800W R22 Other pool plant 1 4800W
DDRC820FR Box 8 C5 4800W
DDRC820FR Box 8 C6 4800W
*The maximum load current for any DDMC802 output is 2A. Each plug-in module such as the DDLM102
should never have more than 2A load connected to it. When 8 x DDLM102 modules are used with a
DDMC802 controller base/motherboard the total load current should not exceed 10A and it is strongly
recommended that each such controller be protected with its own dedicated circuit breaker.
**Applies to certain garage door models that require a pulsed dry contact to operate up, stop and down
in that order.
2011 Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Limited (ABN 97 095 929 829). All rights reserved. Not to be reproduced without permission. Dynalite, DyNet, DLight and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Ltd.
application guide office
Dynalite Application Guide – Office Page 1 of 8
This application guide contains information on: q
Providing workspace lighting using dimmable DALI HF fluorescent ballasts
Using existing PCs and LAN for user control in open plan office space
Automatic control using occupancy sensing
Daylight harvesting of natural light
Dynamic LED signage
Interfacing to a building management system (BMS) using DCOM over TCP/IP
Lighting control plays a strategic role in the operation of a modern office environment. It ensures that
the visual performance of the lighting equipment is appropriate to the needs of the occupants, while
simultaneously conserving energy. By day, illumination levels can be maintained dynamically, both to
comply with relevant lighting and energy codes and to ensure optimum worker performance. After
hours, the control is more aggressive toward energy conservation, but still accommodates the needs of
maintenance and security staff and late night workers. It is no longer socially acceptable or
commercially astute to burn all of the lighting throughout the day and for half the night, yet a feeling of
personal security and well being must be protected.
Workstations co-exist with traditional enclosed offices in many buildings. Appropriate strategies for the
lighting controls must be determined according to the specific needs of each application. The
workstations typically share an array of fluorescents overhead while corridors, lobbies, meeting rooms
and amenities can have a variety of local lighting types and technologies.
typical layout
up
downStaff Amenities Exec Office
Toilet
Floor Distribution Board
Meeting
Instant HWS
Lift
Toilet
S5 S6
S3 S4
S1
S10
S9
S2
Circuit 1
Circuit 1
Circuit 1
Circuit 1
Circuit 1
Circuit 1
Circuit 1
Circuit 2
Circuit 3
Circuit 4
Circuit 5
Circuit 6
Circuit 8
Circuit 7
Circuit 9
CP1
CP3
CP2
Circuit 10
Circuits 11 - 14LED Sign
Circuit 12
S8
S7
LEGEND
Incandescent LV
Fluorescent Luminaire
Hot Water Service
SensorS6
Page 2 of 8 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Office
system outline
A typical office suite could be a single office or just one floor of many that is tenanted by a large
organisation. Entry areas are accessible to visitors and clients, hence track or downlights would be found
here, in addition to dynamic LED signage that highlights the company logo.
The open plan area would have fluorescent luminaires that are laid out in a regular pattern to achieve
uniformity. They are often wired in large blocks and inefficiently switched the same way (this is
inevitable where the design is based on an empty floorplan). For undimmed installations, the cabling
would at least be run parallel to windows, enabling a row of edge luminaires to be daylight switched by
the control system.
The evolution of addressable fluorescent ballasts has made it possible to treat individual luminaires as a
dynamic component of the space, with lighting over workstations controlled individually or in small
numbers. This is becoming cost-effective considering the frequent rearrangement that takes place in
many organisations. The layout appears to be conventional, but the unique response from individual
lamps is achieved electronically. In corridors and entry foyers, identical lighting troffers can be treated
in an entirely different manner to those above the desks of employees. They might also be found in
staff amenities areas, where their purpose is different again, due to the low occupancy of the space.
The meeting room shows four circuits of downlights, while the fringe areas including staff amenities
have just a few essential lights that could be of almost any type.
Operation of a typical office would be;
entry lobby
The first person to arrive would be detected by the nearby DUS804C motion sensor or would be required
to initiate a system response by pressing the „ARRIVAL‟ button of an adjacent wall control panel.
Typically, two channels of a DDRC820FR relay controller would activate the entry downlights. This
lighting could be interleaved so that half-switching is implemented outside normal hours. Philips
Dynalite controllers have the intelligence to rotate lamp usage to equalise the operating hours of the
lamps and reduce maintenance costs. ELV downlights might also be included to provide an attractive
feature at the reception counter. The appropriate Philips Dynalite controller would be a leading-edge or
trailing-edge dimmer, depending on the type of lighting transformer used. Increasingly, specifiers are
using digitally-controlled transformers that can be matched to standard Philips Dynalite ballast
controllers. Innovative display panels are available using LED or fluorescent panels that drift through the
spectrum. Dynamic colour sequences can be programmed into the DDLEDC401 LED Controller. When the
system is in its „normal‟ day mode, the selected sequence can then be initiated.
Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Office Page 3 of 8
Fluorescent lights are generally the most numerous throughout an office installation. The choice of
internal components is fundamental to the selection of the Philips Dynalite system components to
control them.
Depending on the budget, a degree of sophistication is now available. Dimmable office lighting is
becoming more common for both ergonomic and energy-conscious applications. The ability to dim has a
direct bearing on the aesthetics and comfort of the space and is also significant in conserving energy. A
luminaire that can be switched on and off electronically, has a wide range of control possibilities. It can
also eliminate the expensive practice of physically modifying the electrical wiring each time the office
fit-out changes.
executive offices
These are often as elaborate as a fully-featured conference room. Multifunction sensors and wall
mounted user control panels may be used in combination to provide full architectural control, depending
on the complexity of the lighting scenes required. As this is also a working office, PC desktop access to
the Philips Dynalite network might be appropriate, as well as wall mount control panels.
small offices
Small offices don‟t consume a great deal of energy but collectively the total energy of many small
offices is significant. In a refurbishment that includes individual offices, it is not cost-effective to hard-
wire a conventional switch for just two or three luminaires. Increasingly though, it is becoming
mandatory for a local control device to be made available. Software added to the Desktop PC that can
access the lighting control system can allow each user to control their own local environment as there is
no additional hardware required.
open plan offices
A variety of approaches are available, subject to the luminaire control gear and to local energy
regulations. Networked DyNet sensors may be used to provide saturation coverage of open plan areas.
All lights might be kept „ON‟ during a normal day and be progressively allowed to dim and extinguish
after hours as staff leave. Multifunction sensors read the value of illuminance in their field of view.
This can be harnessed to provide stepless dimming control; both to maintain a pre-determined light level
and to capitalise on the availability of natural light. Philips Dynalite sensors support multiple functions
allowing presence detection and natural light level measurement from the one device.
staff amenities
In these areas, occupancy sensing is usually appropriate with long delay times. The luminaires might be
the conventional office type or any combination of aesthetic creations. If toilet lights are to be simply
switched, they can share a common relay channel. If some of the lighting is extra low voltage halogen,
however, it should be managed by a leading-edge or trailing-edge dimmer as appropriate, to enable soft
starting and voltage regulation to the lamp. An alternative approach is to have the lights „ON‟ during
Page 4 of 8 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Office
normal hours and to enable a DUS804C sensor or single „one shot‟ pushbutton panel after hours. In this
event, the lights can be flashed off momentarily as a warning, before the lighting is switched off.
conference rooms
Architectural lighting control is required to adjust the lighting of the space to its many different
applications. A 10-button wall mounted control panel provides the required scene and fade rate. A
hand-held infrared remote control might be appropriate to adjust the lighting from anywhere in the
room during presentations or meetings. Most Philips Dynalite controllers have an optional DMX interface
that enables inter-operability with audio-visual devices, while many AV systems natively support the
DyNet protocol. Multifunction sensors are used to detect when rooms have been vacant for a period of
time.
staircases
Local regulations must always be adhered to. Aside from this, common sense should prevail. The
staircase lighting would usually remain on during „normal‟ hours, with a single pushbutton made
available for timed override after hours. If appropriate, stairway lighting could be made to flash briefly
as a warning before lights are extinguished. If regulating ballasts are used, they could be ramped down
over 30 seconds before switching off.
demand load shedding
Many parts of the world experience peak electricity loads that their infrastructure is unable to deliver.
The solution is to defer some of the load at those critical moments. A Philips Dynalite control system
can have it‟s load prioritised for such an event. Low requirement loads can be partially shed, almost
transparently when dimming is available. Depending on the urgency of the request to load shed, a
hierarchy of switching can be implemented. Unlike airconditioning, lighting can be made granular,
enabling corridors, for example, to respond to a greater extent than the adjacent workstations.
out-of-hours
This may be determined by the BMS or by a Philips Dynalite DTC602 stand-alone timer clock. On an
individual office floor, it is common for just one or two workers to be at their workstations when
everyone else has gone home. Manual control regimes leave the entire office alight, while many
automated systems create a feeling of insecurity by switching off all the lights in the immediate vicinity
of the occupant/s. In a Philips Dynalite controlled environment, lighting in the corridors and amenities
can be kept on when any one of the local zones is active. Cleaners and security personnel often waste
energy after hours. Philips Dynalite systems can allow transient personnel to gain lighting access using
infrared remote controls. These can be programmed to provide an appropriate duration of local or
corridor lighting. For example, a cleaner may have local workstations illuminated for ten minutes, while
a security guard might just activate the corridor lighting for five minutes. The remote only needs to be
pointed at any of the DUS804C sensors in the local area.
Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Office Page 5 of 8
daylighting strategy
This is a topic for separate detailed analysis, as each application is unique. During daylight hours, the
ingress of natural light can be selectively harvested within parts of the space that have a component of
natural light.
Some designers always switch off perimeter lighting, while an increasing number apply light sensors for
detecting the natural sunlight available and then dim the lighting accordingly . This action must be
carefully undertaken to avoid issues of disturbing or reduce the comfort of those occupying the space.
In particular, care should be exercised where window blinds are in use due to the possibility of
fragmenting a light detection zone. As with other issues of „granularity‟, the solution might be to deploy
a greater number of sensors. The challenge of harnessing daylight is to attenuate the artificial light
without creating discomfort that is associated with bright windows and dull interiors. Philips Dynalite‟s
networked DUS804C sensors detect illuminance as well as occupancy. They each contain embedded
intelligence, enabling their response to be varied at different times of the day. When excess natural
light falls on a perimeter row, the occupancy sensor might allow dimming to a very low level in the
absence of motion, but dim to 50% when occupancy is detected. This is often necessary to avoid
shadowing and provide adequate horizontal illuminance on desk surfaces. DALI ballasts provide an
appropriate vehicle for daylight response, as there is no longer a physical connection between the hard-
wired circuitry and the ability of individual luminaires to be dimmed. Luminaires that run parallel to the
windows may be switched or dimmed, irrespective of their physical wiring.
maintained illuminance
This strategy can offer greater savings than daylight harvesting, as previously discussed. In the absence
of any natural light (late at night for example), the Illuminance levels of many workstations and
corridors are far greater than is recommended in lighting standards. This can be harvested by the
stepless dimming of controllable fluorescent lighting. Once a target level has been established, a
desirable light level will be maintained irrespective of environmental changes in the space. Savings of
10-20% are typical, while greater than 50% is not uncommon in the retrofit of „70s buildings.
maintenance reporting
Intelligent lighting control gear has enabled Philips Dynalite systems to collect data about individual
lamps and luminaire components in real time. Lamp run-time tracking is available, which assists with
scheduled lamp replacement. The strategic use of this resource can reduce life cycle operating costs
and avoid the drift into a sub-standard installation. Individual component ballast or lamp failures may
be reported to management from a Philips Dynalite controller or an informed GSM message may be sent
directly to maintenance personnel.
Page 6 of 8 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Office
the equipment
This diagram outlines the equipment required for a typical multi-story application. Each floor is
connected to the others by a DNG485 network bridge. This enables a higher speed trunk to
communicate filtered messages between the floors. It also provides optical isolation as a protection
measure.
Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Office Page 7 of 8
the system in operation
PC control
Desktop PC Access is available to locally control individual workspace
lighting, blinds and possibly airflow using each occupant‟s desktop
PC. EnvisionProject establishes an interface between the Philips
Dynalite RS485 network and the corporate IP network. The physical
location of individual clients on the LAN is logically linked to the
occupants‟ local lighting hardware. Functions made by a desktop
slider or icon selection are immediately processed in the DyNet
system, invoking a personalised response. Outside normal hours, the
availability of local lighting can be linked to whether or not the local
PC is active. If it is hibernating or switched off, the office lighting
can be extinguished. EnvisionProject also provides bi-directional
access to the BMS, which enables centralised monitoring and
scheduling of the lighting control system that has been tailored to the
specific installation.
Smaller applications might only operate locally, not through a BMS. A
simpler dry-contact interface (DDMIDC8) might then be used to
transfer some basic instructions to another system. For example, the
alarm output level of a security or EWOS (Emergency Warning) system
might be used to enable a panic mode in the lighting system or
occupancy detection from the lighting system might be passed on to
the security system after hours via a spare relay output channel. In
most instances, a single interface on the RS485 trunk makes the
hardware connection between the two systems, either simply or at a
high level.
sensors
Sensors S1-S10 are all DUS804C, which combine motion detection, PE measurement and IR reception. In
this scenario, IR reception would not be used. Some sensors such as S8, S9 and S10 in the staff
amenities, would be configured permanently for motion detection and would ensure lighting is switched
off when the space was not occupied. Others would be configured to do different things at different
times of the day.
S5 and S6 are adjacent to windows so that during the day they could be configured to dim the row of
fixtures near the windows whenever sufficient natural light was available. This practice is commonly
referred to as “Daylight Harvesting”. After hours, the sensors would automatically switch over to motion
detection mode.
Example of simple PC control software
from an icon in the system tray
Page 8 of 8 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Office
load controllers
Circuits 7-10 are switched fluorescent loads and are controlled by a relay controller. The DDRC820FR
shown in our example has 20 Amp inductive load capability and bi-stable latching relays. This one
device has 6 independent outputs; hence it is cost-effective to also switch the toilets and stairwell
lighting, as well as having the capacity to control the instant hot water heater.
A DDBC120-DALI controller enables individual dimming and soft switching of commercial fluorescent DALI
troffers on Circuit 1. When all troffers connected to the controller are switched off it automatically
removes the power to the troffers to save energy, as DALI ballasts continue to consume a few Watts,
even when switched off.
Circuits 2-6 are controlled by a DDMC802 Multipurpose Controller, which incorporates modular control
cards. A 1 x 2A dimming module (DDLM102) controls a circuit of downlights and a 1 x 4A dimming
module (DDLM104) controls 10 LV down light fittings over the boardroom table.
A DDLEDC401 LED controller is part of our demonstration to highlight the growing use of dynamic display
items in commercial venues, in this case dynamic signage displaying the company logo.
load schedule Load Controller Cct
Capacity Drawing Designator
Fixture Qty Load
DDBC120-DALI Box 1 C1 4800W Circuit 1 2x36W Fluorescent Troffer 29 2088W
DDMC802 Box 2 C1 240W Circuit 3 50W Downlight 3 150W
DDMC802 Box 2 C2 240W Circuit 4 50W Downlight 3 150W
DDMC802 Box 2 C3 1200W Circuit 2 50W Downlight 4 200W
DDMC802 Box 2 C4 1200W Circuit 6 50W Downlight 3 150W
DDMC802 Box 2 C5 1200W Circuit 5 50W Downlight 10 500W
DDMC802 Box 2 C6 1200W Spare
DDMC802 Box 2 C7 1200W Spare
DDMC802 Box 2 C8 1200W Spare
DDRC820FR Box 3 C1 4800W Circuit 7 1x36W Fluorescent Batten 1 36W
DDRC820FR Box 3 C2 4800W Circuit 8 1x36W Fluorescent Batten 1 36W
DDRC820FR Box 3 C3 4800W Circuit 9 1x18W Fluorescent Batten 1 18W
DDRC820FR Box 3 C4 4800W Circuit 10 1x36W Fluorescent Batten 1 36W
DDRC820FR Box 3 C5 4800W Circuit 12 Instant Hot Water Heater 1 2400W
DDRC820FR Box 3 C6 4800W Spare
DDLEDC401 Box 4 C1 24V 1A Circuit 11 LED Signage – Red channel 1 0.75A
DDLEDC401 Box 4 C2 24V 1A Circuit 11 LED Signage – Green channel 1 0.75A
DDLEDC401 Box 4 C3 24V 1A Circuit 11 LED Signage – Blue channel 1 0.75A
DDLEDC401 Box 4 C4 24V 1A Circuit 11 LED Signage – White channel 1 0.75A
2011 Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Limited (ABN 97 095 929 829). All rights reserved. Not to be reproduced without permission. Dynalite, DyNet, DLight and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Ltd.
application guide themed venue
Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Themed Venue Page 1 of 5
This application guide contains information on:
Provisioning for temporary DMX512 control
Control of LED & cold cathode neon lighting
Control using a touchscreen with graphical floorplan representations
Lighting control in themed venues is vital to ensure appropriate environmental aesthetics and functional
illumination. Themed venues such as restaurants, bar and clubs, can be used for a range of purposes
which can vary extensively throughout the course of a day. Lighting levels during preparation and
cleaning phases need to be appropriate so that tasks can be carried out in a safe and efficient manner.
During times of patronage, adjustments to lighting levels are necessary to provide the appropriate
architectural appearance for the atmosphere desired. Dining areas will frequently require a range of
settings when used for functions to align with event proceedings such as seating, serving, dining,
presentation and departure. Discerning clients may often request alternate settings to create a unique
environment. Lighting in podium or stage areas will also require a range of settings for different uses,
such as live performances and presentations. For certain events or functions it may also be necessary
for the lighting to operate in unison with temporary entertainment of theatrical lighting systems.
Provision should also be included to link the security system ensuring all lighting is turned off when the
system is armed, so that energy is conserved outside of operating hours.
typical layout
Stage
Bar
Café Bar
Restaurant
Kitchen
Legend
Downlights
Wall Lights
Pendant
4 Colour
LED
Neon
Fluorescent
Batten
DTK
600
CP1
CP2
CP3
CP2User Control
Point
Circuit 1
Circuit 2
Circuit 3Circuit 4
Circuit 5Circuit 6 Circuit 7
Circuit 8
Circuit 9Circuit 10
Circuit 11
Circuit 12
Circuit 13
Circuit 14
Circuit 15
Cove 1
Cove 2
Page 2 of 5 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Themed Venue
system outline
The application example detailed is based on a typical themed restaurant venue. Eight channels of cove
recessed 4-colour LED strip and two circuits of central decorative luminaires provide main dining area
lighting. For patron access, four circuits of down lights are used to illuminate the perimeter of dining
areas. The bar incorporates a circuit of low voltage down lights over the serving counter and two
channels of decorative overhead neon feature lighting. One circuit of low voltage fixtures is installed
behind the bar for staff access and a circuit of track lighting included for rear wall feature lighting.
Stage lighting includes a single circuit of recessed down lights and three circuits of adjustable track
mounted spot fixtures. Linear fluorescent fixtures are used within the kitchen.
the equipment
the system in operation
User control panels CP1, CP2 and CP3 are provided to enable the system control necessary at each
location. The DTP170 LCD Touchscreen located at the bar is used for advanced control and programming
functions. The DTP170 includes the facility to create a series of display pages that enable users to
adjust presets for specific event requirements. The DDNP1501 is utilised to supplement the network
power supply, as required for operation of the touchscreen.
Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Themed Venue Page 3 of 5
control panels
Control panel CP1 is located at the staff entrance as a master control
point for staff entering and leaving the premises. The control panel
incorporates two pushbuttons and a key-locking switch. The key switch
enables the control panel operation, to ensure that there is no
unauthorised use. This is particularly important, as the “OFF” button is a
master off control that will turn off all lighting within the restaurant. The
“ON” button would usually select a welcome scene or a cleaners‟ lighting
scene that would provide sufficient light for cleaners to work, without
consuming excess power or expending lamp life unnecessarily.
The Maitre D‟ station would be located at the entrance door, where guests can check their reservations
and then be guided to their tables. A four-scene control panel (CP2) would be located at this point and
would comprise the following scenes:
CP3 would, in addition to the preset functions detailed above, also
have four preset scenes, five through to eight. These would set the
lighting on a preset basis for the channels associated with the stage.
The panel also includes four manual slide faders, so that stage lighting
circuits can be independently adjusted.
1 Set Up This scene is used when the restaurant staff is laying up the tables, prior to
opening at lunchtime and for dinner. It is a practical „working‟ scene, rather
than an aesthetic scene.
2 Lunch This button selects a preset scene for the lunch period. This is a relatively bright
scene to compensate for natural daylight encountered by patrons before entering
and after exiting the restaurant.
3 Dinner This button selects a preset scene for the dinner period. This scene would be a
lower level with the emphasis on ambience.
4 Show This button selects a scene to be used when there is a live show on the stage.
Note that this scene would be the same as the manual button on the local
control panel on stage. In this scene the general lighting would be reduced so
that attention would be drawn to the stage. Stage circuits would come under
manual control from the faders on control panel CP3. This would enable the
band or individual artist to set up a manual scene for the stage area to suit the
performance on stage, without altering what has been set in the dining and bar
areas.
ON
OFF
ENABLE
DISABLE
PANEL
CP1
SET UP
LUNCH
DINNER
SHOW
CP2
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
CP3
Page 4 of 5 Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Themed Venue
touch screen
The DTP170 LCD Touchscreen would include scene selection pages, manual override pages and a timer
clock to automatically select scenes. A graphical image of the entire restaurant floor plan could be a
page in itself and from this page, it would be possible to review the current status of all lighting and
temporarily modify the settings in one area for a special event. This is ideal for situations such as
„birthday cake entrance‟ or for corporate entertainment evenings. In this page, simply touching one
area of the restaurant – e.g. Restaurant, would then drill down the screen to that area only. It would
then be possible to adjust individual circuits on a raise/lower basis.
Customised touchscreen pages provide the ability to „drill down‟ and adjust individual circuits within an area.
The touchscreen can also be programmed with a series of creative fade or chase sequences for the
decorative neon and four colour LED circuits. These sequences can be set into operation when required
from a custom display page. One sequence might include a series of long subtle colour fades to align
with theme changes over the course of an evening. More lively sequences might also be programmed to
create theatrical effects for celebrations or parties.
Some other functions available from this control position could be a “waiter call” button, to ring a
buzzer in the kitchen to request the presence of a waiter to take an order. Another facility that can be
provided is a panic function to send all of the lighting to full in the event of an emergency.
Philips Dynalite Application Guide – Themed Venue Page 5 of 5
load controllers
The DLE410 (4 x 10A) and DLE1205 (12 x 5A) leading edge dimmers are used for controlling the
combination of mains and low voltage incandescent lighting circuits. One channel on the DLE1205 is also
configured to provide switched output for control of the fluorescent kitchen lighting. The DLE1205 can
also be optimised to be dual ported, which enables the dimmer to be controlled over the popular
DMX512 protocol from a portable theatrical/entertainment lighting control desk when used for specific
functions or events. Control from the security system can be easily integrated through a dry output
connected to the AUX input of any controller. Two DLEDC401 LED controllers are utilised so creative
colour mixing and sequencing routines can be programmed for the two groups of four colour (RGBW) LED
recessed cove lighting.
load schedule
Load Controller Cct
Capacity
Drawing
Designator
Fixture Qty Load
DLE410 Box 1 C1 2400W Circuit 1 Decorative Pendant 700W 2 1400W
DLE410 Box 1 C2 2400W Circuit 2 Decorative Pendant 700W 3 2100W
DLE410 Box 1 C3 2400W Circuit 3 Cold Cathode Neon 1 800W
DLE410 Box 1 C4 2400W Circuit 4 Cold Cathode Neon 1 700W
DLE1205 Box 2 C1 1200W Circuit 5 LV Downlight 50W 4 200W
DLE1205 Box 2 C2 1200W Circuit 6 LV Downlight 50W 9 450W
DLE1205 Box 2 C3 1200W Circuit 7 LV Track Lighting 50W 4 200W
DLE1205 Box 2 C4 1200W Circuit 8 LV Downlight 50W 4 200W
DLE1205 Box 2 C5 1200W Circuit 9 LV Downlight 50W 4 200W
DLE1205 Box 2 C6 1200W Circuit 10 LV Downlight 50W 2 100W
DLE1205 Box 2 C7 1200W Circuit 11 LV Downlight 50W 2 100W
DLE1205 Box 2 C8 1200W Circuit12 Wall Light 100W 7 700W
DLE1205 Box 2 C9 1200W Circuit 13 Adjustable Spot 100W 4 400W
DLE1205 Box 2 C10 1200W Circuit 14 Downlight 100W 4 400W
DLE1205 Box 2 C11 1200W Circuit 15 HF Fluorescent 2 x 36W 6 432W
DLE1205 Box 2 C12 1200W Spare
DDLEDC401 Box 3 C1 24V 1A Cove 1 LED Strip – Red channel 1 0.75A
DDLEDC401 Box 3 C2 24V 1A Cove 1 LED Strip – Green channel 1 0.75A
DDLEDC401 Box 3 C3 24V 1A Cove 1 LED Strip – Blue channel 1 0.75A
DDLEDC401 Box 3 C4 24V 1A Cove 1 LED Strip – White channel 1 0.75A
DDLEDC401 Box 4 C1 24V 1A Cove 2 LED Strip – Red channel 1 0.75A
DDLEDC401 Box 4 C2 24V 1A Cove 2 LED Strip – Green channel 1 0.75A
DDLEDC401 Box 4 C3 24V 1A Cove 2 LED Strip – Blue channel 1 0.75A
DDLEDC401 Box 4 C4 24V 1A Cove 2 LED Strip – White channel 1 0.75A
2011 Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Limited (ABN 97 095 929 829). All rights reserved. Not to be reproduced without permission. Dynalite, DyNet,
DLight and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Ltd.
4. Technical Guides
technical guide control principles
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Control Principles Page 1 of 11
overview
This document outlines the structure and principles employed in a Philips Dynalite control system,
including information on DyNet network architecture, operating concepts, system commands, device
addressing and other associated features.
system structure
The Philips Dynalite system utilises a true distributed processing architecture, where a range of devices
are interconnected over an RS485 network to form a complete control solution. All commands and
status information is passed to all devices over this network using the event based DyNet protocol. All
Philips Dynalite control devices incorporate an integral microprocessor and internal non-volatile
memory. This allows for each device to store its own configuration data and possessing requirements to
perform the required features and functions, meeting the project requirements. All device
configurations are configured through the use of EnvisionProject, Philips Dynalite‟s commissioning,
monitoring and control software, used to bring the individual devices together to form a system solution
for projects needs.
Philips Dynalite‟s distribution of intelligent devices architecture, dramatically improves reliability over
systems that incorporate centralised processors, where malfunction of one device could result in total
system failure. Should a single device fail in a Philips Dynalite system, all other devices will continue to
operate as normal. This distributed architecture also supports a wide range of interfaces, manufactured
by Philips Dynalite and other system vendors, to offer a robust flexible approach to control of lighting
and other automation systems found in modern projects.
Philips Dynalite‟s range of control products can be broadly categorised as a relationship between; User
Interfaces, Integration devices and Load Controllers. The user interface range includes many different
user control panels, LCD touchscreens, timer clocks, computer head-end software and sensors. User
interfaces are generally programmed to trigger single command messages onto the DyNet network, in
response to a user or input action. Integration devices have been developed to allow other third-party
systems that are commonly found within projects to control the Philips Dynalite system or vice versa.
This allows many systems to work together achieving a required task and reducing the need for the end-
user to interact with each individual system. Philips Dynalite has developed an extensive range of
controllers with a variety of output types, combinations and load ratings. Load controllers constantly
listen to the network messages from Dynet and only respond to command messages that relate to the
controller‟s specific addressing configuration. Control associations are established between user
interfaces, integration devices and load controllers using straightforward addressing and command
techniques with in the Dynet protocol.
Page 2 of 11 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Control Principles
device addressing
physical
Each Philips Dynalite load controller on the Dynet network can be identified as a device type and a box
number. With this information the different devices on single networks can be individually addressed for
commissioning. All physical control channels within the load controllers of a Philips Dynalite system have
a Physical and Logical Address. Physical addresses are used within the load controllers and refer to the
physical control channel within a device. This is primarily used during system commissioning to configure
devices as they can be used to identify the individual channels. To identify an individual circuit
connected to a load controller, a Device Type, Box Number and Physical channel number are used by the
commissioning software Envision. The term Physical refers to the individual physical attributes of the
control point. For example a 12 Channel load controller could be addressed as Box 1 and will always
have 12 Physical Channels. These Channels are physically different from the Channels in 12 Channel load
controller Box 2. Physical addresses are also used for reporting system diagnostic information related to
hardware operation.
Similarly for a user interface panel, a Device Type, Box Number and Physical button number are used for
addressing the different input options. Physical addressing is also used to obtain operating parameter
variables from specific devices. An example of this is a technique that can be adopted with a sensor.
Sensors are normally configured to directly issue commands when particular lighting levels are reached
or movement is detected. However, in certain projects it may be necessary to create separate control
routines external from the sensor based on the lighting level sensed or occupancy status detected. This
can be achieved by directly addressing the sensor with physical messages, thus bypassing the device
configuration. This type of message could directly query the sensor for status information of occupancy.
This feature is typically used when a monitoring system is added to the Philips Dynalite installation such
as airconditioning control systems.
logical
Load controller output channels and user control panel buttons are generally configured to logical Areas,
independent of their physical characteristics i.e. the device they are connected to. This logical overlay
enables control points to be grouped regardless of their physical association. A Logical Channel is a
nominated Physical Channel that is assigned to an Area. Multiple physical channels in different load
controllers can be grouped together into logical areas for network addressing requirements. This allows
the Dynet network to control many different physical channels with one network message. The Philips
Dynalite system can support up to 65,535 Areas and each Area up to 65,535 Logical Channels. It is also
possible to assign more than one Physical Channel to a single Logical area. In a lighting control
application, consider the scenario of a large room with 9 Physical Channels driving downlights along the
length of the wall. All of these Physical Channels can be assigned to just one Logical area. This
simplifies operation of large installations, as the end-user only has to make adjustments to one channel.
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Control Principles Page 3 of 11
The Philips Dynalite system can be divided into smaller subsections using logical addressing. Consider
the example of a dimmer that supplies lighting circuits to two rooms, with a user control panel in each
room. The controller lighting circuits and the control plate in Room 1 would be configured as Area 2,
and the controller lighting circuits and the control plate in Room 2 would be configured as Area 3. The
end result would be that the control plate set to Area 2 would only control or program circuits
designated Area 2 and the control plate set to Area 3 would only control or program circuits designated
Area 3, so the two rooms will operate independently of each other.
Area 2
Office 1
Logical
Channel 1 CP1 CP2
Load
(Outputs)
1 Phase 40A
DLE410
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
Logical
Channel 2
Area 3
Office 2
Logical
Channel 1
Logical
Channel 2
The ability to logically bind individual control channels into groups is essential in installations involving a
large number of channels. Without this facility it would not be practical to view and configure the
control channels within a project as they would need to be addressed individually. Configuration and
maintenance of systems that do not allow for physical channels to be grouped into logical areas can
therefore become quite cumbersome and time consuming to configure or edit requested changes.
preset states
During commissioning each Philips Dynalite load controller may be configured with a number of output
states, which are referred to as Presets. Most load controllers will typically accommodate up to 170
presets. The preset defines a specific output level for each channel of the controller.
Scene 1 Scene 2 Scene 3 Scene 4OFF1
2
3
4 Prog
The illustration above is a typical lighting control application where different intensities of the lighting
are required for each of the four channels. These are set and stored in the controller‟s memory during
commissioning. It is then possible to “recall” these settings from the controller‟s memory from a single
Page 4 of 11 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Control Principles
network message at the touch of a button or at predetermined times, from a timer clock or
automatically from an integrated building management system.
A typical application for this approach would be in a hotel coffee shop, where the proprietor requires a
pre-determined lighting “scene” for breakfast, another for lunch, one for dinner and another for
suppertime. These settings can be preset and then simply recalled at the touch of a button. The time
for the change to fade from one scene to another may also be preset and stored in memory. This way
the patrons do not feel any visual discomfort when the lighting changes from one mood to another over,
say, 10 minutes and all the lighting channels will change at the same time.
operating concepts
The Philips Dynalite system can be controlled in several different ways, dependent on application
requirements. Output changes can be achieved using Area Preset or Channel Level command messages.
The most common approach is Area Preset control where Preset states stored within the controller are
recalled. Area Preset command messages will affect all control points that are assigned to the
respective message Area. An example of this would be a button press on a user control panel that is
configured to issue an Area Preset command, say Area 1 go to Preset 1 over 5 seconds. All load
controllers with channels assigned to Area 1 would change from their current preset to preset 1 output
state in five seconds. Status indicators on all user control panels with buttons assigned to Area 1 Preset
1 will also follow accordingly. This network interaction of all devices responding to the same message
allows for simpler commissioning as only one network message is needed to instigate changes in multiple
devices, either load controllers or user interfaces. Preset control is ideally suited to applications where a
large number of channels are to be controlled in a single area.
The ability to recall a preset scene affecting multiple load channels in one area with a single network
message is critical in architectural lighting applications. Systems that do not include provision to store
presets or require multiple network messages to achieve a state or scene change may produce a
discernable cascade effect as the channels sequentially receive individual level commands. This often
produces an undesirable „mexican-wave‟ effect and network traffic complications.
If required, channel Level command messages can also be used to affect output change on a specific
Channel within a defined Area. An example of this would be a user control panel button configured to
issue the message Area 1 Channel 1 go to 50% over 5 seconds. All load controller channels assigned to
Area 1 Channel 1 would go to 50% output in 5 seconds. This method can be used where individual
channel control is required and the number of channels is low. It is typically used in a home or small
office environments where the user wishes to manually change the load controller output levels.
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Control Principles Page 5 of 11
programmable logic control
All Philips Dynalite user interface devices also incorporate programmable logic control functionality.
Using Envision software it is possible to author and embed complex programs within these devices that
use arithmetic, sequential and conditional logic functions. These programs are referred to as tasks.
Tasks can be triggered from within a device or from another device on the same network.
Tasks are often used in applications where a single input or user interface action is required to deliver
control over multiple areas. An example in architectural lighting applications would be a “welcome”
function on a user control panel located at an entry point to a residence or office. When operated, the
task issues a sequence of area preset commands required to illuminate an access path through the
installation.
system commands
The Philips Dynalite system utilises a range of commands that can be assigned to any user interface
control or device input during system configuration. The assigned command is issued on the DyNet
network when a corresponding user or input action occurs. The following table summarises the range of
control commands that are commonly used.
Preset Recall Commands
Set Area/Channel to Preset Recall Preset # for all Channels assigned to logical Area # in # seconds
Set Area/Channel to Off Set all Channels assigned to logical Area # to off in # seconds
Level Recall Messages
Set Area/ Channel to Level Set all Channels or Channel # in logical Area # to Level # over # seconds
Ramping Commands
Ramp Area/Channel Up Start Ramping all Channels or Channel # toward 100% at a # ramp rate
Ramp Area/Channel Down Start Ramping all Channels or Channel # toward 0% at a # ramp rate
Stop Ramping Area/Channel Stop all Channels or Channel # in logical Area # from ramping
Stop Ramping Area/Channel And
Programme Preset
Stop all Channels or Channel # in logical Area # from ramping and program
current levels to preset
Area Control Commands
Program Levels to Preset Save present output Levels in logical Area # to current Preset
Set area to Panic Mode Set all channels in logical Area # to the Panic Preset, disable and lock all user
interface panels assigned to the respective logical Area
Revert Area to Unpanic Mode Unlock and enable all user interface panels in logical Area #
Enable/Disable Panels Enable/Disable all user interface panel buttons assigned to logical Area #
Enable/Disable Motion Detectors Enable/Disable motion detectors assigned to logical Area #
Enable/Disable Photo Electric
Detectors
Enable/Disable all photo electric detectors assigned to logical Area #
Set Area Preset Offset Apply offset of # to all future Preset messages received by logical Area #
Page 6 of 11 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Control Principles
Set/Clear Area Links Set/ Clear area links between channels assigned to logical Area #
Status Commands
Area Status
Request/Reply Current Preset Request current Preset in logical Area #. System replies with current Preset #
for respective logical Area #.
Request/Reply Current Area Link
State
Request current area links between channels assigned to logical Area #
Channel Status
Request/Reply Channel Level Request current Channel Level # for logical Channel # in logical Area #.
System replies with current Channel Level # for respective logical Channel #
in respective logical Area #
The Philips Dynalite system supports many commands beyond those outlined above. Further details are
available on request.
global functions
It is possible to send every area on a network to a single Preset using Area 0 (zero) as the addressed
Area. There are implications when adopting this method where different third-party devices are in use
such as curtains etc. For this reason Preset messages to specified Areas are the preferred method of
global control.
combining control spaces
Applications where de-mountable partitions or removable walls are being used (typically in areas such as
hotel ballrooms, training rooms and conference centres) will require the control system to combine and
separate lighting groups. It is usual that each space has its own user control panel. When the partitions
are opened or closed, thus dividing a room, it is most important that the control system for the lighting
should also combine or segregate in harmony with the partition status. In practice this means that when
a room is divided, the control panel in one section must not be able to control the lighting in another
section. However, as soon as the partition is opened, both control panels should work in parallel. This
completely automates the room-combining function, so the user does not have to worry about
configuring the system to suit the current arrangement. Philips Dynalite‟s supports Join or Area Link
functions can be used to combine or separate control groups in these applications.
The Join function is suitable for applications where there are a small number of separate sections
involved. The Join function enables an Area to be divided into a number of sub sections. Sub sections
can be combined and separated using the appropriate Join command. Area linking should be used in
applications involving a large number of sections. This function modifies the load controllers to
temporarily assign channels to more than one Area. With area linking, it is possible to create temporary
control links between a total of 24 independent Areas with two-way control from each panel within the
area that is being linked. The obvious main difference between this method and Join is the ability of
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Control Principles Page 7 of 11
area link to combine a greater number of areas to work together as one larger area.
A dedicated Base Link Area can also be used to act as a global area for Channels assigned to that Base
Link Area and is useful as a global control for a block of Areas. The channels to be controlled are
assigned during commissioning and can be in one of the 24 areas above the dedicated Base Link Area.
Area linking is uni-directional, so if areas 7 and 10 for example, are to work in tandem there must be
two area link messages sent; one message to link area 7 to area 10 and one message to link area 10 to
area 7.
In the example below areas 7-12 are all independent areas that can be controlled with standard preset
messages. Assigning them to base link area 6 means that if and when required, any of the six areas
shown can be linked to any of the other areas causing it to listen to another area‟s messages as well as
its own. It could be possible; for example, if all areas indicated by base link area 6 were to be used
together for a function, all the areas could be linked and controlled together with a single DyNet
message.
Area 7
Area 8
Area 9
Area 10
Area 11Area 12
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 14
Area 13
Base
Area 6
Area linking can also be used to provide a pseudo global Area other than Area 0. It is possible to create
a pathway of light through a number of different areas by sending a single control message to the base
link area.
network watchdog
Fail safe operation of the Philips Dynalite system can be maintained through the Network Watchdog
feature. This involves broadcasting a special data packet (the Watchdog Tick) to all load controllers
across the network at programmed intervals. If a particular controller does not receive these messages
within a predefined period, the controller will default to an assigned panic preset or to a specific preset
stored in the load controller. This ensures that all controllers revert to a safe operating state should any
part of the network cabling be physically severed, or there is a load controller failure.
Page 8 of 11 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Control Principles
status indicator tracking
All user control panels incorporate LED status indicators on all buttons that can be used to indicate the
current preset state of an Area. When a Preset message is transmitted on the network, any indicators
will illuminate on any user control panel button that is also assigned to that Area Preset automatically
and without the need for additional network messages. Indicators for buttons assigned to other presets
within the same Area will turn off. In this way the panels will always indicate the current state of an
area.
In some circumstances it may be necessary to change the state of some or all button status indicators on
a user control panel. The Philips Dynalite system enables status indicators to be controlled
independently using an appropriate physical command message. It is also possible to change the state of
specific button status indicators while leaving others in their current state.
diagnostic functions
The Philips Dynalite system also supports a number of advanced diagnostic functions, which include
Device Online/Offline status, Circuit Breaker Trip Reporting and Circuit Run Time Tracking.
Device Online/Offline status enables all devices to be periodically polled to determine if they are visible
on the network and operating normally. Invoking this function in Envision software ensures that network
or device failures are identified promptly.
Load controllers that incorporate the Circuit Breaker Trip reporting function will broadcast a message on
the DyNet network when a load circuit breaker on the controller trips. The message identifies the
Physical device and channel affected by the tripped circuit breaker. These messages can be used to
alert maintenance personnel of faults so that remedial action can be promptly carried out.
Controllers that support Circuit Run Time tracking will continuously record the accumulated operating
time for each output channel. Run time data for each controller can be queried or reset at any time.
This information can be used by a site management system for scheduling periodic maintenance, such as
lamp replacement intervals on lighting fixtures.
the physical network
Philips Dynalite systems utilise RS485 as its physical network, which is an industry standard method of
data transmission as detailed in the TIA/EIA-485-A specification, with some variations. (For more
information on the TIA/EIA-485-A specification: www.tiaonline.org)
The TIA/EIA-485-A specification defines a UL (Unit Load), which declares that an RS485 driver must be
able to drive 32 ULs. This means that an RS485 network supports 32 nodes, when each node bears a unit
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Control Principles Page 9 of 11
load on the line. Philips Dynalite products use 1/8 UL drivers and we recommend up to 128 devices on a
network segment.
Another important variation from the TIA/EIA-485-A specification is the addition of an extra conductor
that carries a DC supply, which is generated by an integral power supply contained within all mains
powered load control devices which is used to energise network devices that are not connect to mains
power, such as motion detectors, wall mounted control panels and timer clocks.
Figure 1: Typical small DyNet Network
Devices are simply connected with a general purpose 3 twisted pair and shield data cable that loops
around to all devices as depicted in Figure 1. If using CAT5 cable the 4th pair can be left as a spare or
used as a drain wire. The connections are as follows:
Note the conductors that carry the DC supply are both wires in the pair paralleled. This
is to avoid the DC supply suffering voltage drop on long cable runs. A 5-way pressure
pad terminal strip is provided on devices for data cable termination. All devices also
have RJ12 connector for temporary connection for commissioning. Some DIN rail load
controllers support two RJ12 connectors for faster termination within the distribution
board.
Terminal Cable Recommended Colour Coding
Shield Drain wire (or CAT5 spare pair) Shield (or Brown pair)
GND 1 pair paralleled Green pair
D+ ½ pair Blue
D- ½ pair Blue / White
+12V 1 pair paralleled Orange pair
Page 10 of 11 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Control Principles
Some sites require far more devices than the 128 maximum allowed on a single network. A typical
application is a multi story building, with each floor containing a network of devices. The network
segment for each floor is called a Spur. All spurs are joined together via a Trunk, which is quite often
installed in a riser, linking all floors together.
Larger DyNet Network utilising trunk & spur technology
Each of the floors can run an independent sub-network that does not require any input from other
devices. With each of the floor sub-networks being connected together by bridges on the trunk site-wide
network messages can be sent that will affect the whole project, allowing the entire system to work
together as one. Typically the Trunk is where computer head-end software or BMS will be connected so
there is full access to all the required components of the network.
Note the spurs do not directly connect to the trunk, but are connected via Network Bridges. A Network
Bridge has two RS485 ports that are optically isolated from each other, which will assist to isolate any
faults to a single spur only and also provide galvanic isolation. The use of Network Bridges allows the
maximum number of devices on a single network to be 16,776,960. Network Bridges may also be used as
repeaters when cable runs exceed 1,000 metres. In addition to optical isolation, the Network Bridge can
also be configured as a network filter for stopping unrelated messages being transmitted onto irrelevant
sections of the network, therefore reducing the number of network messages. The Gateways can also be
used to run task on a floor so that when it receives a message from the truck requesting the system
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Control Principles Page 11 of 11
change to “After hours” mode, the gateway can then send out the required messages on the sub-floor
network to comply.
dynet 2 protocol properties
Packet Length: Variable, 12 to 1024 bytes
Integrity Checking: 16 bit Fletcher Checksum
Baudrate: 9600 baud to 460800 baud (device dependant)
Data Word Format: 8 bit data, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit, no parity (8N1)
Message Tracking: Source network address embedded in each packet
Logical Areas: 65534, 0 = All Areas
Logical Presets per Area: 65519 editable, 16 predefined
Logical Channels per Area 65534, 0 = All Channels
Fade times per message: 0 to 23.3 hours @ 100mS resolution
Physical Channels per device: 65534, 0 = All Channels
Physical Device Types: 254
Physical Box Numbers per Device Type: 65535
2011 Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Limited (ABN 97 095 929 829). All rights reserved. Not to be reproduced without permission. Dynalite, DyNet, DLight and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Ltd.
technical guide emergency lighting
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Emergency Lighting Page 1 of 7
This application guide contains information on: q
Non-maintained emergency luminaires
Maintained emergency luminaires
Sustained emergency luminaires
Testing emergency lighting
Egress mode upon changeover to a standby generator
Load shedding upon changeover to a standby generator
Automatically bypassing circuits from a load controller
Glossary of emergency lighting terms
There is a common requirement for emergency lighting to be used alongside general lighting connected
to a control system. There are a few different ways of achieving this, the most appropriate method is
dependent on the type of emergency lighting fixture and control equipment used. Following is a
description of several different techniques and their respective deployment methods. Sometimes it will
be necessary to combine two or more techniques to achieve the desired outcome.
self-contained luminaires
There are three common types of Self Contained Luminaires (also known as Single Point Luminaires):
maintained luminaires
This is an exit or emergency luminaire, where the lamps used for emergency lighting also operate under
normal supply. The lamps used in these luminaires are often fluorescent, with a dimmable ballast and
can be controlled in exactly the same manner as a normal dimmable fluorescent luminaire.
Supply:
230V
1 Phase E
DyNet
RS485
AU
X
+1
5V
D + D -
GN
D
SH
IEL
D
N
L
µP
DALI /1-10V / DSI
Maintained EmergencyLighting Luminaire
Battery Pack
Dimmable Ballast
Lamp
Maintained
Normal
Neutral
DALI / 1-10V / DSI
DALI / 1-10V / DSI
Maintained Luminaires have two line inputs. One is connected to the controlled lighting output of the
load controller. The Maintained input is connected to the load side of the load controller‟s circuit
breaker, which supplies power to charge the internal battery and to use as a signal to turn the lamp on
in the event of a power
Page 2 of 7 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Emergency Lighting
failure. In this example the Maintained Luminaire is also used for Normal Lighting, it‟s ballast is
dimmable so ballast control lines are shown. Commonly used control protocols are DALI, DSI and 1-10V.
non-maintained luminaires This is an exit or emergency luminaire, where the lamps used for emergency lighting only operate when
the normal supply fails. The lamps used in these luminaires are often incandescent such as the small
“Spitfire” halogen lamp and the larger, sealed beam flood lamp units.
Supply:
230V
1 Phase E
DyNet
RS485
AU
X
+1
5V
D + D -
GN
D
SH
IEL
D
N
L
µP
DALI /1-10V / DSI
Maintained EmergencyLighting Luminaire
Dimmable Ballast
Lamp
Maintained
Normal
Neutral
DALI / 1-10V / DSI
DALI / 1-10V / DSI
Battery Pack
Non-Maintained Luminaires are connected to the load side of the load controller‟s circuit breaker, which
supplies power to charge the internal battery and to use as a signal to turn the lamp on in the event of a
power failure. This connection method allows full control of the normal lighting while providing for
emergency lighting in the event of a circuit breaker trip or power supply failure.
sustained luminaires
This is an exit or emergency luminaire with two or more lamps where at least one lamp operates in non-
maintained mode and is only illuminated when normal supply fails. The other lamp operates on the
normal supply only. This is identical in functionality to having a Non-Maintained Luminaire and a Normal
Luminaire both in the same housing.
Supply:
230V 40A
1 Phase E
DyNet
RS485
AU
X
+1
5V
D +
D -
GN
D
SH
IEL
D
N
L
µP
Maintained
Normal
Neutral
Normal Lighting Luminaire
N
LLamp
Battery Pack
Non-MaintainedEmergency Lighting Luminaire
Lamp
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Emergency Lighting Page 3 of 7
Sustained Luminaires have two line inputs. One is connected to the Normal lighting output of the load
controller. The Sustained input is connected to the load side of the load controller‟s circuit breaker,
which supplies power to charge the internal battery and to use as a signal to turn the lamp on in the
event of a power failure. In this example the normal half of the sustained luminaire is used for normal
lighting, it is dimmable through leading edge. This method can also be applied to dimmable ballast
control lines that use protocols DALI, DSI and 1-10V.
essential supply load shedding
Some sites are equipped with a standby generator, which will automatically start upon failure of normal
supply and after operating parameters are reached, will switch part or all of the site from the normal
supply circuit to the generator‟s output, resulting in the site being re-energised some 10 to 20 seconds
after normal supply failure. Quite often the standby generator is coupled with a UPS (Uninterruptible
Power Supply), which ensures there is no power dropout during the changeover period. In theory, the
lighting system should operate as it would on normal supply, but in practice it is often desirable to
modify it‟s behaviour. Two common reasons for doing this are:
The Standby Generator does not have the power capacity required to operate the site normally.
In this case it is desirable to place the lighting system into a load shedding mode.
The site should not be occupied while normal power is not available. In this case it is desirable
to place the lighting system into an egress mode.
To change the operating mode, the lighting system must be made aware that the generator has now
come online. This is typically carried out via a relay that actuates when the generator is online, (or
sometimes via a relay that actuates when the normal supply fails) providing a dry contact signal to an
input unit on the lighting control network, such as a DDMIDC8 Multifunction Input Interface. Once the dry
contact signal is detected, the DDMIDC8 will then transmit a network message along Dynet to activate
the required load shedding.
DDMIDC8
DBC410
CH4
CH3CH2CH1
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
EL1
1 Phase
40 AMP
Standby Generator
Dry Contact
Lighting Control Network
Page 4 of 7 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Emergency Lighting
egress mode
To meet the load shedding requirements of the project the DDMIDC8 unit can lock out all control user
interface devices such as wall mounted control panels, touchscreens, motion detectors etc, to prevent
occupants from interfering the required action and selects a global egress lighting preset, which is pre-
defined to illuminate egress paths and reduce lighting in workspaces to assist in alerting occupants that
something is amiss. When normal power is restored the DDMIDC8 restores normal control functionality.
load shed mode
The DDMIDC8 can instruct all load controllers to use a different set of presets than the normal ones.
Consider the example of a room with two channels of lighting and a control panel that recalls four
presets:
During normal operation, presets 1-4 are recalled from the control panel. In load shed mode the
DDMIDC8 uses a part of the DyNet featureset called „Preset Offset‟, which instructs the load controllers
to recall presets 5-8. This function can target a single or group of rooms or more commonly, the whole
site. If it is desirable that no lighting is on at all in particular rooms in load shed mode, then all load
shed presets are set to 0%. This method has the advantage of minimal impact on the site, as lighting
levels in particular rooms are not disturbed if they are already off or at low levels.
maintaining circuits by bypassing load controllers
When there are only a small number of circuits to be maintained when a site changes over to a standby
generator or UPS, a simple solution is to bypass the lighting control system with contactors that connect
the circuits to be maintained directly to the essential supply.
Panel Normal Presets Load Shed Presets
HIGH 1 - CH1= 100%, CH2 = 100% 5 - CH1= 60%, CH2 = 20%
MED 2 - CH1= 70%, CH2 = 70% 6 - CH1= 60%, CH2 = 20%
LOW 3 - CH1= 40%, CH2 = 40% 7 - CH1= 40%, CH2 = 20%
OFF 4 - CH1= 0%, CH2 = 0% 8 - CH1= 0%, CH2 = 0%
HIGH
MED
LOW
OFF
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Emergency Lighting Page 5 of 7
In this scenario the non-essential supply is used to hold a contactor closed, connecting the lamp to the
load controller. When the non-essential supply fails the load controller will be de-energised as will the
contactor, which will connect the lamp to the essential supply.
glossary of emergency lighting terms
anti-panic area lighting - The part of emergency escape lighting provided to avoid panic and provide
illumination allowing people to reach a place where an escape route can be identified.
central battery system - An emergency lighting system where the exits and emergency lighting are
supplied from a common power source when there is a power failure (usually for all the emergency
luminaires on one lighting sub-circuit, but sometimes for all emergency luminaires in a complete
building).
combined mode - An exit or emergency luminaire with two or more lamps where at least one lamp
operates in non-maintained mode. Typically refers to a two-lamp luminaire where one lamp operates on
the normal supply only and the other only when normal supply fails. Also known as „Sustained Mode‟.
emergency lighting - The lighting provided for use when the supply to the normal mains lighting
installation fails.
emergency luminaire - A luminaire designed for use in an emergency lighting system. Exits can serve as
emergency luminaires if classified in accordance with the relevant local standard. Emergency luminaires
can be designed to operate as both normal lighting and emergency.
Non-Essential
Supply
DBC410
CH4CH3CH2CH1
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
EL1
Essential
Supply
ContactorLamp
Load Controller
Page 6 of 7 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Emergency Lighting
escape route lighting - Lighting provided to ensure that the means of escape can be effectively
identified and safely used when a location is occupied.
exit luminaire - An emergency luminaire designed to serve as an Exit sign.
high risk task area lighting - Emergency lighting provided to ensure the safety of people involved in a
potentially dangerous process or situation and to enable proper shut down procedures.
luminaire - A lighting fixture, the housing of which includes items for fixing, protecting and operating
the lamps.
maintained luminaire - An exit or emergency luminaire where the lamps used for emergency lighting
also operate under normal supply.
non-maintained luminaire - An exit or emergency luminaire where the lamps used for emergency
lighting only operate when the normal supply fails.
normal lighting - Standard electric lighting luminaires operating from the normal supply.
rated duration - The manufacturers declared duration for a battery operated emergency lighting unit,
specifying the time for which it will operate after mains failure. This is normally one or three hours
when fully charged.
recharge period - The time necessary for the batteries to regain sufficient capacity to achieve their
rated duration.
self contained luminaire - An emergency luminaire or exit sign with all control gear and battery pack
housed within the luminaire. Also known as a Single Point Luminaire.
single point emergency lighting system - Emergency lighting system using self-contained emergency
luminaires and exit signs.
single point luminaire - An emergency luminaire or exit sign with all control gear and battery pack
housed within the luminaire (also known as a Self Contained Luminaire).
slave luminaire - An emergency luminaire without its own batteries, which is designed to work in
conjunction with a central battery system.
standby lighting - The part of emergency lighting that may be provided to enable normal activities to
continue in the event of a mains supply failure.
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Emergency Lighting Page 7 of 7
sustained luminaire - An exit or emergency luminaire with two or more lamps where at least one lamp
operates in non-maintained mode and only illuminates when normal supply fails. The other lamp
operates on the normal supply only. Identical in functionality to having a Non-Maintained Luminaire and
a Normal Luminaire both in the same housing (also known as Combined Mode).
2011 Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Limited (ABN 97 095 929 829). All rights reserved. Not to be reproduced without permission. Dynalite, DyNet, DLight and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Ltd.
technical guide LED control
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – LED Control Page 1 of 10
overview
Offering exceptional life, versatile control flexibility and unlimited colour mixing potential, LED sources
are becoming increasingly prevalent in architectural lighting applications. The vast range of LED fittings
and sources now available provides a multitude of creative illumination design possibilities. Harnessing
this potential requires a sophisticated control system. Philips Dynalite has responded to this need and
developed a comprehensive range of controllers, designed to directly connect and drive most popular
conventions of LED fittings and sources. This guide outlines LED fitting circuit design concepts and
provides instruction on selecting appropriate dimming control solutions.
LED fundamentals
Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) are semi-conductor devices that emit photon energy (light) when an
electrical current is passed through them. Detailed below is the electrical symbol that is commonly used
to represent an LED.
Anode(+) Cathode(-)
Like any diode, LEDs pass current in one direction only, from Anode to Cathode and block current in the
reverse direction. To produce light a voltage needs to be applied, which exceeds the LED’s internal
voltage drop (VF) in order for current to flow. VF is generally in the range of 0.7 – 4V and varies
depending upon the material composition of the LED. The graph below plots the characteristic of a
Lumileds Luxeon LED in the light emitting range. If the applied voltage is less than VF (about 3.2V) then
current will not flow and the LED will not emit light.
Page 2 of 10 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – LED Control
The light output level or brightness of an LED is generally directly proportional to the magnitude of
forward current (IF). (See figure below)
LEDs are also designed to deliver optimum performance at their rated nominal current. Typical nominal
current ratings for LEDs used in fittings generally range upward from 20mA through to 350mA. More
recent technological developments on ultra-bright LEDs have also seen the release of products with
nominal current ratings up to 1A.
The current through an LED should never exceed the device’s nominal rating, otherwise permanent
damage may result. For this reason, provision must be included with an LED fitting or the controller
supplying the LED fitting, to regulate diode current to the correct level.
diode current regulation
The simplest method of driving an LED is to apply a DC voltage Vs to the LED with a resistor R in series.
This will control the current and protect the LED. The forward current (IF) can be controlled by selecting
a suitable resistor.
R
IF = (VS – VF)/R
For the Luxeon LED above to run from a 12V supply at 350mA with a VF of 3V, it would require a resistor
value of:
R = (VS – VF)/IF = (12 – 3)/0.35 = 25.7 ohms
The nearest standard value resistor value is 27 ohms.
The power dissipated in this resistor would be:
P = V x I = (VS – VF) x IF
= (12 – 3) x 0.35
= 3.15 W
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – LED Control Page 3 of 10
The LED uses 0.35 X 3 = 1.05 W
This circuit delivers an efficiency of 1.05/(1.05 + 3.15) = 25 %
Although series resistance can provide a convenient means of regulating current, there are often
undesirable energy-efficiency implications as noted from the calculations above. There is also another
major disadvantage to using this method; at the manufacturing stage, LEDs are sorted into ranges (or
bins) of VF which is measured at a constant current. Each bin is then supplied as a specific brightness;
however there are variations in each range.
The table above relates to the Lumileds Luxeon LED that is designed to be driven at a constant current
of 350mA. LED fittings commonly contain many LEDs that are connected in series and parallel arrays. If
these LEDs were driven by a constant voltage supply the variation of up to 1.2V between VF(min) and
VF(max) in two parallel branches, which is nearly 30% of VF(typ), would result in noticeably different
brightness levels of LEDs across the array. It is possible to provide some compensation for this by
including a current limiting resistor in each branch so that any variation in VF has a less significant
impact on branch current.
Another method of driving an LED is to include a constant current regulator, which eliminates any
variations due to inconsistencies in VF. To create a constant current regulator, a closed loop sensing
circuit is required to monitor the current. This generally involves a sense resistor in series with the LEDs
to determine the level of current. Discrete three terminal regulators such as the Motorola LM317 are
often used for this purpose as outlined in the diagram below.
The LM317 maintains 1.25V between VOUT and VADJ, with IADJ negligible and constant.
IN OUT
ADJ
LM317 R Sense
Page 4 of 10 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – LED Control
Therefore the current though the LEDs is:
I = 1.25/Rsense
For a 350 mA LED Rsense would be 1.25/0.35 = 3.6 Ohms
When controlling multiple LEDs from a single constant current source, the LEDs should be connected in
series to ensure the current in each LED is identical. If LEDs are connected in parallel the variation in VF
will again lead to different currents and therefore different brightness in each branch. As outlined
previously, this can be improved by including a current limiting resistor in each branch so that any
variation in VF has a less significant impact on branch current. However in this case if an LED in one
branch of a parallel array fails to an open circuit state, the current normally delivered to that branch
will be driven through the other branches causing the LEDs to operate above their rated current and
potentially fail.
LED dimming
It is possible to dim LEDs by simply reducing the current through the device. However, operating an LED
below rated nominal current can result in a number of undesirable effects such as colour shift. An
alternative to simple current regulation is Pulse Width Modulation (PWM). This technique dims the LED
by supplying the nominal current at a variable duty cycle, which enables a much greater dimming range.
50% brightness is achieved with a 50% duty cycle. The frequency of the PWM is generally 100 Hz or
greater, so that flicker is not discernable by the human eye. The following graphs illustrate PWM output
for a range of dimming levels.
V
t
V
t
V
t
V
t
30% 50%
70% 100%
All Philips Dynalite controllers dim LED loads using pulse width modulation (PWM) ensuring that LEDs are
always driven at the correct forward current.
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – LED Control Page 5 of 10
LED circuit modes
The circuit configuration of LED fittings can be broadly classified in two basic types – current mode and
voltage mode. Voltage mode LED fittings incorporate integral current regulation circuitry and are
designed for connection to a nominal voltage supply. Following is the circuit diagram for a typical
voltage mode LED fitting.
IN OUT
ADJ
LM317 3.6O 1W 1%
Supply:
24VDC
Current mode LED fittings have no internal current regulation and therefore must be connected to a
constant current supply. Following is the circuit diagram for a typical current mode LED fitting.
Supply:
350mA
The data sheet provided for an LED fitting will generally indicate whether it is a current or voltage mode
device. Philips Dynalite produces fully dimmable controllers for both types of load.
common orientation
LED fittings often incorporate more than one branch circuit. This is quite prevalent with colour mix
fittings that have a circuit for each primary colour (RGB). One end of each circuit is generally connected
together to form a common. The orientation of the common will of course vary depending on which end
of the circuits are connected together. The orientation of an LED controller and LED fitting must match
to ensure correct operation. For this purpose LED fittings and LED controllers are broadly classified as
either common anode or common cathode.
Common anode fittings as the name suggests, incorporate a common connected to the anode end of
each LED circuit as illustrated below. Therefore the individual output channel polarity of common anode
controllers must be negative with a positive common.
Page 6 of 10 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – LED Control
CH3
CH2
COM
CH1
Conversely, common cathode fittings incorporate a common connected to the cathode end of each LED
circuit. In this case the individual output channel polarity of common cathode controllers must be
positive with a negative common.
CH3
CH2
COM
CH1
In both cases the common is not necessarily at ground potential and should therefore never be
connected to a supply ground at any point.
The orientation of proprietary LED fittings currently available is predominantly common anode. For this
reason Dynalite LED controllers are designed to provide common anode output. Common cathode
configuration is available as an option on certain Dynalite LED controllers. Please refer to product data
sheet for specific option detail.
controller selection - voltage mode fittings
Selecting a suitable controller for voltage mode fittings is a straightforward process. First it is necessary
to select a controller that can deliver the nominal fitting voltage. The data sheet for a typical constant
voltage fitting will generally include values for the power consumed by the fitting and also the required
nominal voltage VF. Certain Philips Dynalite controllers which incorporate an integral power supply
deliver a specific output voltage i.e. 24VDC, in line with popular nominal voltage conventions. Other
Philips Dynalite controllers utilise external power supplies permitting a range of output voltages
dependant upon the voltage of the external power supply. For multi-circuit fittings the common
orientation should also be confirmed as compatible with the controller output. Finally, the controller
channel output current capacity should be selected to exceed the connected load. The total load can
be easily calculated by multiplying the total number of fittings per channel by the current per fitting. If
only the power rating of the fitting is available the following expression can be used:
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – LED Control Page 7 of 10
IT = n x PF
VN
IT = Total current per channel
PF = Power rating of LED fitting
VN = Nominal voltage of fitting
n = Number of LED fittings per channel
The controller selection process for voltage mode fittings can be summarised as follows:
Select output voltage to match fitting nominal voltage.
For multi-circuit LED fittings confirm common orientation aligns with controller.
Select output current rating to exceed connected load.
The following table summarises the current range of Philips Dynalite voltage mode controllers.
Item Code DDLEDC401 DDLEDC605
Controller Voltage 24VDC,
12VDC (optional)
18-32VDC,
12-15VDC selectable
Common Orientation Common anode
Common cathode (optional)
Common anode
Channels 4 6
Output current per channel 1A 5A
Total controller load 20A
Power supply Integral mains 240VAC External safety extra low voltage
Housing DIN Rail DIN Rail
controller selection - current mode fittings
The considerations for selecting an appropriate controller for current mode fittings relate more to the
controller’s internal capacity to dissipate energy. This is because a constant current driver regulates the
current flow through the LED circuit by effectively absorbing any excess voltage to maintain the nominal
current level. In general, drive circuit internal power dissipation and thus heat generation is inversely
proportional to the number of LEDs in series. Circuits with fewer LEDs in series will have greater heat
generation in the drive circuit for a specific supply voltage. Therefore it is ideal to be aware of the
power dissipation limits of the controller during the fitting design process.
The first step in selecting a suitable controller is to determine the appropriate supply voltage and
confirm it falls within the maximum and minimum limits applicable for the controller. Following are
calculations for determining these limits.
Maximum Supply Voltage
Page 8 of 10 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – LED Control
VS max = PC + (n x VF) or VC max, whichever is the lesser ID
VS max = Maximum supply voltage
PC = Max controller internal power dissipation per channel
ID = Nominal LED current
n = Number of diodes in series per channel
VF = LED forward voltage
VC max = Maximum controller voltage
Minimum Supply Voltage
VS min = 4 + (n x VF) or 12VDC, whichever is the greater
VS min = Minimum supply voltage
n = Number of diodes in series per channel
VF = LED forward voltage
Once again, for multi-circuit fittings the common orientation should be confirmed as compatible with
the controller output. The final step is to calculate the controller internal power dissipation and ensure
it is within the controller’s limits. Following is the expression that should be used to determine this.
PD = (VS - (VF x n)) x ID
PD = Power dissipation per channel
VS = Supply voltage
VF = Diode forward voltage
n = Number of diodes in series per channel
ID = Nominal diode current
It is sometimes necessary to increase the number of LEDs or introduce Zener diodes in series to increase
the total VF and therefore reduce the internal power dissipation.
The controller selection process for current mode fittings can be summarised as follows:
Confirm required supply voltage is within acceptable limits for the controller.
For multi circuit LED fittings confirm common orientation aligns with controller.
Calculate and ensure internal power dissipation is within controller limits.
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – LED Control Page 9 of 10
The following table summarizes the range of Philips Dynalite current mode controllers. Item Code DLEDC-48 DDLEDC60035
Controller Voltage 36VDC 18-32VDC,
12-15VDC selectable
Common Orientation Common anode Common anode
Channels 48 (16xRGB) 6
Nominal Output Current 17-50mA software adjustable 350mA
Max internal power dissipation 0.4 Watts per individual channel 6 Watts combined total for consecutive pairs of
channels (Ch 1&2, Ch 3&4, Ch 5&6). 4 Watts
per individual channel.18 Watts box total
Power Supply Integral mains 240VAC External safety extra low voltage
Housing Wall Mount DIN Rail
current mode controller alternatives
Current mode fittings can be driven by a voltage mode controller if a current regulator such as the
LM317 is included in the load circuit. The advantage of this is that the voltage mode controllers can
deliver more power than constant current controllers and therefore more fittings can be driven from the
one controller.
The following circuit diagrams demonstrate the capacity of each controller to drive multiple current
mode LED arrays.
CH4
COM
DyNet/DMX512
RS485
AU
X
+15VD + D -
GN
D
Shi
eld
Supply:
28-30VDC 5A
+
-
E
µP
CH3
COM
CH2
COM
CH1
COM
CH5
COM
CH6
COM
DDLEDC605
IN OUT
ADJ
LM317
IN OUT
ADJ
LM317
IN OUT
ADJ
LM317
IN OUT
ADJ
LM317 8.2O 0.25W 1%
IN OUT
ADJ
LM317
8.2O 0.25W 1%
8.2O 0.25W 1%
8.2O 0.25W 1%
8.2O 0.25W 1%
LED Fitting, 25 x Nichia NFSW036T LEDs
The DDLEDC605 can drive up to a total of 20A at 24V – A total of 480W including dissipated power.
Page 10 of 10 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – LED Control
CH4
COM
DyNet/DMX512
RS485
AU
X
+1
5V
D + D -
GN
D
Sh
ield
Supply:
230V 1A
1 Phase
A
N
E
µP
CH3
COM
CH2
COM
CH1
COM IN OUT
ADJ
LM317
IN OUT
ADJ
LM317
IN OUT
ADJ
LM317
RED
GREEN
BLUE
3.6O 1W 1%
3.6O 1W 1%
3.6O 1W 1%
DDLEDC401
The DDLEDC401 can drive up to a total of 4A at 24V – A total of 96W including dissipated power.
CH4
COM
DyNet/DMX512
RS485
AU
X
+15
V
D + D -
GN
D
Sh
ield
Supply:
27VDC 2A
A
N
E
µP
CH3
COM
CH2
COM
CH1
COMRED
GREEN
BLUE
CH5
COM
CH6
COM
RED
GREEN
BLUE
DDLEDC60035
The DDLEDC60035 can drive up to a total of 2.5A at 24V – A total of 60W including dissipated power.
2011 Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Limited (ABN 97 095 929 829). All rights reserved. Not to be reproduced without permission. Dynalite, DyNet,
DLight and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Ltd. Luxeon is the registered trademark of Lumileds
Lighting U.S., LLC. Motorola is the registered trademark of Motorola Inc.
technical guide load compatibility
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Load Compatibility Page 1 of 9
overview
Load compatibility is critical when specifying lighting and corresponding control systems. This document
deals with each of the common lamp types and associated control gear. Where appropriate, different
methods of control are also discussed.
mains voltage incandescent lamps (including tungsten & tungsten-halogen sources)
All mains voltage incandescent lamps can be dimmed using Philips Dynalite leading and trailing edge load
controllers. To calculate the connected load, simply multiply the lamp wattage by the number of lamps.
As these are primarily resistive loads, power factor remains at unity.
When specifying the current ratings of the lighting controllers, it is important to note the inrush current
of cold filament lamps. This is usually in the region of 14 to 17 times the running current, but for a split
second. Philips Dynalite protected controllers are fitted with 'Type C' MCB's. This means that in most
cases it is possible to fully load the controller with no need to take account of de-rating. Philips Dynalite
controllers are also fitted with a 'soft start' feature to protect lamps; however if large wattage (500W
and above) lamps are being used, care should be taken to avoid fully loading the MCB's. A 10-15% margin
is suggested to avoid any possibility of 'nuisance tripping' of the breakers.
low voltage tungsten-halogen & halogen-xenon lamps
These lamps include burner lamps and reflector lamps, both dichroic and metal reflector types (MR11 &
MR16). They have traditionally been dimmed via a suitably rated iron-core transformer and leading-edge
phase-control Philips Dynalite Load Controller. Every Philips Dynalite dimming controller has a
symmetrical output voltage waveform (the majority of 'economy' domestic wall-box dimmers do not
guarantee that the output waveform will be symmetrical and could therefore damage the transformers).
A wide variety of transformer types are now commonly available. These should be selected carefully
and matched to the appropriate controller type and capacity from the Philips Dynalite range. Common
transformer types include:
electronic – leading edge dimmable transformers
In general, their losses are less than those of a traditional iron-core dimmer. Add 10% to the total lamp
wattage on a circuit (then divide wattage by mains voltage to determine load current). This provides a
margin for transformer losses when calculating circuit loadings. See "Do's & Don'ts" following for
additional precautions.
Page 2 of 9 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Load Compatibility
These transformers are for low voltage lighting applications. If there are multiple transformers on a
dimmed lighting group, this can initiate a substantial spike when the circuit is switched on due to the
cumulative effect of their input capacitors.
electronic – trailing edge dimmable transformers
These transformers are intended for use only with trailing edge controllers. Their suitability should be
documented in literature provided with the transformer or they should be labeled accordingly. These
style of transformers are typically physically smaller is size making them more suitable for track-lighting
applications or decretive low voltage lamp fittings. A de-rating factor of 10% should be included for
transformer efficiency.
Note: Trailing edge controllers can also be used on mains-voltage filament lamps and on most other
electronic transformers, but not on iron core transformers.
electronic – non-dimmable transformers
These transformers should not be connected to a dimming controller, unless the controller is configured
as a switched output only or damage to the transformer may occur. These types of transformers should
only be driven from a relay unit. A de-rating of 10% should be allowed for.
electronic – DSI/DALI/1-10V transformers
These four wire transformers are operated in exactly the same manner as an HF fluorescent electronic
ballast. Refer to the respective section under fluorescent lighting for compatibility details.
standard ferro-magnetic – ‘E&I’ (economy) transformers
As the name implies, these transformers are constructed from two pieces of laminated steel cores, one
shaped like an 'E'. The wire-winding bobbin is placed over the centre leg of the 'E' and the 'I' is then
clamped over it alternately to close off the mechanical structure. These are perfectly acceptable for
leading-edge dimming applications providing they are manufactured without defect and are used on a
'one transformer per lamp' basis. Transformer losses of around 10% should be considered when
calculating actual loads. In particularly hot environments, it is appropriate to allow for 20% losses.
standard iron core, wire-wound – toroidal transformers
These transformers are wound onto a doughnut shaped iron core. They are more difficult to wind than
the 'E&I' type and so have a higher manufactured cost. They are generally quieter than the economy
transformers, but can generate excessive heat and audible noise if the transformers are potted in epoxy.
Toroidal transformers are popular for building into ELV downlights due to their physical shape. Leading-
edge dimming controllers are suitable for their control.
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Load Compatibility Page 3 of 9
do’s and don’ts of dimming low voltage transformers
When dimming low voltage lamps, Philips Dynalite recommends the specification of one lamp per
transformer. There are several reasons for this:
In the event of transformer failure, only the single lamp is extinguished. The transformer is also
readily accessible as it will be near the extinguished lamp.
If larger capacity transformers are used to control multiple lamps, any variances in cable length will
be manifested in different luminous outputs; the longer the cable, the less light will be observed
coming from the source.
Some transformers can be noisy when dimmed. This is often the case for larger transformers
(especially 'E' and 'I' types), some electronic transformers and toroidal transformers that are potted
in a fixture.
Large transformers are prone to nuisance tripping with MCB's at switch on, although the soft start
features of Philips Dynalite controllers will minimise this risk. The problem is due to the highly
inductive nature of the transformer coupled with the high inrush current of the lamps. Sometimes
large transformers cannot be avoided for stretched-wire or parallel rod distribution systems. These
transformers are usually a component part of the system and should have an integral provision for
fast protection against overload or short circuit of the conductors.
Large wire-wound transformers have high energy losses and poor output voltage regulation.
Some transformers are not suitable for dimming. Please refer to the Philips Dynalite Transformer
Compatibility Guide under the “Technical Support” link on the Philips Dynalite website for further
information.
For effective phase control dimming, minimum loads may apply, depending on the transformer type
or load characteristic of the connected lighting fixtures. Lighting circuits comprising a single low
voltage fitting of 20W or less may exhibit some instability for this reason. Please refer to controller
data sheets or consult a Philips Dynalite representative for advice on minimum loads.
Four-wire transformers (DALI, DSI, 1-10V) require a pair of cables for the control signal, in addition to
the mains feed. Local supply regulations must be observed when wiring mains and control cables, as the
control terminals on the transformers or controllers are not rated as SELV. Mains voltage must never be
applied to the control signal terminals or cables.
Page 4 of 9 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Load Compatibility
fluorescent lighting
There are many different fluorescent lamp types available. As a general rule, those lamps with four pins
are dimmable. Those lamps with two pins and integral starters or those with domestic BC or ES base are
not dimmable. The dimming range of these lamps is a function of the fluorescent ballast connected to
the lamp.
electronic dimmable DALI ballasts
DALI (Digital Addressable Lighting Interface) is a data protocol and transport mechanism that was jointly
developed and specified by several manufacturers of lighting equipment. The common platform of DALI
enables equipment from different manufacturers to be connected together.
DALI is a step on from the DSI protocol, which is used by HF fluorescent ballasts. One of the main
advantages that DALI has over earlier systems is that each device on a segment of data cable can be
separately addressed, as DSI and 1-10V devices are not separately addressable and can only be
controlled as a group. The net result is that to achieve similar control functionally, DALI requires less
complex (and therefore less expensive) wiring topology than DSI or 1-10V devices.
DALI distributes the control intelligence into each luminaire. This enables precise control when used in
conjunction with appropriate Philips Dynalite devices and systems. A DIN-rail mounted Philips Dynalite
DDBC120-DALI communicates on a single pair data cable to a "Universe" of up to 63 other DALI devices.
The input to this Controller is standard DyNet RS485, thereby enabling seamless integration between the
DALI devices downstream and a normal DyNet system upstream that could include intelligent wall mount
control panels, sensors and an economical desktop browser interface. Unlike systems that have adopted
DALI as the protocol for all devices, the Philips Dynalite approach does not reduce the number of DALI
nodes with each additional sensor or wall mounted control panel. DALI ballasts are individually
addressable and enable unique instruction about switching and illuminance to be conveyed to each lamp,
each zone or each universe (64 nodes max. by definition) from a single instruction. The Philips Dynalite
Controller is fully bi-directional, enabling critical status information from each luminaire to be reported
elsewhere over the DyNet network.
Circuit allocation and data wiring may be determined without reference to each other. Data cable is
non-polarised, 2-core mains-rated cable with a maximum network length of approximately 300 metres
(1.5mm2 cable). Each DALI universe must be commissioned, at which time up to 16 Groups may be
assigned. This information is stored in each DALI ballast, as is the individual address, scene value and
Power on level. Fade rates are very restricted in DALI, so they are undertaken in the flexible DyNet
system.
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Load Compatibility Page 5 of 9
The Philips Dynalite DDBC120-DALI offers mains disconnection to the local universe by responding to the
combined 'Off' state of all ballasts. It then electrically disconnects Active supply from the load to
eliminate standby power consumption of ~7 VAR per ballast. This energy conservation measure can
provide significant cost benefits in commercial installations where a large numbers of ballasts are
installed. DALI control is phase independent.
The single phase power relay switching of the DBC120-DALI may be fed through a contactor for a multi-
phase universe. A de-rating of 10% should be allowed for.
electronic dimmable DSI ballasts
Tridonic manufactures a popular fluorescent ballast type that operates on a proprietary digital protocol
known as DSI. Its control signal comprises an 8-bit asynchronous serial command string that is
transmitted at 1200 Baud.
Philips Dynalite's analogue ballast controllers are software selectable to operate DSI type ballasts. These
have the advantage of being addressable by the lighting controller and hence by the upstream DyNet
network. Options include On & Off and dimming level. A maximum fade rate of 1.5 seconds is provided
in the ballast. Slower fade rates are determined in the Philips Dynalite controller and are not visually
perceptible. The ballast type determines the minimum Illuminance possible. In general 1% is achievable
by most ballasts (due to our visual response, this does not appear to be as low as one might imagine).
It is possible to leave the mains permanently connected to the ballast and use the DSI signal to switch
the lamp off, but be aware that the DSI transformer consumes ~7 VAR per ballast while switched off.
This may become an energy savings issue, especially in commercial sites with large numbers of ballasts.
Note that this ballast requires a pair of cables for the control signal, in addition to the mains feed.
Some DSI controllers, such as the Philips Dynalite DBC410 have an integral relay on each circuit, to
switch off mains supply to the lighting circuit when set at 0%. A de-rating of 10% should be allowed for.
DSI is a mid-range controllable ballast solution, but unlike DALI, lacks the ability to address luminaires
individually. A separate data cable is required to connect from the Philips Dynalite Ballast Controller to
each managed group of lights. This does not present a problem where large numbers of lights share a
common controlled level.
Control is generally in the forward direction; that is, from the controller to the load. While a single
back-channel is afforded in the specification, it is not supported by all ballasts. Where feedback is
available, it indicates lamp failure only.
Page 6 of 9 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Load Compatibility
electronic dimmable 1-10V ballasts
Many parts of the world still prefer this solution, due to its economy at the component level. Philips
Dynalite has a wide range of Ballast Controllers for this application, including both DIN-rail mounted and
conventional Black Box configurations (DDBC or DBC product code prefix).
The primary disadvantage of "1-10 volt" dimming is the necessity to separately isolate supply to each
switched zone; hence controllers range from 5 to 20 amps per channel in both single and 3-phase supply.
A dedicated power sub-circuit and a control pair are provided for connection to each zone of lighting.
The controllers also provide the necessary mains switching relays as required in 1-10 volt applications. A
de-rating of 10% should be allowed for.
The single pair data cable that controls 1-10-volt ballasts is also polarised. Accidental reversal of these
cables to any single ballast greatly reduces the dimming range of all connected ballasts in the chain. If
the chain is interrupted at any point, the fault-free side of the chain returns to full light output. There
is no information fed back to the controller with this type of ballast.
Most analogue ballasts are interchangeable, with the notable exception of proprietary '0-10 volt' ballasts
that use zero volts to electronically switch off the lighting.
electronic ballasts - standard
These ballasts are not dimmable, but can be controlled by relay controllers.
do’s and don’ts of dimming fluorescent lighting
In new installations or when the lamps have been changed, the new lamps should be "burnt-in" by being
switched full on for at least 100 hours before any attempt is made to switch off or dim them. This will
improve the visual dimming performance and lamp life. Please check with the lamp manufacturer for
specific advice.
Due to the fact that different type and wattage lamps may have different dimming curves, it is advisable
not to mix fixtures with different lamp types on the same dimmer channel.
cold cathode (glow discharge) lighting
Cold cathode lighting is common in coffer lighting applications and in signage. It is most useful in areas
where access for re-lamping is restricted as the tube life can exceed 80,000 hours. Neon lamps, as they
are more commonly called, are available in three principle types, based on the Argon, Neon or Krypton
gas that is used to fill the glass envelope. Their ability to be dimmed is dependent on the materials
involved.
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Load Compatibility Page 7 of 9
Argon gas-filled tubes are the easiest to dim. Red Neon gas-filled tubes can be dimmed, but over a
reduced range, with the tube diameter being significant to performance. A minimum of 10mm is
required; the larger diameter, the better is the likely outcome for dimming.
In general, Leading Edge Controllers are suitable for dimming cold cathode. The best results are
obtained where the dimmer's output semiconductor is rated at or above 5 Amps (BTA41 or larger).
Smaller controllers, such as the DDMC802 are not suitable. The dimmed channel concerned should be
protected by an MCB.
cold-cathode transformers
A transformer should be of electronic or iron core construction and approved by the manufacturer for
dimming with a leading edge dimmer. If using a dimmable electronic transformer, de-rate the dimmer
channel by 10%. If using an iron-core transformer, de-rate the dimmer channel by 60% and ensure that
any power factor correction capacitors are removed. This should be checked carefully, as some types of
transformers have the power factor correction capacitor buried inside the resin fill, making it difficult to
remove.
If the transformer is an OCP (Open Circuit Protection) type, ensure that it is suitable for dimming, as
many OCP transformers are not. This type of transformer has circuitry that will automatically
disconnect the transformer’s output in the event of a tube breakage.
cables
GTO (gas tube oil ignition) cables should not be of the braided type. GTO cables between the neon and
transformer should not be longer than 6 metres and separated from each other by at least 100mm.
Avoid running GTO cables near metal or in metal conduits. If metal conduit must be used, try to use a
non-ferrous alloy type.
discharge lamps (including metal halide, mercury vapour and high pressure sodium)
These styles of lamps are traditionally switched only. When controlling these types of lamps it is
important to use the larger rated relay devices such as the DDRC240FR to the DDRC1220FR units. The
20A relay units are better suited for handling the inrush requirements of this style of lamps.
When calculating the REAL current for the switching device it is most important NOT to assume that the
connected load can be calculated by multiplying the lamp wattage by the number of lamps. For
example, a 150W Metal Halide lamp has a starting current of 2.4A. This level of current demand lasts
for several minutes after switch on, so it is therefore essential that these loads be carefully calculated
to avoid nuisance tripping of circuit breakers.
Page 8 of 9 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Load Compatibility
Some manufactures of discharge lamps support dimming, this is done using protocols like 1-10V or DALI
traditionally found in ballast dimming. If compatible then this style of lamp may be dimmed in the same
way as florescent ballasts. Manufactures instructions of the control for these lamps should be carefully
followed as incorrect use could damage the lamp or reduce its expected life span.
led lighting
With the increasing rate of technological development on ultra-bright LED’s, luminaires utilising these
sources are becoming more prevalent in architectural applications. There is now an extensive range of
proprietary LED lighting fittings available in the market. Philips Dynalite LED controllers use the widely
adopted pulse width modulation (PWM) technique to regulate lumen output of LED fixtures. As the name
suggests this technique simply involves altering the on time duration of a clock or square wave supply to
the fittings.
LED fittings generally incorporate a number of LEDs connected in a series-parallel circuit array. There
are a number of circuit designs that are emerging as popular conventions. Consideration of the circuit
type is necessary when selecting a controller with the appropriate output, particularly when dimming is
required. Following is an outline of circuit design attributes that are used to classify an LED fitting for
controller selection.
Mode This relates to how LED current is biased. Voltage mode fittings incorporate integral
current limiting devices and are designed for direct connection to a nominal supply
voltage. Alternatively, current mode fittings do not include facility to limit current and
therefore must be connected to a constant current supply.
Rated Input Nominal supply voltage and current.
Configuration This applies to multi channel fittings (i.e. RGB) designed for colour mixing applications,
and designates whether the channels are internally connected as common anode or
common cathode.
Philips Dynalite has developed dedicated LED controllers that cater to a wide range of fitting design
types and it should be noted that mains voltage LED fittings are also available.
Certain types of these mains voltage fittings include an integral regulating power supply with facility for
a control input signal such as 0-10V and DALI. Dynalite ballast controllers may be readily used for these
types of fittings in the same way as an electronically dimmable fluorescent luminaire. Mains voltage LED
fittings without a control input may also be connected to a relay controller when simple on off control is
required.
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Load Compatibility Page 9 of 9
Some mains powered LED fittings are compatible with leading or trailing edge dimming technologies.
Care needs to be taken to make sure that the fittings are compatible. Some LED fittings will have a
reduced dimming range and may produce a “flicker” when dimmed. This can be overcome by using
Philips Dynalite editable dimming curves and an active load that is connected to the leading edge output
channel.
Some flicker may still be present from main supply instability.
2011 Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Limited (ABN 97 095 929 829). All rights reserved. Not to be reproduced without permission. Dynalite, DyNet DLight and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Limited.
technical guide programming methods
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Programming Methods Page 1 of 8
overview
The approach to programming a Philips Dynalite system can be broadly categorised as; system
configuration, preset editing and function programming. This document outlines the various methods
available for programming in all categories.
system configuration
System configuration is the process of assigning base parameters for all devices. This includes
designation of device network addresses, arranging controller output channels and user interface
devices into logical groups and setting command actions for each point, i.e. user control panel button,
dry contact input, sensor state etc.
preset editing
Preset editing entails the setting of controller output channel levels for all output states or scenes
required.
function programming
Function programming involves the creation of control logic and routines for automated system
operation. Typical examples would include provision of entry and egress scenarios, join or base link
functions for combining partitioned areas in a ballroom etc.
System configuration and function programming requires a personal computer attached to the products
or the DyNet network via a DTK622-USB PC Node. The PC Node converts the RS485 DyNet into a serial
communication format suitable for connection to a PC. Philips Dynalite has developed a range of
intuitive software for complete configuration, operation and management, from ‘wizard’ style
configuration tools through to comprehensive site management solutions. A Philips Dynalite
representative should be consulted for advice on the most appropriate software for a specific
application.
For the purpose of providing an overview of Philips Dynalite system programming, this document will
outline the Windows-based Envision configuration software. This application provides a comprehensive
configuration and programming environment that enables the following parameters to be set;
Preset scenes
Fade times
Sequencing
Channel names
Timer clock events
Touchscreen programming
Network address
Logical channel numbers
Join mask
Analogue options
Dimmer curves
Panic functions
Non-dim options
Maximum & minimum level
Page 2 of 8 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Programming Methods
When system configuration has been completed it is also possible to edit presets using a range of
interface options. This enables users to make and save adjustments to lighting levels without the need
for specialist knowledge or equipment. The popular interface options for user preset editing are also
outlined in this document.
programming with Envision
Envision is a Windows-based program that will run under the Windows 98, 2000, XP, Vista and Windows
7 operating systems. It is the ideal tool for larger systems and for those who prefer using Windows-
based programs. This graphics-based software is extremely powerful, whilst still being quick and easy-to-
use. The following screens are an example of some of the facilities offered by Envision.
Figure 1. Network View Dialogue Box
Figure 1 illustrates the physical view of an office installation. It displays all devices on the network,
indicating the network box address for each device. Clicking any device in this view will show the
device’s standard in a dialogue box.
For a dimmer, this dialogue enables logical areas to be
assigned to each channel. In addition, it is possible to set
logical channels for each physical circuit in the dimmer. This
is sometimes referred to as ‘softpatching’. This dialogue
also enables channels to provide non-dimming switched
on/off control.
Figure 2. Configuration Dialogue Box
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Programming Methods Page 3 of 8
Figure 4. Logical View Dialogue Box
All other devices in a Philips Dynalite system are configured in a similar way. Clicking a ‘Universal
Panel’ will show the configuration dialogue for that panel. The standard configuration dialogue for a
Universal Panel enables the default area and fade-time to be set for the area it controls.
From this dialogue, it is possible to custom configure
each individual button on the panel. This makes
available a number of custom features and allows a
single wall mounted user control panel to control
multiple panels. Having shown a number of the
screens available in the Physical View where
products are configured specifically for an
installation, it is then possible to move into the
Logical View, where preset scenes are set.
The dialogue box below shows the logical screen for each of the areas in an office that employs dimming.
Each of these buttons is a unique area on the network. By selecting a button, the program moves to the
logical view of the lighting scene for that area.
Figure 3. Advanced Configuration Dialogue Box
Page 4 of 8 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Programming Methods
The logical view for the area has a ‘virtual’ fader for each logical channel in that area, a ‘virtual’ push button
for each scene and several additional features designed to speed up programming of the lighting within the
area.
The dialogue below is for the ground floor main reception area of the office project. All the information
needed for programming this area is displayed on one screen.
The ‘Area Name’ is particularly useful when working on
large and complex systems. In this example, there are
12 logical channels. Each channel has a virtual fader
comprising a ‘knob’, up and down indicators and a %
level display at the bottom of the fader. This displays
in 1% increments from 0 to 100%. An ‘X’ in this
position indicates an ‘ignore’ (or ‘don’t care’) setting.
There are eight preset buttons. On selection of a button, the virtual faders immediately move to the set
levels for each logical channel. It is possible to program live, so that changes take immediate effect or
to ‘silent’ program, by selecting mute, so as not to disturb the occupants of a space.
Once a preset has been programmed, it is then ‘saved’ into the dimmer(s) memory. To simplify the
process of configuring a large number of dimmers to similar preset levels, the software utilises a ‘copy’
command. This enables any current scene to be copied and then saved as a new scene and modified.
One of the major advantages of Envision is that it is possible to program settings off-site and simply
download to the system once on-site.
Refer to Envision Training Guide for more information on this software.
programming with user control panels
‘one-touch’ control panel
The simplest form of effecting preset adjustments is through a ‘one-touch’ panel. This function can be
applied to one or more channel and a complete logical area.
Figure 5. Preset Editing Dialogue Box
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Programming Methods Page 5 of 8
STEP 1
A simple button push toggles between ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’.
STEP 2
Holding down the button raises and lowers the lighting circuit or
circuits, which are connected to the button. To alternate between
‘UP” and ‘DOWN’, stop pushing for a moment, then hold down again.
The level that is selected is saved and restored when the lights are
turned off and then on again.
fader program panel
Another convenient approach for preset adjustments is the use of ‘hold down’ programming on a fader
panel.
STEP 1
To program preset scenes, press ‘MANUAL’
STEP 2
Adjust channel levels using sliders.
STEP 3
Press and hold down the button to which the settings are to be
stored for at least 5 seconds. Repeat this process for the other
presets. The preset scenes are now stored and can be recalled by
pressing the relevant buttons on this panel, or other panels in the
same area.
programmable preset panel
The programmable preset panel provides a compact and cost effective solution for adjusting lighting
levels on multiple channels, within a single area.
Page 6 of 8 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Programming Methods
STEP 1
Select preset to be changed by pushing buttons 1 - 4. The button LED
will indicate current scene.
STEP 2
Hold down the PROGRAM button until all button LEDs light up
(approximately five seconds). The chosen preset button LED will
flash.
STEP 3
To increase or decrease the brightness of all channels at
the same time, press the up, down or off button until
the required brightness is reached.
STEP 4
To set the level of an individual channel, press the desired
button, 1 – 4. The button LED will indicate which channel is
selected. When more than 4 channels are to be set, press 1
twice for channel 5, press 2 twice to select channel 6, press
1 three times to get channel 9 etc. (Each press of the button
increases the active channel number by 4.)
STEP 5
Press the UP, DOWN or OFF buttons until the lamps on the
selected channel reach the desired level. Select the next
channel and change in the same way.
STEP 6
When all channels of the preset scene have been established,
press PROGRAM again and the levels will be stored to the
current preset. To program another preset, repeat steps 1-
6.
When all channels of the preset scene have been established, press
PROGRAM again and the levels will be stored to the current preset. To
program another preset, repeat steps 1-6.
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Programming Methods Page 7 of 8
Notes:
1. There is no technical limit to the number of channels that can be programmed using this
method. In practice, it is suitable for up to around 16 channels. Above that number,
programming using either the DPP601 portable programmer, or a laptop computer with
Envision software.
2. In some applications, it may be necessary to prevent the programming function being used
by unauthorised personnel. This can be achieved using a keylock to enable or disable the
programming mode.
portable hand-held programmer
The DPP601 portable programmer is ideal for those who do not
wish to connect to the network via a laptop or find the local
control panels too limited in their scope. The unit is lightweight,
compact and simple-to-use. A generous back-lit LCD screen
provides on-line information, confirming the currently selected
scene number or name; channel number or name; % level of the
selected scene; area number or name and the fade time.
It is possible to select a scene, then ‘call up’ channels within that scene and set their levels, either using
the ramp up/down keys, or by entering % levels on the keypad. Once the scene has been modified it can
be saved to the dimmer’s memory. The DPP601 can be plugged into the DyNet network via a user
control panel, programming point as provided on dimmers, or any existing programming socket.
touchscreen
The DTP100 & DTP170 Touchscreens are
versatile user interfaces that incorporate
255 pages, which can be customised to
application requirements. There are a
number of different ways a preset can be
programmed using the DTP100 & DTP170.
Dedicated pages can be configured to clearly
represent the area being controlled and
programming panels and slider panels can be
emulated. The example below outlines a
Figure 6. DPP601 Portable Programmer
Figure 7. Programming preset scenes using a DTK100 Touchscreen
Page 8 of 8 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Programming Methods
typical programming page for a meeting room. This page can be password protected to prevent
unauthorised access.
When the page opens the sliders will move to display the current levels of each channel in the room.
1. Select a preset scene to adjust using the buttons at the bottom of the page.
2. Move the sliders until the desired lighting level is reached.
3. Press the ’save’ button on the right hand side of the page to store the new levels into the load
controller. These levels become the new preset.
2011 Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Limited (ABN 97 095 929 829). All rights reserved. Not to be reproduced without permission. Dynalite, DyNet,
Envision and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Ltd. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
technical guide systems integration
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Systems Integration Page 1 of 9
overview
Integration between various control systems within projects, reduce end-users need to have multiple
interactions to perform what seems like one task such as “play DVD” or “arm security system”. To
perform this function, many different control system elements need to work together. By using different
Philips Dynalite gateways, these elements can be coordinated together to produce a seamless
performance.
Philips Dynalite provides several different methods for interfacing with other services, such as building
management systems (BMS), projector controllers and audio-visual controllers, blind motors and other
third components. This guide outlines some examples of differing techniques.
DyNet over RS485
All Philips Dynalite products communicate using the DyNet protocol which uses RS285 for
communication. A subset of Dynet commands has been made available to anyone wishing to directly
communicate with the Philips Dynalite system. Many AV controller, alarm system and BMS vendors also
make available software drivers that can communicate directly with the Philips Dynalite system using
DyNet messages. This allows the system to be operated as an open protocol. The drawing below
illustrates connection of a BMS directly onto the DyNet bus. In this method, command direct from the
BMS server can be sent to the lighting control system.
To assist in the development of communications drivers for DyNet, we have developed an “Integrator‟s
Handbook”, a copy of which is available on request from local Philips Dynalite dealers.
Page 2 of 9 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Systems Integration
DyNet over RS232
DyNet message packets can also be sent and received over RS232 networks. The Philips Dynalite DTK622-
232 unit is a passive network gateway that converts RS485 to RS232 for full duplex communication that
allows AV systems that use RS232 to simply send Dynet commands directly.
For more advanced integration that requires network message filtering or logical processing, the
DMNG2322 gateway is ideal. This gateway has advanced features enabling it to receive custom RS232
data strings that can trigger a task or send a Dynet message on the RS485 port. An example of this is
shown bellow.
The device can also be used to send custom RS232 data strings to other third-party devices triggered
from Dynet messages. This can allow third-party systems such as AV to be controlled from Philips
Dynalite pushbutton panels.
LonWorks
The Philips Dynalite DDNI-LON provides a LON interface to the DyNet network, via a TP/FT10 LonWorks
port. Lighting SNVTs (standard network variable type) are supported, as well as user-defined types. The
device can typically translate up to 100 presets in 30 areas.
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Systems Integration Page 3 of 9
The diagram above illustrates the cascading of multiple DDNI-LON devices to accommodate a DyNet
network with more than 30 areas.
The device can also be used to trigger complex tasks for changing a project mode. For example, a BMS
system manages the scheduled events and uses LON to communicate to the various systems throughout a
project. A single LON message can be sent that can change the Philips Dynalite system to operate
between “after hour” and “trading hours” mode. This can change the operation from panel function to
sensor timer out, if required.
BACnet
BACnet integration allows for BMS system to send commands to the Philips Dynalite system triggering
functions and timed events. In a Philips Dynalite system that is of a trunk and spur topology, the BACnet
gateway can be connected directly to the network trunk giving it access to all of the system devices.
The BACnet protocol uses addressable points for communication; these addressing points can be adjusted
by the BMS for triggering required functions such as timed events or the Philips Dynalite system for
reporting back current system status.
An example of the kinds of functions that can be achieved is when the BMS system enters “After hours”
mode, a request can then be sent to the Philips Dynalite lighting control system via the BACnet protocol
to turn off all the lighting on a particular floor. The lighting control system can then flash the lighting
off, warning any occupants still on the floor that they need to interact their continuing occupation of the
area by pressing an “afterhours” button or the lighting control system could use passive presence
detectors for detecting occupants. If no occupants have indicated their presence, then the Philips
Dynalite control system will switch off the lighting and report this back to the BMS so that the air-
condition plant can also be automatically shut down.
This kind of integration allows for one system to control many different elements within an area.
TCP/IP Internet-Ethernet
Ethernet connectivity
Philips Dynalite supports a wide range of Ethernet gateways for different mounting requirements.
DNG100BT Wall box mounted and mains powered
DDNG100BT DIN rail mounted and mains powered
DMNG100BT Modular mounted and network powered
Page 4 of 9 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Systems Integration
Using Ethernet gateways allows for networking multiple Dynet RS485 networks together or allows for
integration to web-based systems.
In a typical application of a high-rise office building, each floor will have its own Philips Dynalite system
operating independent of each other. On each of the floors the network uses Dynet RS485 to
communicate between the different devices. To coordinate the different floor systems together, each of
the separate sub systems can be linked together via an Ethernet using gateways. A high speed Ethernet
trunk is run between the floors of the building allowing for site-wide command to be sent while each of
the floors use a network gateway to spur off and start the network.
In applications where the distance between the Philips Dynalite devices exceeds the RS485 network
limit, such as interconnecting separate buildings or linking control centres in a tunnel. These distances
can be overcome by running fiber optic cables between the sites and having them connected together
via Ethernet gateways.
The Ethernet gateways also support the feature of providing remote control of a residential site via a
web browser interface or Philip Dynalite DynamicTouch software. This remote control functionality can
be made available from external locations by making the gateway visible on the Internet, as well as
providing remote control within the dwelling via hand-held computing devices such as Palm Pilots, i-
Pads and web tablets, via connection to a Wi-Fi hub.
Ethernet connectivity products
Connection of Philips Dynalite RS485 to the Ethernet is achieved using one of the Ethernet Gateways. It
can be configured to use the TCP/IP protocol and has an inbuilt web server that can be configured to
serve up pages allowing control of the lighting control system via a web browser.
EnvisionManager Server software is designed to provide high-level integration and control options to a
DyNet network via Ethernet. The DyNet network is connected to a server PC‟s COM or USB port and
information can then be exchanged via client software running on the server PC or clients connecting
remotely over the Ethernet network using TCP/IP.
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Systems Integration Page 5 of 9
Integration to other services is made simple by the use of a set of calls for an industry standard DCOM
interface. EnvisionManager can use client software such as Traypan which is an inexpensive solution for
providing occupants of open plan office space with control over their local environment. TrayPan client
software is provided with EnvisionManager and can provide control of the local lighting from the tool
tray of desktop PC‟s. It uses the existing LAN to communicate with EnvisionManger server software.
When used for occupancy detection, additional cost benefits can be made from not having the provision
of local control panels and sensors that would otherwise be required.
A web page with an ActiveX control is another inexpensive option of client control. The optional
EnvisionManager Toolbox Software Development Kit provides a rapid integration environment for
connection to BMS. A set of system calls and example clients, including source code, are provided to
assist with development of integration solutions and custom clients. As well as control and status
reflection of the lighting system, alarm events such circuit breaker trips and lamp failures can be
automatically forwarded to the BMS. Diagnostic and maintenance data such as lamp burn time is also
readily available.
infrared
infrared reception
Philips Dynalite sensors are multi-function devices; incorporating motion detection, light level
measurement and infrared reception. Infrared signals from hand held remote controls are received by
the sensors and can be translated into DyNet messages, which can then recall a lighting scene of trigger
Page 6 of 9 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Systems Integration
a complex task. These messages can also be translated into other formats via network gateways, such as
into ASCII text strings via the DNG232 Network Gateway or back into infrared via the DIRTX8 Infrared
Transmitter. Philips Dynalite offers a range of hand-held remote controls for use with the Philips
Dynalite sensor range. The codes from these remote controls can be used to program most models of
unified programmable or „leaner‟ remote controls.
infrared transmission
The DIRTX8 Infrared Transmitter is an 8-channel device, commonly used to integrate equipment with an
IR port, such as AV controllers and airconditioners, onto the DyNet network. These IR transmissions can
be triggered from any Philips Dynalite user interface such as a pushbutton panel or even a motion
sensor. Multiple IR codes can be programmed to transmit with the press of one button by using the
inbuilt task engine.
A typical situation is where small IR emitters are fixed to the IR window of Hi-Fi equipment. The IR
emitter includes a one-metre lead terminated with a 2.5mm plug, which is plugged into the DIRTX8.
Multiple channels allow the DIRTX8 to transmit individual codes out on each channel, which eliminates
problems where different Hi-Fi components share the same code. The DIRTX8 can record and store
macros that are executed in response to DyNet messages on the RS485 network.
analogue and dry contact inputs
For receiving analogue and dry contract inputs, the DDMIDC8 unit meets the integration requirements.
The unit can receive eight dry contact inputs and four analogue inputs. When a dry contact closure is
detected, the unit can perform a wide variety of functions such as recall a scene or perform a control
room join. As the unit also has a task engine, multiple functions can be performed from a single contact
closure.
The unit can also receive 1-10V analogue input and directly translated this into Dynet channel level
messages.
Both styles of inputs can be used at the same time so that when a contact closure is detected the
analogue inputs are then enabled. This kind of function could allow a user who wants to use a single
rotary pot to control very large lighting loads that could not normally be controlled in such a format.
dry contact outputs
Philips Dynalite offers several dry contact units that can be used for interfaces, as well as load control.
Two of the more common models comprise eight sets of changeover contacts for added flexibility; the
DDRC810DT-GL (DIN rail mount) and the DRC810DT (wall mount). These outputs are suitable for
connection to SELV circuits.
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Systems Integration Page 7 of 9
CNO
NCCNO
NCCNO
NCCNO
NCCNO
NCCNO
NCCNO
NCCNO
NC
CH1CH2CH3CH4CH5CH6CH7CH8
IN1
A/D
A/D
A/D
A/D
IN2IN3IN4IN5IN6IN70V IN85V
Dry Contact & Analogue Inputs
Dry Contact Outputs
Supply:
230V 0.1A 1 Phase
E
DyNet
RS485
AUX
+15V
D +
D -
GND
SHIELD
N L
µP
A/D
A/D
A/D
A/D
The electrical drawing above is of the DRC810DT. Note that in addition to the dry contact outputs, this
device also has the eight programmable dry contact/analogue inputs described earlier.
analogue outputs
Philips Dynalite ballast controllers can be configured for 0-10V output, providing a ready means of
communicating a control variable to another system. The DDBC1200 illustrated below should be used
where connection to SELV circuits is required.
Supply:
230V 0.5A
1 Phase
N
0CH
2
CH
1
0CH
3
CH
4
00
0-10V / D
SI
0CH
6
CH
5
0CH
7
CH
8
000CH
10
CH
9
0CH
11
CH
12
00
µP
0-10V / D
SI
0-10V / D
SI
0-10V / D
SI
0-10V / D
SI
0-10V / D
SI
0-10V / D
SI
0-10V / D
SI
0-10V / D
SI
0-10V / D
SI
0-10V / D
SI
0-10V / D
SI
AUX
+15V
D +
D -
GND
LE
DMX512
dual port load controllers
Many Philips Dynalite load controllers are available with dual ports, which allow a separate control
network for DMX512 signals, while still allowing the use of the main control system. The DyNet network
can be used to control the behavior of the system in response to DMX signals, such as the selection of the
circuits for which DMX512 control is allowed. It is also possible to only allow partial control of a circuit
via DMX512, in the form of setting a “low limit”, which is useful for allowing partial control of critical
circuits such as egress lighting, but never allowing these circuits to be switched off or dimmed to an
unacceptably low level.
Page 8 of 9 Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Systems Integration
The diagram above illustrates the use of dual port load controllers.
converting Dynet to DMX512
A common requirement for buildings such as hotels, museums and other sites with a lighting control
system is to connect outdoor architectural lighting to the Philips Dynalite network. Often this style of
fixture operates on DMX512 communication protocol. The Philips Dynalite DNG485 Network Bridge
converts DyNet into 64xchannels of DMX512 signals.
converting DMX512 to Dynet
DMX512 can also be converted into DyNet channel level messages. This would be typically be achieved
by connecting a theatrical lighting desk onto a DyNet network gateway DNG232, removing the need for
the lighting control devices to be double ported for DMX512, apart from a single interface. This method
Philips Dynalite Technical Guide – Systems Integration Page 9 of 9
should only be used for smaller systems requiring 16 channels of DMX512 addressing of the lighting
control system.
2011 Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Limited (ABN 97 095 929 829). All rights reserved. Not to be reproduced without permission. Dynalite, DyNet,
Envision and associated logos are the registered trademarks of Dynalite Intelligent Light Pty Ltd. LonWorks & LON are the registered trademarks of
Echelon Corporation. Wi-Fi is the registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Allliance. Palm Pilot is the registered trademark of palmOne Inc.
HyperTerminal is the registered trademark of Hilgraeve Inc. ActiveX is the registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.